Home

HMWIN Studio User Manual, ACGM0195V1EN

1. NOTE The system will print the full area of the screen So all dialogs opened will be printed as part of this area Alarm widget Used to print the entire contents of the event buffer the Default buffer is Alarm Buffer1 The Text category collects the typical widgets used to compose reports with labels and numeric fields 24 3 4 Printer Configuration A default printer can be configured from Printer Setting menu for all graphic reports Each report can be configured to use it or to use a different type of printer For PDF printer Supported only by Graphic Reports you can to define the folder where files are saved by using Printed Files Location 24 3 5 Supported Printers The table shows the list of print languages supported by Windows CE driver printCE dll driver in use in Windows CE platform HP PCL 3 HP PCL printers compatible with HP PCL3 PCL5e PCL3GUI including models 5e HP PCL3GUI many DeskJet LaserJet DesignJet Epson ESC P2 printers compatible with ESC P2 LQ Epson Stylus printers compatible with Epson Stylus Color Color ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 205 Epson LX 9 pin 9 pin printers compatible with Epson LX FX PocketJet Cannon iP100 printers compatible with BubbleJet iP90 iP100 iP90 BubbleJet PocketJet Il 200 3 printers compatible with Pocket Jet MTE Mobile Pro printers compatible with MTE Mobile Pro Spectrum Spectrum Adobe PDF File Adobe PDF file SPT 8 printers compatibl
2. ile edi true printGfxReport void printGfxReport reportName silentMode Prints the graphic report specified by reportName Parameters reportName A string containing the report name silentMode true silent mode avoids to show printer settings dialog Pr ogJecte OEIC epomn U Reporter Gramm dec silt Erue printText void printText text silentMode Print a fixed text Parameters text A string to print SilentMode true silent mode avoids to show printer settings dialog Project pPranelext Helle I Am Text Printing true emptyPrintQueue void emptyPrintQueue Empties the print queue Current job will not be aborted project emptyPrintQueue ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 276 pausePrinting void pausePrinting Suspends printing operations Will not suspend the print of a page already sent to the printer PLOT CC Paue Princeing resumePrinting void resumePrinting Resumes previously suspended printing ONES SONG 4 iS SONS 12 e aLigne abortPrinting void abortPrinting Aborts current print operation and proceed with the next one in queue This command will not abort the print of a page already sent to the printer PEOTI CADOL CEL INEI O printStatus project printstatusi Returns a string representing current printing status error an error occurred during printing printing ongoing printing idle system is ready to accept new jobs paused print
3. bar shows how much memory has been used by the trend buffers currently configured The max number of samples allowed for a project is 1200000 The memory use is the percentage of this number As in the Figure above suppose the total number of samples used in the project is 80000 Then the total memory used will be shown as 3 This is calculated by the formula nites Sa ee ee a Max Number of Samples allowed for a Project As we Increase the number of samples the percentage of usage also increases and this will be shown in the bar The following are the properties of each trend buffer in the Trend Editor Trend Name Defines the trend buffer name which will appear when you define the buffer to a trend window property pane A default name is assigned by the system the name can be modified by the user Active Specifies if the trend runs by default when the system starts up NOTE The trend buffers cannot be activated during Runtime Source This combo list allows selecting the Tag which is sampled by the Trend manager system ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 154 Sampling Time Trigger Number of Samples Storage Device Buffer Sampling Filter Trigger Filter Samples are collected and stored in the disk data file on a cyclical basis Default sampling condition is the time the sampling time specifies the sampling period in seconds When the Trigger tag is specified the source tag is not sampled on a cyclical basis
4. string startPage The page shown when the application is started var startPage project startPage project startPage Page2 jmx ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 271 Follow the list of methods of Project Object nextPage void nextPage The script executes the next page macro project nextPage prevPage void prevPage The script executes the Previous page macro project prevPage homepage void homePage The script executes the Home page macro project homePage loadPage void loadPage pageName The script executes to load the set page defined in the script project loadPage Page5 jmx showDialog void showDialog pageName The script executes to show the dialog page project showDialog Dialog jmx closeDialog void closeDialog The script executes to close the currently opened dialog page project closeDialog showMessage void showMessage message The script executes to display the message popup ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 2 2 project showMessage Hi This is test message getGroup number getGroup groupName groupiInstance callback Fast read method this gets the values of all tags in a group Parameters groupName A string containing the name of the group groupInstance The group element to be filled callback A string containing the name of the function to be called when the group is ready Return value A
5. 1 ACTION_IN PROGRESS 2 ACTION COMPLETED 3 ACTION ABORTED _CHK_FILE_ MISSING 4 ACTION ABORTED _PRG_FILE_MISSING 5 6 ACTION_ABORTED_SDB_FILE_MISSING ACTION_ABORTED_MUTIPLE_CHK_FILES_FOUND ACTION_ABORTED_MUTIPLE_PRG_FILES_FOUND ACTION_ABORTED_MUTIPLE_SDB_FILES_FOUND ACTION_ABORTED_INCONSISTENT_FILE_NAMES 10 ACTION_ABORTED_UNABLE_TOMAKE_TARGET_ DIR 11 ACTION ABORTED _COPY_FAILED 12 ACTION _ABORTED_CODESYS MODULE NOT PRESENT This is a read only system variable OO CO N Variables return information about the printing functions All the variables are read only In the table below you can read the description of the available system variables Completion percentage Current disk usage Current job Current RAM usage Disk quota Graphic job queue size RAM quota Status Text job queue size 8 10Screen The percentage of competition of the current print job It ranges from 0 to 100 The size in bytes of folder where PDF reports are stored it is reportspool if option Spool media type is Flash The name of the report the job is processing Current job is the following report name for a Graphic Report first line of text for a Text Report The size in bytes of the RAM used to process the current job The maximum size in bytes of the folder where PDF reports are stored The number of the available graphic jobs in the printing queue The maximum size in bytes of the RAM used to gen
6. 1 Enable precache just for few pages having many dynamic widgets or pages frequently used by users 2 Do not enable precache for all the pages because memory is not enough and risk is to have no benefit at all 3 Disable static optimization for pages where precache is enabled can help to reduce memory used 41 4 2 Frequently asked questions Precache How many pages should I enable for precache Is there any limits Based on size amp complexity of a page the space required for precaching a single page can be in range 1 2Mb 3Mb as mean Runtime proceed as follow when project is loaded 1 Preload images of pages up to 76MB free ImageDBLowMem 2 Preload pages with precahe true up to 64MB free pageCacheLowMemMayx In this phase images of these pages are loaded in RAM into the Image DB When project is ready 1 Any new page visited is saved in cache RAM with related images up to 40MB free pageCacheLowMemMin 2 When a page change happens and space in RAM is critical lt 40MB the runtime starts to cleanup cache RAM removing pages amp related images up to 64MB free In order the runtime removes from cache a last visited pages and bigger and unused images gt 320x240 b if more memory is needed runtime can unload also pages in precache and all images loaded in Image DB ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 317 42 FAQ 42 1 How to change fill color property according to Tag values HMWIN Studio allow
7. 2 Select Save License option using the radio button 3 Enter Panel ID Once you enter the Panel ID e If you have the backup files of previously activated or created license files in the LICENSEFOLDER the activation key and enabled features will be displayed in the Activation keys section e One empty edit box in the Activation keys section will be enabled to enter a new activation key e The Save License bution will be enabled 4 Enter activation key If you have a new activation key to be activated enter it in the empty edit box in the Activation keys section Once you enter new activation key e The Add Another Key buiton will be enabled so that you can add a new edit box and enter another activation key 5 Save License Once you have completed entering the activation key you can press the Save License button for saving license files Once you press the Save License button e lt verifies the activation key e ltcreates a license file and stores it in the folder LICENSEFOLDER HMI Licenses PANELID ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 303 Once the activation is completed the enabled features or status of the activation keys will be displayed in the Feature status list box that can be seen on the right side of the Activation keys boxes NOTE After the activation is complete to enable license in the panel you must restart it 37 3 Import license If for some reasons it is not possible to have a working Internet connection on the P
8. Figure 234 28 4 Keyboard Layout The Keyboard Layout combo box allows the user to select the layout of the keyboard Generic Keyboard corresponds to a generic International Keyboard layout 28 5 Enable Keyboard You can enable disable keyboard actions both at the project level and at the page level A dedicated property is available in the project property sheet and in the page property sheet Properties 1 x mE Background Template Figure 235 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual The Keyboard can also be disabled at runtime by using a dedicated macro command KeyboardMacros 28 6 Configure Macro Actions for Keys To configure actions for keys in the Keyboard Editor just click on on the key you want to program and you will obtains the expanded view for key configuration als js Press the or buttons to add macro commands or Javascript functions to the key event you want to configure Code 0x1000004 Enable C Inherits project actions Behaviour epeen Repeat period Hold time es On Click Show hide advanced events Figure 236 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 223 29 Tag Cross Reference The Tag Cross Reference displays listsa list of Tag Names used in currenta project based on their location and use Using the Tag Cross Reference in HMWIN Studio it is possible to Verify where each tag is used alarms pages recipes schedulers trends etc Identify invalid tag references
9. Follow the list of Methods supported by Group Object getTag object getTag TagName Gets the tag specified by TagName from the group object ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 270 Parameters TagName A string representing the tag name Return value An object that is the value of the tag or if tag value is an array it returns the complete array If you need to retrieve an element of the array check the method getTag available in object Project undefined Is returned if tag is invalid var group new Group project getGroup GroupName group var value group getTag Tagl getCount number getCount Returns total number of tags in this group Return value The number of tags Var group new Group project getGroup GroupName group var value group getCount getTags object getTags Returns the list of all tags in group Return value An array of all tags in the group var group new Group project getGroup enginesettings group var tagList group getTags for var Ii 0 1 lt taghbist length i144 var tagName tagList i i C w Some N 34 3 4 Project This object defines the project widget The project widget is used to retrieve data about the project such as tags alarms recipes schedules tags and so on There is only one widget for the project and it can be referenced through the project variable Follow the list of properties of Project Object startPage
10. TOUCH TERMINALS HMWIN User Manual SE ae Copyright 2014 Panasonic Electric Works Europe AG Subject to change without notice The information contained in this document is provided for informational purposes only While efforts were made to verify the accuracy of the information contained in this documentation it is provided as is without warranty of any kind Third party brands and names are the property of their respective owners Microsoft Win32 Windows Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Visual Studio are either registered trademarks or trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Other products and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners The example companies organizations products domain names e mail addresses logo people places and events depicted herein are fictitious No association with any real company organization product domain name e mail address logo person place or event is intended or should be inferred ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 2 Contents J Cenn SO a E 11 1 1 ASSUMP UC Nl eaa a E E A E 11 1 2 Installing the Software ccceeccceecceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeesseaeeeeesseaeeeeesssageeeeeeaas 11 1 2 1 System Requirements cccccecccccssececceeseecceeseeeceeueeecseseesseseeessageeeesenseesseaes 11 t22 WAS TAM A WOM es sinense EEEE AT EEEa 12 keo WICC SNAG e
11. cccccccceceseseceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeseeeeeeesesaaeeeeeeeas 291 35 6 HM4Web Limitations cc cccccccccceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeessageeeeeeeas 292 SOOT MAJE sia e ORE A A 292 30 2 ACUO aa a A A she a EE E EERE AEA 293 35 6 3 Tag Attachment cccccccccsssececcesseeeceeseeecseececseusceeseaeeessaeeeeseseeesseseesssaeees 293 5S 6 APO e aa E ee ee oe eee nee 293 35 6 0 Widget Event rennen err wm reer ese mnt a 294 39 0 0 PAC EVON ere mene Pane Mr te See E a See e 294 297 Java eos 01 4 Ay 2 er Deer snenctle a ean ae eee eee eee 294 2151 OIF oA KEPI LS genre ra anne ane Mn Se ne nT nC re er ano re ar re nen See ee ee ee 294 396 9 Dialog PAU wiceicrheeet aut ain Wea at arent ann a Geeta at 295 35 6 1 0 USER Manageme Nl oseiscert cet ta rlennce a eee aa ce ictal ad 295 35 6 11 Maximum Concurrent User Connections cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 295 35 7 Troubleshooting and EO serina a decal eat 295 35 7 1 EnabledJava Cr D Geenen a eles taut had a ln dat ed 295 30 722 BROWSEl Cache icicle thal ec earth uo ne dat a 295 30o Sna PrO este Nm ear eee mae 295 35 7 4 Why I m not able to see Changes in web pages cccceececceseeeseeeeteeeeeeaeees 296 36 OV SIEM Se MINGS TOO eatemeco tise sacicpen arate a a a 297 36 1 C8 F121 il 0 6 2 ranean een eee ee ea ee es ne een re eae ore ee eee eee ee 297 SO OSEM ModE saa oar a ate es area eee a a aan bakes ne a a a 298 37 License Act
12. value with a Period of 60 3600 seconds When the counter reaches Amplitude Offset the value is reset to Offset and the counter restarts A sine wave value is generated and written to the Tag value The Min Max and Period values of the Sine wave can be defined for each Tag A triangle wave value is generated and written to the Tag value The Min Max and Period values of the wave can be defined for each Tag A square wave value is generated and written to the Tag value The Min Max and Period values of the Sine wave can be defined for each Tag HMWIN Studio User Manual 41 5 Transferring the Project to Target The HMWIN Studio project can be transferred to the runtime in two ways 1 Using the Download to Target item in the Run Menu 2 using an Update Package via USB 5 1 Download to Target Run gt Download to Target can be used to transfer project and runtime via Ethernet from the HMWIN Studio to the runtime NOTE The panel must have a valid IP address assigned Please see the chapter Unit Basic Settings for further information on how to assign an IP address to the panel Once the panel has a valid IP address assigned it will become discoverable on the local network Click on the discovery button and select the HMI from the list of IP addresses Download to Target Ready to download HMI 192 166 4 210 HMI 197 168 7 129 Advanced Figure 41 Click on the Download but
13. Check z order of widgets using the combobox An icon allows to distinguish between static picture icon and dynamic movie frame icon widgets The combobox is listing widgets in z order Visual filtering reduces the opacity of the widget above the currently selected widget so user can easily edit widgets hidden by overlapping items Ea 6 drop a 4 recti et 9 rect 3 3 parallelogram _ aa 4 pentagon a 5 fatcross aa 6 drop Figure 65 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 58 6 5 Change properties of several widgets at once For widgets of the same type ex two or more labels two or more fields two or more gauges etc the user can change common properties in few steps using HMWIN Studio To change multiple properties of widgets proceed as follow 1 Select all widgets of the same type where is required to change common properties 2 Change common properties from property pane When multiple widgets are selected the property pane title changes to lt MultipleObjects gt indicating that all properties changes will be applied to all widgets selected on the page Properties a x 61 amp lt MultipleObjects gt Value Number Forma Keypad Numeric Min 32708 Max 32767 Figure 66 NOTE Not all properties can be modified for multiple widgets simultaneously and must therefore be modified individually ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 59 7 Project Properties
14. DROP AVALID MULTIMEDIA FILE HERE Will try to play or encode Active FileName Streaming Link Output Status 70 208 MB Player Options Figure 270 2 Select AVI from the Output Container list and select H 264 AVC from the Output Video Codec ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 239 7 Select the Output Container Ju E F You may select FFmpeg or MEncoder FFmpeg p DirectShow Decode Select the Output Video Codec 3 MEncoder Figure 271 3 Click theH264 Profile button you can see on the right side of main window and from the opening dialog choose BaselineProfile and Level 3 Adwanced H264 Options MOV MP4 ye Tweak HS AWC Profile Level and Ref Frames H 264 A C Profiles H 264 AVC Levels Baseline CABAC off 1 21 C4 Main CABAC on yi1 22 41 High CABAC on C12 E 42 Hi444PP CABAC off 913 93 1 5 Hi 44PP CABAC on O2 32 5 1 Figure 272 4 Enable the checkbox Disable Audio 5 Click Encode Active Files to start encoding of the videos Now you can open the videos with a standard video player e g Windows Media Player and check the quality You can add the resulting video to the playlist of the Media Player Widget 31 5 1 Using Media Player in JavaScript The Media Player Widget can be also referenced in JavaScript programs with the following syntax get the mediaplayer widget var mediaWgt page getWidget MediaPlayerWgt2 l
15. NOTE To use the SendKey macro you must define the keypad type as Macro in the Numeric Widget properties ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 86 Action List A WY W SendKepw idgeti keyCode Select the key to attach to ryn Figure 87 9 3 3 ShowKeyPad ShowKeyPad is used to show the default operating system touch keypad Some operating systems might not support it 9 3 4 KeyboardMacros KeyboardMacros enable and disable the use of keyboard Macros at runtime when using external keyboards You can also enable disable macro execution related to keyboard studio side at the project level and at the level of the single page A dedicated property is available in the project property sheet and in the page property sheet ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 87 Properties a X 61 42 iA Height Background Figure 88 9 4Page Actions The Page Actions macros are used for page navigation and to load specific pages Please note that the Page Actions are programmable ONLY in the released state The Page Actions macros are available for Alarms Schedulers and Mouse Release Events 9 4 1 LoadPage The LoadPage macro allows you to load the selected page of the project when the macro is executed pageName LoadPageAction pagename Figure 89 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 88 9 4 2 HomePage The HomePage macro allows you to specify the home page By default the home page is the first p
16. ReadOnly Read Write Write Only Tagindex Figure 74 System variables are divided into categories Starting from v1 90 b608 System Variables are available also as a standard protocol in the Protocol Editor This protocol can be used for data transfer betweens System Variables and tags from devices or when is necessary to specify a custom refresh rate for a System Variable 8 1 Alarms Variables return information on the actual number of alarms according to the status Not Triggered Total number of alarms Not Triggered Acknowledged Acknowledged Not Triggered Not Total number of alarms Not Triggered Not Acknowledged Acknowledged ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 70 Triggered Total number of alarms Triggered Acknowledged Acknowledged Triggered Not Total number of alarms Triggered Not Acknowledged Acknowledged Triggered Alarms Total number of alarms Triggered Number of missed Total number of missed alarm events alarm events All these System Variables are Int type 32 bit read only 8 2 Communication Variables return information on the status of the communication between the HMI device and the controllers configured in the Protocol Editor Protocol The variable is read only Int 32 bit and can have 3 values Communication 0 No protocol running it may occur if the protocol driver has not been Status properly downloaded to the target system 1 Protocol has bee
17. Scaling can be applied to the Tag values To apply scaling use the X Forms attached to dialog You can set the Minimum or Maximum of the curves You can also attach a Tag to these minimum and maximum properties This enhances the ability to change the min and max dynamically in the Runtime Also you can modify the properties such as colors update time number of samples etc of the Trend curves through the property view 16 2 History Trend If you want to analyze the data at a later time the Trend data will need to be stored For this purpose you use History Trend When you select History Trend you can store the data information with reference to time The first step in creating a History Trend is to create a Trend Buffer The purpose of the trend buffer is to save a sequence of values of a specified Tag in order to record the state of the tag while time changes Once values are stored in the buffer a dedicated widget called History Trend viewer can be used to display the curve in a graphical format The History Trend viewer is available in the widget gallery In the History Trend widget the start time of the Trend window will be the current time and stop time will be the current time duration of the window The plot starts from the left end of the Trend window as in the figure below The graph will be automatically refreshed during a certain interval of time until the stop time When the curve reaches the stop time the graph will sc
18. Starting from v1 90 b608 the VNC Server has been added as plugin ref to Plugins chapter for more details to allow developers of hmi applications to choose if enable amp download it as part of the runtime Just enable it from project properties gt plugins and install update runtime to download it into the target VNC server is located in folder Flash qthmi VNC and can be activated using macro launchVNC LaunchVNC macro is used to open the VNC configuration dialog From the configuration dialog you can e Start Stop Restart VNC Server in Control Tab e Enable security and set password in Options tab that will be used later for access using a VNC viewer e Enable Autostart in Advanced tab to activate VNC server automatically every time the HMI panel Start o Silent Startup usefull only when Autostart is enabled prevents the VNC dialog from appearing at panel start up and keeps it open in the background OK WNC Options Options Advanced Gut Control Advanced Marne vnc Display lo Update Frequency ms 500 Encoding Security None Password ue NC Options OK WNC Options Control Options Advanced Out Autostart Silent Startup Show Taskbar Icon Restart VAC Server Connect To Viewer Server IP Address Confirm Connection 192 168 40 10 Figure 128 OK button on top right of VNC server configuration dialog is used to confirm and save changes Advanced configurations are provided for
19. The radio buttons at the bottom allow you to set the access type The TagIndex selection is used in the case of arrays to determine the array element ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 51 Pack Lala Source Tag System Widget Recipe 4 Modbus TCP protl Tagl Tagz Tags Tag4 Tag Read Only Read Write TagIndex 0 Figure 56 When adding Tags the Protocols used in the Project are shown in the tag Dialog box and when expanding each protocol the corresponding tags can be seen The tags will be arranged in alphabetical order inside each Protocol There is an Option to search the tag to be attached by its name as shown in the Figure above This makes it easy to find Tags The search can be done in two ways first you can start typing the tag name in the left box and this will jump into the list to the first tag starting with the characters you have entered second you can type in the search box any part of a tag name and this will automatically apply a filter to the view so that only the tags which contain the search characters are displayed Scale XForms allows you to apply transformations to the numeric value of the source element before it is applied to the property of widget Transformations can be simple linear relationships or generic transformations Linear scaling can be configured when selecting the Scale tab and they can be specified in terms of a formula or By range In case the
20. Try to minimize transparent areas for example splitting the image in multiple images since they can be a waste of resources even when optimized 4 Optimize image size The image will be rendered at a maximum size which is the size of the image widget containing the image For best performances the widget needs to be the same size of the image 5 If possible avoid using scale to fit which forces a rescaling at runtime for dynamic images and hides the actual image size during editing In fact it is common to use very large images that are rescaled at runtime to fit their actual image widget size 6 If overlapping cannot be avoided make sure to set the static widgets to back order gt move to back ie behind the dynamic widget changing the z order of static widgets to be under the dynamic widgets 7 Use size to fit command to make the widget to the real size of his contents 8 Choose the image file format based on the real target you have HMWIN Studio is supporting several raster formats like BMP PNG JPEG TIFF and the vector format SVG PROs CONs RASTER Fast rendering Big file size Well standardized Fixed resolution VECTOR Small file size Complex SVG images with many graphic items SVG Rescale without quality loss and layers can be slow to render Canhandle dynamic properties Scour software is free tool can be used to remove foreign code from file http www codedread com scour Creating an optimi
21. Widget Gallery px Basic Buttons Meters Lights Media Advanced Data SOurces U aj 5 gp E E ai gI Figure 265 The purpose of the Variables widget is to have some internal variables that can be used for operations such as data transfer or use in JavaScript programs The variables are local to the page where the widget has been inserted To insert the widget in a page just drag and drop it to any position on the page This will display a place holder to indicate that the widget is present but it will not be visible at runtime You can create some variables and assign values as shown in the following figure ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 235 Figure 266 The configured Variables can be referenced from the Attach tag dialog once you click on the Widget source as shown in the following figure Tag System O West O Recin Tag gt BtnStdS 4 Variables Wot Variablel Variable Variables Figure 267 In case global variables are needed they can be configured from the project widget adding the desired variables to the global Variable Widget as shown in the following figure File Edit Run Format View Window Help B AA Langi 7 Properties Figure 268 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 236 31 4 1 Using Variables in JavaScript The Variables can be also referenced in JavaScript programs with the following syntax For Local Variables Welle vacho Osis
22. dataFormat JonDataUpdate esl a rt Supports Tags E Advanced Tags P A Y Figure 286 Enter the name of the custom widget This is the name that will appear in the Property view The next step is to select the properties that will be displayed in the Property view Click on the button above the Properties list box and a Property Select dialog will be displayed NOTE The ConvertToWidget dialog shows standard custom widget types These types are defined in the gallery The dialog however does not show types that are specifically created for a project Display Name Name that will be shown in the Property view You can change it to set the information for each custom widget property Attribute Name The name exposed by HMWIN Studio to JavaScript functions and Attach Tag dialog The default property name has the form WidgetType name WidgetType is the type of widget and name is the attribute name If you have more than one widget of the same type the widget type name will be WidgetType01 WidgetType02 etc Display Category The category or group of the property in the Property view All properties in the same category are shown together in the Property view This allows you to organize the properties in the view The Display Category allows you to view by category group by clicking on either the Collapse or Expand button For example you can declare position properties like the X coordinate heigh
23. enabled or disabled When the Audit Trail is enabled the padlock symbol is shown locked otherwise it stays open ProjectView 1 x aE LE c Projecti A Projectl B ea Pages Tai k MultiLanguage dh Security eat UserGroups so Wa Dictionaries je DialogPages le Page Templates Figure 207 23 2 Configure Audit Events You can have more than one set of Audit Records To add to the Audit files you need to configure the Events buffer ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 198 Double click the Events buffer from the project workspace Next add the events buffer and set the file size and then select the log type Audit Here there is an option for selecting the storage where the dumped Audit files have to be stored ProjectView ax mla a e dceTest021 AuditTrail gg dcTest021_AuditTrail AlarmBuffer True FLASH Elem Pages 2 AuditTrail True FLASH E 1 Pagel Eee Config ie Protocols ae scheduler gy MultiLanguage Figure 208 The system provides a save to file on the disk every 5 minutes 23 3 Configure Tags in the Audit Trail For most cases all the tags specified in the project do not necessarily need to be monitored You can customize the tags to be monitored by the Audit Trail ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 199 protocols Speed v AuditTrail Torque w AuditTrail Temperature AuditTrail Viscocity F AuditTrail Tag5 AuditTrail Tag6 IE AuditTrail
24. 32 1 Creating a Custom Widget The following steps describe how to create a custom widget 1 Select all the Widgets you want as part of the custom Widget and group them 2 Right click on the group and select Convert To Widget from the context menu A Convert to Widget dialog box is shown below ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 251 2 Rotation Menu E T D r sm ST EA Ct Tu TEN a E stom Security settings Attach To Expand all Figure 285 You can select existing custom widget types such as Knobs Button with Light etc or you can select Custom to create a new custom widget type 32 2 Adding the Properties After creating the custom widget the next step is to add the properties that will be published in the custom widget property pane The Property Select dialog shows all the applicable properties for the grouped widget this is basically a list of all the properties of the individual widgets grouped together You can select the properties that you want to expose for that custom widget by clicking the corresponding check box ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 252 Name GroupWaot4 Property Values Properties A W mpe Display Name Property Select Attribute Nami Select the Property Names E Linear Scale 1 E Labels Wot JreverseScale E min E max reverseScale Display Category Description JreverseScale L dataType labelNames dataFormat
25. 57 6 3 Widgets positioning Snap to Grid Snap to Objects cc ceeeceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 57 oor I TO ase este cts cetera E A E E E E 57 oae aP ODE eiee EE E E EEE eee 57 ACGM0195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 6 4 Z order Of WIAGES c cseecccccceeseececcceeeeeceeeceeueeeeeeeseaseeeesseeaeceeseseageeeessaaeeeeeeenas 58 6 5 Change properties of several widgets at ONCE ccceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 59 7 Project Properties Project WidQet cccccccccsssseceeeceeeseceeeseeeeeeessseaeeeeessaaeeeesesaaees 60 7 1 MOT SOM ssccae se tectereeeconanseeveneytuatswayadeyoanteeecdae E 60 7 2 COMLEX MICA sssini aa N 60 7 3 DEV CIO DEF TOOS eaen a 61 Tol ProD erenn a a a aa a era 62 ae WACO eaaa e ae EEN RE 63 7 4 Buzzer on touch Buzzer duration ccccceeecceceeeeeecseeceeceeeceeseeseeesseeeeessaaeees 64 7 5 SC WO rerna N AET 64 7 6 JAVASCHOL DCO UG saeir a A A A 64 7 7 Allow JS Remote Debugger cccccseeecceeecaeeeeeeeesaeeeceeeseeeeeceeesseaeeeeesseeeeeeeeeas 65 7 8 Image DB enable ccecccccccssseeceeecseeeceeeceeeeceeeseeaeceeeeseaseeeesssaaeeeeessaeneeeeeeaas 65 7 9 FreeType Font Rendering ccccccssescccceeeessceeeceaeeeceeesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesaeeeeeesaeaaes 65 7 10 Software Plug in MOCUIES cccccceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeesseeeeeeeesseaseeeeesaaaeeeeseeas 65 7 11 Behaviour gt HOME Page cccccsseeececeeeeecceeeeeecseeeeeeeeueeeeesueeessne
26. 6 Y Labels 6 Title Grid X Scale Y Scale Curve 1 Val DataLink History Trend1 PanelTrend 05 30 00 05 30 00 05 30 00 05 30 00 Color W 128 0 0 E Py StrokeWidt 2 Curve 2 Then in the property pane of the Trend window attach the trend buffer to be plotted in the trend window as shown in the figure below ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 155 Tag System Widget Recipe Tag Trend1 b MultiLangMgr Btn tds BtnStd PanelTrendl Trend Trend2 gt Trendigt ReadOnly Read Write Write Only TagIndex O Figure 159 16 3 Trend Window Properties With the help of the property pane of the trend window you can customize the Trend window properties such as X Axis time Y Axis value number of trend curves changes to the labels grids number of samples etc 16 3 1 Request Samples Advanced View In the Curve x category there is one property called Request Samples as shown in the figure below O Curve 1 Curve 1 Value DataLink Trendi Pani eae or aa ea a ea ea Fa Pe se T Falh a ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 156 Figure 160 This property represents the maximum numbers of samples read by the widget at one time from the buffer data file this block size can be adjusted to fine tune performances in trend viewer refresh especially when working with remote clients The default value is normally a good
27. 9 11 2 UpLoadRecipe The UploadRecipe macro allows you to transfer the controller data to the Recipe set data In the macro properties select the Recipe in the Recipe Name and select the Recipe set that you want to upload To upload to the currently selected Recipe set select curSet in RecipeSet ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 107 Action List A W W UpLoadRecipel Dump EventArchive DeleteEventArchive Reset ProtoEmCount UpLoadRecipe Figure 103 9 11 3 WriteCurrentRecipeSet The WriteCurrentRecipeSet macro allows you to set the selected Recipe as current Recipe Set In Macro Properties select the Recipe and Recipe Set you want to set as the Current Recipe in runtime Action List A W ae WriteCurentR ecipe Figure 104 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 108 9 11 4 DownLoadCurRecipe The DownloadCurRecipe macro allows you to transfer the current set of Recipe data to the controller No parameter is required in the Macro Properties This will download the currently selected Recipe and Recipe set to the controller Action List A W W DownLoadCurhecip a Macro Properties ResetProtoEnCourt n SaftelyRemoveMedia Recipe Actions Figure 105 9 11 5 UploadCurRecipe The UploadCurRecipe macro allows you to transfer the set of controller data values to a Recipes set No parameter is required in the Macro Properties This will upload the currently selected Recipe from the
28. AuditTrail csv Where AuditTrail is the name of the dumped buffer without extension and AuditTrail1 csv is the desired output file name 9 10 6 DeleteEventArchive The DeleteEventArchive macro allows you to delete saved Event buffers log data from the file In the macro properties define the Event buffer name that you want to delete from the Event logs 9 10 7 ResetProtoErrCount The ResetProtoErrCount macro is used to reset the Protocol Error Count System Variable See the chapter System Variables for further information about system variables 9 10 8 SafelyRemoveMedia If you unplug an SD Card or a USB drive from the HMI while it is transferring or saving information you risk losing some information This macro provides a way to help you safely remove such devices ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 105 Action List Action List A vY W Safe Removekledial Macro Script ScrollEventsForward Macro Properties Type USB Dump Trend enei USBMemory Delete Trend 3 Dump EventArchive 3 Delete Event Archive Reset Proto ErCount 2 SafelyRemoveMedia Recipe Actions Down LoadRecipe Up LoadRecipe Figure 101 9 10 9 CopyCodesysProject The action CopyCodesysProject copy the CODESYS 2 3 project files prg chk and sdb located in the source path into the panel CODESYS folder Files are automatically renamed to DEFAULT CHK DEFAULT PRG BOOT SDB if it is of different name After copy of files the
29. BSP Settings Operating system version Unit operating timers power up and activated backlight timers Buzzer control Battery LED control Network IP address settings Plug in List Provides a list of the plug in modules installed and recognized by the system this option may not be supported by all platforms and all versions 36 2System Mode System Mode is the interface of the System Settings tool with all the options enabled The HMI products support a special procedure for accessing the System Settings tool the special procedure is required to start the System Settings in System Mode or when the standard access procedure is not accessible for some reason When activated by this special procedure the System Settings tool always starts in System Mode The special access to the System Settings tool can be activated with a tap tap sequence over the touch screen during the power up phase Tap tap consists of a high frequency sequence of touch activations done by the simple means of finger tapping the touch screen performed during the power up and started immediately after the device has been powered In addition to the options available in User Mode the following important features are available Format Flash To format the internal panel flash disk All projects and the runtime will be erased returning the panel to a factory new condition Restore Factory Restore Factory Settings is used as alternative to Format Flash that s a Setti
30. CODESYS module is stopped reloaded and started again Parameters e Source Path path of project into external storage Ex USBMemory Codesys e Copy Symbols if set to true copy also SDB symbols file used by CODESYS 2 ETH protocol To generate CODESYS project files proceed as follow from CODESYS 1 Execute Project gt Rebuild All to generate an updated SDB symbol file 2 Execute Online gt Create boot project to generate the CHK and PRG files The CopyCodesysProject action can be used also to transfer a CODESYS project from one hmi panel to another In this case files needed from hmi running CODESYS project are following DEFAULT CHK DEFAULT PRG BOOT SDB Using System variables PLC gt PLC Status and PLC gt Get CopyCodesysProject Action Status the status of PLC and of CopyCodesysProject action can be verified ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 106 9 11 Recipe Actions The Recipe Actions macros are used in programming the recipe management 9 11 1 DownLoadRecipe The DownloadRecipe macro allows you to transfer a set of Recipe data to the controller In macro properties select the Recipe in the Recipe Name field and select the Recipe set you want to download To download the currently selected Recipe set select curSet in RecipeSet Action List P A WwW W DownLoadRecipel DumpEventArchive Macro Properties Delete Event Archive Up Load Recipe WrteCurent Recipe Set Figure 102
31. E E pel viaeqeunmeanmivesaaveuts 12 1 2 4 Installing Multiple Versions of HMWIN Studio on the Same Computer 14 1 2 5 Opening Projects Created with Older Version of HMWIN Studio 04 15 1 2 6 Multilanguage for HMWIN Studio ce cccccccseseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesesaeeeeeeesaaees 15 ber SNAG TCD OUD e a E E E 15 TAC HIN RUNU Ciorna ecesaccosaceassqeciencecea aaesceccessaantosacsqncmmaseadinsaesoacencue sean asseceenceeaaeaeseeee 17 2 1 KUNUT NOOS orren Tia E EE EE 17 2 2 Bete TES CNS aE E A E 17 2 3 Other Context Menu OPTIONS ccccccccccseeseeeeeeeeeecaeeeseeeeeeesesaaaeeeeeeeseesaaeaeees 18 2 4 B ilt in SNIP SOIVICC seca derctsicceacsecdectcdeneceadrianectadeadeeeisseddesstenedaceeiauudeadsaeegeasnsieeas 21 RUDY Te TSI FO OC uasna AE E E EEEE 22 3 1 Creating a New PLoject ccccccssscccceeseeccseeeecseseecseseeessaseeecsaeeesseuseesseaeeeeees 22 3 2 TANS OGK SIAC Osasin nr NEE EEE EEEE AREE 24 3 3 COMMUNICATION PrOtOCOIS ccecccccseeceeceeeececceeeeeeceeeeeeceeeceeseeeeeesseaecesseaeeeeeas 25 3 4 TAS sacs cee secre ne se iat E A P E ace gucuia doses A I E A oss eae sone 26 JAI TOEO eie A E shane uonuiman tena qusmnaeseua hues iengensataede 28 Ja BILINO autoncnaisereinevaqiacanieaveraeusinaresisaneiaqus Shauna A E thus icengensatonden 29 SAS DCD O seacecce ages eee A N 30 3 5 WS SIOMING Ai AOS irepo ciuanaovonsmactaedi 31 30 1 AMPOMING A PACS aieiessciiesatsacgestsacsqeacdisasiesee
32. HMI Runtime and project is available Backup operation is working as follow 1 Automatically unload current project to unlock opened files in use 2 Archive in a zip file standard or encrypted the content of gthmi folder that contain runtime projects dynamic files like recipes alarms trends etc 3 Reload project Backup can be executed from the context menu in runtime gt Backup foom In zoom Out oom LOO Pan mode Settings Project Manager Update Backup Restore Logging Show Log at Boot Show system settings About Figure 216 When Backup is called from the context menu a dialog appears to guide the user in backup operation selecting the path where to save the zip file with backup USB SD C C Ss Pd Encrypted Figure 217 Backup files can be saved in all available storages like USB SD card network folders etc NOTE Backup is available in WCE only platform It is not supported in Win32 HMWIN Client ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 211 NOTE Backup ignores external files stored on USB and SD cards So if dynamic data like recipes trends events are archived there the backup will ignore it Backup package can be restored from a formatted HMI panel using Transfer from disk option in the BSP Loader menu Just select backup file and the system will automatically check the package to confirm its compatibility with the current platform and install it G System settin
33. Path for saving the update package 5 3 The Runtime Loader The explanations provided in the previous chapters are valid when using a panel with the runtime system already installed The HMI devices are delivered from the factory without the runtime When you power up the unit for the first time it starts with the Runtime Loader screen as shown below ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 47 o System settings a Transfer from disk No HMI found Waiting for transfer Figure 50 NOTE The Runtime Loader is a feature dependent on the device Operating System and may not be available on all the units The description provided in this chapter assumes that you are using HMWIN Studio V1 80 or later On MIPS based units the Runtime Loader is available from version V2 65 on ARM based units the Runtime Loader is supported from BSP version V1 52 When you click on System settings you can activate the System menu in User mode where you can set the IP address of the panel See the chapter for additional information on this tool Once the IP address is assigned and the panel is connected to a valid network the easiest way to install the runtime is to download a project from the HMWIN Studio See the chapter for additional information The normal download procedure in Studio is able to recognize the need for transferring the runtime and the process is automatically started As soon as the panel IP is selected f
34. Project Widget Project properties contain settings for the project Project properties are available from Project View The Properties window on right side of the HMWIN Studio contains the list of project level user configurable data File Edit Run Format View Window Help Se eG I QS A A Langi ProjectView SE Project223 Ey a ig Project properties _VariablesWgt Pomi Version Context Menu Eee Config Developer Tools 2 El Protocols Keyboard Tags JavaScript Debug Allow JavaScript Remote De Image DB Enable Plugins E Behavior Home Page PageWidth PageHeight Display Mode FA Data transfers a Security m AuditTrail jem Recipes Project Type PageReguest 5 Keypads CurrentPage SyncOptions Hold Time ms Autorepeat Time ms Figure 67 7 1 Version The Version field is available for users to report the project version 7 2Context Menu The default method for users to access the runtime settings is to press and hold for a few seconds on an empty area of the runtime screen Using this property you can choose how the context menu should appear ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 60 on delay default press and hold on macro command via macro action controlled by HMI application oom In zoom Out oom LOO Pan mode Settings Project Manager Update Backup Restore Logging Show Log at Boot Show system settings About Figure 68 7 3 Developer Tools Developer tools ar
35. Runtime management Install runtime and update runtime e Board management replace main BSP components such as MainOS ConfigOS Bootloader etc e Download and upload of project files A default value for this password is used by the HMI Runtime and by HMWIN Studio to access to device There are three ways to change device password in the HMI Runtime 1 Using the tab Remote in the BSP Settings in system mode dialog box in System menu includes starting from BSP versions V1 64 UN30 31 and V2 73 UN20 Version Timers Buzzer Password Remote Remote connection password settings BSP Setting New password Confirm password Figure 319 2 Using the tab Password in Settings from the runtime Context Menu ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 309 Password Old password New password Confirm password Figure 320 HMWIN Studio shows a dialog asking for the password to match the password defined in the HMI device The new password will be stored into the computer OS registry to be used for further connections 3 Using Set Target Password in update package Password is updated by the runtime just after the update process is completed If the update failed for example because Old password does not match the hmi password a popup informs the user about it You can enter the same password in HMWIN Studio using Manage Target gt Board gt Connection setting to allow in HMWIN Studio to access runtime De
36. Tag7 E AuditTrail Tag8 E AuditTrail Tag9 AuditTrail Tagl0 Iv AuditTrail Tag11 AuditTrail Tagl2 E AuditTrail Tagl3 E AuditTrail Tagl4 ry AuditTrail Tag15 F AuditTrail Tagl6 a AuditTrail Tagl7 a AuditTrail Tagl8 E AuditTrail Tag19 AuditTrail Figure 209 In the Audit Trail editor all the Tags are available for selection You can select only the Tags to be monitored by the Audit Trail For each selected Tag the Audit Trail will record the write operation to that Tag together with the time stamp and user that executed the write operation 23 4 Configure Alarms in the Audit Trail You can specify the alarms to be monitored by the Audit Trail Double click Audit Trail from the project workspace and click on the Alarms tab Select the alarms you want to be logged in the Audit Trail The Audit Trail for alarms will also record and acknowledge the operation done by the logged in user ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 200 Alarm1 v AuditTrail Alarm2 E AuditTrail Alarm3 AuditTrail Alarm4 m Alarm5 ua Alarm6 AuditTrail Alarm7 F AuditTrail Alarm8 v AuditTrail Alarm9 E AuditTrail Alarm10 a AuditTrail Alarm11 AuditTrail Alarm12 F AuditTrail Alarm13 AuditTrail Alarm14 fal AuditTrail Alarmi5 AuditTrail Alarm16 AuditTrail Alarm17 AuditTrail Figure 210 23 5 Configure Login or Logout Details in Audit Trail The Audit T
37. Timeo Modbus ATU prott ClgVer 1 defNodeld 1 timeo g0 Variablesprot2 CigVer 1 E Not applicable Modbus RTU Drot ChgVer 1 defNodeld 1 timegi E 30 lt gt Figure 174 19 5 Offline Management Toolbar buttons amp Advanced properties It shows hides the advanced properties columns ACGMO195V1iEN 168 HMWIN Studio User Manual 19 6 Offline Management Fields PLC Protocol type and name Configuration Protocol settings Tag dictionary Tags imported for the protocol Enable Offline Enable the Offline Management for the protocol Algorithm Offline Retry Time Interval expressed in seconds between when the node was disregarded and when the recovery procedure started Max value for ORT is 86400sec 24h ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 169 20 Multi Language A true Multi language feature has been implemented in HMWIN Studio through code pages support from the Microsoft Windows systems The Multi language feature handles different code pages for the different languages A code page or a script file is a collection of letter shapes used inside each language The Multi language feature can be used for a project by defining languages and character sets HMWIN Studio also extends the TrueType Fonts in short TTF provided by Windows systems to provide different font faces associated with different character sets HMWIN Studio has features that allow users to provide strings for each of the languages When in edit mod
38. User Manual 25 Configuration Tag Dictionary port 50 timeout 2000 modbusUnitID Modbus TCP prot Modbus TCP F PLC Network Alias IP address Port Timeout ms Modbus ID Max read block Preset function PLC Models Modicon modbus Generic modbus Figure 23 HMWIN Studio configurations that include more than one communication protocol By repeating the steps previously outlined you can add up to four protocols in the Protocol Editor NOTE while it is possible to run different Ethernet protocols over the same physical Ethernet port you cannot run different serial protocols over a single serial port Some serial protocols support access to multiple PLCs but this is an option that has to be configured within the protocol and still counts as one protocol The Other parameters in protocol editor are e Tag Dictionary tags imported for a particular protocol Ref to chapter Dictionaries for more details e Enable Offline Algorithm Offline Retry Timeout ref to chapter Offline Node Management for more details e Version version of the protocol available in HMWIN Studio for selected target Version of the protocol is not read from hmi directly but from studio internal DLLs 3 4 Tags HMWIN Studio uses Tag names to access all device data All fields and reference locations in the device need to be assigned a Tag name to be used in the HMI To assign Tags double click on the Tags icon in the Project View and the Tag Editor
39. action s has to be executed When entering the triggered status E When entering the not triggered status E Both when entering the triggered and not triggered status When the alarm is reset When the alarm is disabled When the alarm is enabled Figure 136 By default the actions are executed only when the Alarm enters the triggering condition you may change this by configuring the system to execute the configured action also for the other alarm states available ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 138 14 4 Active Alarms Widget You can insert the Active Alarms Widget in a page to see the status of alarms and to acknowledge or reset or enable disable alarms Active Alarms Check Uncheck All Filter Bide Not Triggered Ack Reset Save Figure 137 The Alarm Widget will display the Alarms in Runtime 14 4 1 Filters A Filter is available to show hide just a subset of all configured alarms Using the Combo box Filter it s possible for example to Hide Not Triggered alarms Another Filter Filter 2 is available in widget properties and can be used to add a second filter based on another alarm field like Alarm name or based on Severity or Description of an alarm Alarms List Columns sorting false Sort Column Severity Text Filter Fiter Colum State Filter 1 Hide Not Triggered DataLink itemData Combo Fiter Colum Select Filter 2 Figure 138 To customize a filter proceed as
40. after it has been created you can simply right click on the Widget in the Page editor and select the Custom Properties menu item from the context menu The Custom Properties dialog will be displayed and you can change the properties ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 255 33 Send an E mail Message SendMail action can be used to send emails You can include tags in the e mail body and attachments The SendMail action has been design for working with alarms and schedulers but can be executed as conseguence of many other events NOTE The system does not yet support SSL TSL Action List Action List A W W SendMaill Macro Properties SendMail EmailConfig Emailinfo Email config Figure 288 33 1 Configure E mail Server To configure the email server you need to provide the following information into field EmailConfig of SendMail action SMTP SMTP server address Server Name optional it can be used for information purposes Server Port Port to use to connect to SMTP server Default is 25 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 256 Require Auth Flag it if SMTP server requires authentication User Name Username to use for sending mail using SMTP server Password Password to use for sending mails using SMTP server EmailContig Serverld Ay W A emailServero SMTP Server Name Server Port 25 EF RequireAuth UserName Password Cancel Figure 289 NOTE You can ad
41. and maintained among Studio activations In case you need to reset the workspace to the original default layout use the command called Reset and Restart under the File menu ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 24 Edit Run Format View Wi _ New Ctrl N Open Ctrl O Close Save New Project Save Project Ctrl 5 Save Project As Clase Project 1 GO Users Audittrailol 2 O WWsers ProjectL Project Reset and Restart Exit Figure 21 3 3 Communication Protocols Device Communication drivers are configured in the Protocol Editor which is accessible from the project tree as shown in the figure below Double click on the Protocols icon in the Project Tree view to open the Protocol Editor To add a driver click on the Icon and select the driver from the list in the controller field Once a communication driver has been selected configure the driver by clicking on the browse button in the column Configuration A configuration dialog will be displayed allowing you to set the parameters of the driver as shown in the figure below ProjectView 1 Tiz aii da wah Liz a a os mmn a ha ectl Figure 22 As an example to create a project for Modbus TCP you would select the Modbus TCP driver and then configure the communication parameters by selecting the browse button in the Configuration column ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio
42. assign that new keypad to all numeric entry widgets First create a new keypad using the numeric keypad as the keypad type and save it with a different name This will be a backup of the numeric keypad Then open and modify the default numeric keypad and save it with its original name The now modified numeric keypad will be assigned by default to all numeric fields in the project 27 3Keypad Type The Keypad Type is one of the parameters available in properties window of keypads Use this parameter to define what type of data entry is needed Follow the list of options available Auto This is the default Dema Only numeric keys are accepted Entering 10 the keypad return back value 10 that will be display as 10 if the attached field is numeric or ASCII as A if the attached filed is hexadecimal Only hexadecimal keys are accepted Entering 10 the keypad return Hexadecimal back value 16 that will be display as 16 if the attached field is numeric or ASCII as 10 if the attached field is hexadecimal All keys are enabled Entering 1A keypad return back value 1A that will be display as 1 if the attached field is numeric as 1A if the attached field is ASCII or as 1A if the attached field is hexadecimal ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 217 Figure 230 27 4Keypad Position Runtime Positioning property of keypads can be used in HMWIN Studio to define where keypads will appear in the screen The following options are avail
43. be done offline 37 1 Activate Panel Activate panel operation is used to activate the license on its corresponding panel The panel must be connected to the network IMPORTANT You must install the Runtime in the HMI Panel to activate the licenses Manage Target 1 License folder G Users Username Documents workspace Panel Info Activate Panel Select Panel 192 168 4 3 Panel ID o030D802710E7 Activation Keys 03C3E 4444A5 4735A 8B00C CODESYS 4 Add Another key Import License Save License Figure 310 1 Select the location used to backup license files From this point on the path selected will be called LICENSEFOLDER in the document 2 Select the Activate Panel option using the radio button 3 Select Panel ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 301 4 Press the Select IP button and it will show all of the panels connected to the network Then select the panel on which the license is to be activated Once you select the IP e The Panel ID number will be shown in the Panel ID box e If you have the backup files of previously activated or created license files in the LICENSEFOLDER the activation key and enabled features will be displayed in the Activation keys section e One empty edit box in the Activation keys section will be enabled for you to enter a new activation key The Activate Panel button will be enabled 5 Enter activation key If you have a new activation key to be activated en
44. be used on the target and the new ports will have to be specified in the software to match the new selection In the download dialog click on Advanced Menu and set the port Download System Files Figure 44 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 44 Set the HTTP HTTPS port and FTP FTPS port of the Target They represent the port numbers the software uses to connect to the FTP S and the HTTP S servers on the Target This is useful whenever default ports are for some reason in use by other applications or services or if the local network requires using different port settings studio Port Settings Availability Figure 45 When Target Flash Memory is Low While trying to download a project to the Target if the project size is almost near or greater than the free space available in the flash memory then it is not possible to download the project directly The difference between the project size and available free memory should be at least 2MB Target device doest not have enough free memory ob Do you want to delete some unloaded projects Figure 46 While clicking Download a warning message will pop up mentioning that the Target memory is low and whether you need to delete some projects as in the figure given above Soon after you click Manage Target the Manage Target window will open showing all the available projects in the Target Deleting the unwanted projects from the target creates more
45. below ProjectView ees 1 Pagel protocols Events Buffer AY paler ola gps JD Name Type Schedule oll Projecti Schedule1 Recuring Daily Time 04 19 PM ea Pages schedule Recurring Daily Time 04 15 PM o ee 1 Pagel e Config see El Protocols Tags a Trends ie Alarms gf Events Buffer A Scheduler Wed MultiLanguage a a E een ee Figure 185 Click on the symbol to add a schedule item Schedule items can be of two different types as listed below and shown in the figure below e Recurring Scheduler e HighResolution Scheduler ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 179 a 1 Pagel Scheduber xd Daily Time 04 19 PM Daily Time 04 19 PM HighResolution Figure 186 Name Allows you to define the name of the Scheduler Type Allows you to select the type of Scheduler Schedule Allows you to select different Scheduler options which are described in chapters Recurrence Scheduler and Type Action Allows you to define macros which have to be executed at the scheduled time Priority Allows you to set a priority level for the event This is used in case two distinct schedules occur at the same time The event with the higher priority will be executed before those of lower priority 21 2HighResolution The HighResolution scheduler can be programmed to perform an action or sequence of actions repeatedly at a specific duration The High Resolution sched
46. can enable or disable the column sorting option available at Runtime for the Alarms Widget by clicking on the column header The sorting order is based on the string sorting Properties Ah x ad ef a Alarms List Col Prop Enable Sort Lenn Sort Column false Filter Hide Not Tric DataLink Display Configure Figure 140 NOTE Starting from version 1 80 the Alarms widget provided in the gallery no longer has the Priority column The widget has a new column called Severity which comes by default next to the ID column Severity column takes the values from the Severity settings from the Alarm Editor 14 5 Alarms History Widget HMWIN Studio automatically logs the Alarm list based on the Flag Settings set in the Alarms Editor under Log Event Types To see the Historical Alarm list you can use Alarms History Widget Alarms History From 09 24 13 16 04 49 Duration 1 Min Refresh To 09 24 13 16 04 49 La Backward Figure 141 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 141 The selection of the Event Buffer is available in the property panel as shown in the figure Combo Box Text None Index o DataLink PageDurat List None 1 Mi List Data OnDataUpd Display EventBufter Event Butte Idal Events Behavior AlarmBuffer Eventi XMLFileVVgt Event Events Event4 Eventi Event6 File Name Figure 142 NOTE For each
47. change user permissions Users setting can be changed at runtime by authorized users and are saved into internal storage usually A user with this authorization can execute a macro to clear these dynamic files and restore user management setting as was at beginning after first project download Allow user to zoom in out using context menu at runtime Allow user to see logs at runtime Allow user to backup project Max number of users that can be connected to runtime in the same time Default is 3 22 3 6 Access Priority If the Access control is applied to a Widget page and or even the Global Access then the top priority goes to the Widget access Control from Widget Page Access or its Parent Access Global Access e Top Priority e Medium Priority e Low Priority This means that exceptions configured for an action or a Widget directly from the page view has priority over the base settings ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 192 22 4 Configuring Users To configure users double click on Users from the Project View and then click on the sign to add a new user A user named admin is already present by default and this user cannot be deleted ProjectView HAAYV mE y 1 Page1 Pa Users x p x AvYv gt gt E Project ig Projecti EE Pages E 1 Pagel Config E Protocols Tags gaa Trends a Alarms 3 Events Buffer TE Scheduler 5 Multilanguage Ely Security O UserGrougs
48. data from protocol As a consequence the OnDataUpdate event can be triggered or not depending on whether data becomes available from protocol respectively after or before widgets being initialized for first time In particular page change notifications are more likely to happen with slow protocols and remote clients Moreover note that the value we read during OnActivate can be the same we get from a subsequent OnDataUpdate event since OnDataUpdate notifications are sent asynchronously 6 3 Widgets positioning Snap to Grid Snap to Objects To help user in precise widgets positioning two editing options options are available in HMWIN Studio Snap to Grid Snap to Object Snap to positioning can be enabled via the top toolbar gt View menu items 6 3 1 Snap to Grid In Snap to Grid mode when you move or resize an object its top left corner will align or snap to the nearest intersection of lines in the grid even if the grid is not visible If default settings does not fit your needs you can either switch off the function of customize the grid The Grid can be enabled from View gt Show Grid and customized from View gt Properties where it is possible to choose Spacing X space in pixel between two lines dots in X axis Spacing Y space in pixel between two lines dots in Y axis Type type of grid dot or line Color the color of grid 6 3 2 Snap to Object In Snap to Object mode when you move an object it will al
49. dialog will close automatically and the HM4Web application is ready to be downloaded to the target 35 3 Testing the HM4Web Project There are two methods available for testing your HM4Web project You can use the online simulator or you can open a standalone web page directly from a browser The following sections describe both approaches 35 3 1 Using the Online Simulator HMWIN Studio includes an web server in the online simulator You can start the simulator and access your HM4Web project from a web browser The pages will be served from the simulator Here are the steps to run a project from the simulator 1 de Create and export your project as described in previous chapter Click the Start Simulator button in the HMWIN Studio workspace toolbar This will start the simulator You will see the project running in a separate window on the screen Open a web browser compatible with HM4Web requirements You can use web browsers available in your computer such as Internet Explorer Firefox or Chrome Type http localhost 81 in the URL bar of the browser This URL tells the web browser to read web pages from your local computer The localhost name indicates the local computer and 87 tells the browser to use port 81 The online simulator in HM4Web uses port 81 by default so that it does not interfere with any other web servers or applications on your computer You will see the login screen the same as you would see if you were running th
50. eeo ger A Vevie me Seiie ey i var compVar varWgt getProperty VariableName For Global Variables Welle ven Nor Oise SC ee ee Ver relolissiiiee var compVar varWgt getProperty VariableName ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 237 31 5Media Player Widget The Media Player Widgets are available into the widget gallery The widget can be used to play videos from a playlist The video files can be stored on the Flash a USB memory stick or an SD Card There are two available widgets The first one is without the multimedia frame so it just plays the video without any user control The second widget includes a multimedia frame where you can find buttons to play and stop the video Media Media Player Figure 269 To use the widget just drag and drop it into a project page The Media Player widget properties are Media Player List Allows you to create a playlist by selecting the video files to be available to the widget Loop Style Allows you to define the way the video in the playlist is played The available values are NoLoop LoopOne LoopAll and Random e NoLoop allows you to play all the videos in the playlist then it stops e LoopOne allows you to loop on the first video in the playlist e LoopaAIll allows you to loop on the playlist following the list of videos Random allows you to play the videos in a random order ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 238 NOTE The Media Player Widget works only with
51. er ay ee ean 121 QA B25 TRCSUIVS I TIMING cerie ies aula teen tide hth talons Wadhwa O a 121 HISO 0 0 gil ca ala a oeeo e a annette ier nn en aeer a a nr at tea tare 121 10 LS 1G HMW IN GING IT ots dat ee tas disse et dee ad a eae eae ee aad sala aed 122 10 1 The HMWIN Client toolbar cccccccccccssseeceeeceeseeceesceeeeeeeeseaeaeeeesseaaaeeeesesaaess 122 10 2 Settings amp TiMe ZONE OPtiONns ce eeecccccceecesseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeees 122 10 3 WORKS DAC e sneen aren ee vac a fiw vantini vedas eataind aia di eaietadeeaanl 123 11 Using the Integrated FTP Server cccccccsccscccccseseseceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeceeessaeeseeeeseaegeeeeeeaaaaes 124 12 Using ActiveX Client for Internet Explorer cccccccssseeeceeceeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeseaeaees 125 12 1 MSANGI AICIIVEX enea E a 125 12 2 HTTP Access to ActiveX files viirccocdsacveuguivatesavvensoveunccuiasecidiwnauatadeauundauevecsetaens 125 12 3 Internet Explorer Settings ccccccccccccsssseeeeeceeeececcceeeeeeeesaaaeeeeeseaegeeeesssaaees 125 12 4 Security Setting for Trusted Site Zone 2 0 cceccceeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeees 126 12 5 Install Active X in Internet EXxplOrer ccccccseeececceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeneeeeeeas 128 12 6 Uninstalling Active X cccccccccccseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeessaueeessaeeessaeeeeesegeeeessneeeens 129 12 7 ActiveX information cece eecccceececeeeeeceeeeeceeeeecee
52. expert users when VNC server is used in conjunction with a VNC repeater to bypass firewall problems or to optimize VNC performances based on network configuration NOTE The VNC server uses port 5900 TCP NOTE The Password of VNC server is null as default Password can be changed via VNC viewer or with an external usb keyboard attach to the hmi panel ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 130 NOTE For developers a macro LaunchVNC is available in Developer tools NOTE Show Taskbar icon flag is used by tech support when debugging problems out of KIOSK mode This flag is not usefull for standard hmi users NOTE The VNC Server has been design for embedded HMI panels WCE based Win382 platform not supported for VNC Server NOTE The VNC Server allows only one single client Two or more connected in the sametime is not allowed NOTE Drag and Drop of Windows is not supported yet by VNC server 13 2 VNC Viewer A VNC viewer is not provided as part of HUWIN Studio However many types of VNC viewers are freely available One example of compatible VNC viewer is TightVNC ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 131 14 Alarms The Alarm handling has been designed to provide alerts through pop up messages typically to issue warnings to indicate any abnormal conditions or any malfunctions in the system under control Whenever a Bit goes high or the value of a Tag crosses the limit of deviation defined in the Alarm configuration the respective
53. field text The option silent default value is true allows if set to false you to open a dialog at runtime which asks the user to adjust printer properties NOTE PrintText work in line printing mode using a standard protocol common to all printers that support it No custom drivers required for line printing NOTE In line printing text is printed immediately line by line or after a timeout custom for each printer model could take also minutes for some models not design for line printing 9 13 3 EmptyPrintQueue The EmptyPrintQueue macro allows you to empty the current printing queue If the macro is executed in the middle of the execution of a job then the queue will be cleared at the end of the job 9 13 4 PausePrinting The PausePrinting macro allows you to put on hold the current printing queue If the macro is executed in the middle of the execution of a job then the queue Is paused at the end of the job 9 13 5 ResumePrinting The ResumePrinting macro allows you to start the queue if previously it was put on hold 9 13 6 AbortPrinting The AbortPrinting macro allows you stop the execution of the current job and remove it from the queue If the queue has another job then after aborting the next one starts immediately ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 121 10 Using HMWIN Client The HMWIN Client provides remote access to the Runtime and is included in the HMWIN Studio installation The HMWIN Client consists of a simple
54. follow 1 Select Active Alarms widget 2 Into the property pane select one of the two filters availables Filter gt Filter Column 1 Filter Column 2 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 139 and related value to filter Name State Value Time Description Severity Enable Attach Combobox widget to Filter 7 Filter 2 DataLink Select ComboBox using Shif Mouse Left Button From property pane select List property and open dialog to customize combobox values Using combobox configuration dialog specify String List options shown to user into the combobox and regular expression to use for filtering values SS More details about Regular expressions avialble here http www gnu org software gawk manual gawk html Follow examples of filters State Hide Not Not Triggered Acked Not Triggered Not Acked Triggered Triggered 10 lt Value lt 20 1 0 9 20 lt Value AITO Value lt 100 2 9 100 lt Value lt RP Aeltee Value 2 3 4 5 A 2 9 Value gt 100 1 9 0 9 0 9 Value gt 20 2 9 1 9 0 9 0 9 Combo Box Sesion Lana e r v i String List Data List 10 lt Value lt 20 1 0 9 5 20 lt Value lt 100 A 2 9 100 lt Value lt 200 1 0 9 0 9 5 Value 2 32 4 5 2 9 Value gt 100 1 9 0 9 0 9 Figure 139 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 140 14 4 2 Sorting You
55. for compatibility with HM4Web e iOS 4 14 Mobile Safari e Android 2 1 Android Webkit sf gt CINIAOlD Figure 299 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 284 35 2 Generating HM4Web Pages You can use any of your existing HMI projects or you can make a new project using HM4Web If you are working with an existing project any widgets and features can be used in HMWIN Studio however not all features are currently available with the HM4Web option If the project includes a feature that is not available HM4Web will still work correctly but the feature will not be available on the remote client device Following chapters will list supported features in HM4Web and existing limitations 35 2 1 Exporting Pages HMI pages in your project must be exported before they are available as HM4Web pages You can export pages from the current project by clicking on the menu item Run gt Export Web Project NOTE You must repeat the Export step after any change to your project The only way changes are available in HM4Web is after the Export step and the project is downloaded to the panel 35 2 2 Select Pages to Export When exporting you have the option to select which Web pages you wish to export By default all project and dialog pages are selected for export You can click on the check boxes next to each page name to enable disable the page export as shown below You can also click on the All None check box to select or de select all pages at
56. for different operations Usually the most important ones are o Time parsing time spent for parsing current page file jmx Parsing time usually is proportional to the number of widgets in a page so to the complexity of a page o Time gfx creation which is mainly contributed by the OnLoad methods where typically images are loaded o Time rendering time spent for rendering the scene o Time unloading time spent for unloading page in case the current page comes from another page Times are provided in couples wall time cpu time Wall time is the absolute time required by this part which can be higher than the actual cpu time used to do it because we can have higher priority threads running for instance protocols There is also a start time column which is relative to page load start time It can be useful to track the actual time required to load a page since partial ones only focus on the most time critical functions missing the rest that often contributes significantly to the total time For example the actual total wall time required to load a page Is rendering which is the last step start time rendering wall time overlayed as colored rectangles on the view Overlay OnLoad Rendering times this view allows to effectively represent time spent on single widgets and is available only for the rendering and OnLoad steps The view gives an immediate feeling of where time is spent Red zones represent the most time critical zones De
57. has pegged at some lower limit The returned value is outside the limits defined for it Note that in this case the Limits field indicates which limit has been EREA exceeded but the value can move farther out of this range The value has pegged at some high limit The returned value is outside the limits defined for it Note that in this case the Limits field indicates which limit has been AEAN exceeded but the value can move farther out of this range The value is a constant and cannot move GOOD 9 10 4 DeleteTrend The DeleteTrend macro allows you to delete saved Trend data from the file In Macro Properties define the Trend name from which you want to delete the trend logs 9 10 5 DumpEventArchive The DumpEventArchive macro is used to export the Historical Alarm log and Audit Trail data to external drives such as a USB memory or SD card If you use a USB drive the path will be USBMemory or if you use an SD Card the path will be Storage Card followed by the specified folder in the memory ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 103 NOTE The external drives plugged on the USB port of the panel must have format FAT or FAT32 NTFS format is not supported In the Macro Properties you need to configure the Event buffer name that you want to dump and the destination folder path The DumpConfigFile property must be set to true when you plan to convert the dumped files to CSV DumpAsCSV If this opt
58. if you use a button widget just for its frame it won t be optimized since the button widget is dynamic If you just need the frame please use the UP Image SVG from the widget gallery 16 With many pages having many dynamic widgets and using a common template the suggested configuration is to set a template static optimization flag set to true b page static optimization flat set to false background is already provided by the template So the background image can be reused among many different pages saving a lot of RAM that can be used for page caching 17 Avoid using dynamic widgets like buttons only for the page background to make graphical effect without any real use of the buttons instead use widget images which can be obtained from the gallery to apply the same graphical effect This will reduce the load time of the page if we design it in an optimal way Follow an example of good and bad usage of Static optimization Dynamic widgets are partially Dynamic widgets are placed covered by static images over the static images v Figure 322 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 315 41 1 2 FAQ Static optimization Q In a page where there are a few identical widgets in the OPT folder I see a png for each one of them If they are really identical why should the software duplicate them instead of having just 1 PNG A The software does not know if static images are actually the same since each widget could have differ
59. in any buffer Any curve plotted is lost when the page containing the Widget is changed To configure the Real time Trend just drag and drop the Real time Trend Widget from the gallery tH gt E H rH 27 B s eE T T E T TT fak Page Duration 5 min E X Labels 4 100 A A _ e Title B sw o X Scale 60 Date Formel hh mm ss W T he E heel yt O li FontColor 139 0 o1 20 cee aeereeeentiernmeenceaste Curve 1 2 k sk An 05 30 00 05 30 00 05 30 00 05 30 00 DataLink Tagi TagMgr a a eat er e ee pees ele oaa StrokeWidt gt Figure 155 Select the Trend Widget and in the properties pane attach to the Curve x Value property the Tag for which you want the data to be plotted Data is always plotted against time Following is the list of main parameters of Real time Trend widget Num Curves Number of trend curves in the Trend window A maximum of 5 curves can be configured in a Trend window Page Duration Time range of the X Axis However you can dynamically change the page duration in Runtime with the Date Time combo widgets attaching it to the Trend window page duration properties ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 152 X Labels Number of Labels in the X axis scale Y Labels Number of Labels in the Y axis scale Title Trend title and font properties font size label etc Curve x Tag or Trend buffer that will be plotted into the trend window
60. matching the widget ID and the page number of each widget To change the separator used in the exported file please have the regional settings of your work PC changed Upon importing the separator information is retrieved from the file if not found the default character is used Immediately after the Import the modified strings will be displayed in the text tab Once the user hits the button to Save the changes the changes are saved to the internal widgets ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 175 Page Widgetid Projectl jpr _AlarmsMar Al Projectl jor _AlarmsMgr Al Frojectl jpr Alarms Mgr l TemplatePagel labell text TemplatePagel label2 text Pagel jmx abell text bel4 text Widgetid _AlarmsMar Al Project jpr _AlarmsMr Al Frojectl jpr Alarms Mgr l TemplatePagel labell text TemplatePagel label2 text Pagel jrmx labell text Figure 183 The feature Import supports two formats Figure 184 e Comma Separated Values csv e Unicode Text txt ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 176 Open File G J t Computer Data G Temp Organize New folder No items match your search File name Figure 184 The Unicode Text file format must be used every time you import a file modified by Microsoft Excel You can save your Excel sheet in this format choosing File gt Save As and choose the option Unicode Text txt from the Save as type
61. number of parameter sets can be changed in the Number of sets field in the property pane From there you can also change the name of each Recipe set Recipe values for all the parameter sets can be entered into the Recipe Editor window Recipe Recipe Name Test Recipes1 Number of set 5 Set 0 Set Set 1 sen Set 2 Set Set 3 Set Set 4 oa Figure 150 15 3 Defining Recipe Fields The user can define the Recipe field on the page by using the numeric field Widget from the gallery and attach the Tags from the Recipe data source The figure below shows an example of a Tag attached to a Recipe field ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 147 field4 value SOUrce O Tag System Widget Recipe Tag CurrentRecipe CurrentSelectedSet Bement Value 4 CurrentRecipe CurrentSelectedSet 4 Element Name Value gt Element gt Elements Name Value gt LastDownloadedSet Name Status 4 Recipel gt CurrentSelectedSet ReadOnly Read Write Figure 151 The Attach to Dialog allows you to attach to the numeric field all the different Recipe variables such as Current Recipe gt Current selected Recipe set gt Element gt value or name Selected Recipe gt Selected SetO gt Element gt Value or Name Selected Recipe list Currently selected Recipe list Recipe Status When the numeric fields are defined as Read Write the default Recipe data can be edited at Runtime
62. of the Tag at the moment the alarm was triggered Into the CSV file resulting from the Dump of the alarms events list the Tag values can be seen in the description column Result will be displayed as shown in the figure below ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 143 Select c Source Value State Description Date Alarmi 123 Triggered Not Acked arm 1 Tag value is 123 29 01 2011 Alarm2 234 Triggered Not Acked arm 2 Tag value is 1234 25 01 2011 Alarms 56 Triggered Not Acked arm 3 Tag value is 456 25 01 2011 Alarma B7 Triggered Not Acked larm 4 Tag value is 987 25 01 2011 Alarm5 Triggered Not Acked 25 01 2011 Alarm 234 Triggered Not Acked 25 01 2011 Alarm 234 Triggered Not Acked 25 01 2011 t Ack Reset Save Check Uncheck All Filter Hide Not Triggered Figure 145 NOTE The ability to store the alarm description with tag values in the event buffer is a feature supported starting from version 1 80 NOTE use before where there is a need to show the in the description string So if the string to show is Tag 1 the correct syntax to use is Tag 1 14 9Exporting Alarm Buffers as CSV file The historical alarm list the event buffer can be exported using the action called DumpEventArchive NOTE The tag values included in the Alarms description are also included in the event log stored in the event buffer The tags are sa
63. of the different Alarm Buffers a specific Event Widget must be configured for the project the current version of the Event List Widget does not allow you to switch between buffers 14 6 Managing alarms at Runtime When an Alarm is triggered the Alarm will be displayed in the Active Alarms Widget The Widget allows you to acknowledge and reset the Alarm The Alarm display can be filtered by Hide Not Triggered Show All and other custom filters Please note that the visualization of the Alarm Widget is not automatic If the Widget has been placed on a certain page when an alarm is active you must add a dedicated action that will go to the page showing the Alarm widget 14 7 Enable Disable Alarms at Runtime You can enable or disable the alarms at runtime If you want to disable an alarm just uncheck the alarm from the Enable column in the Alarm Widget and execute the Save command This way the alarm will not get triggered and the disabled alarm will not be displayed at Runtime ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 142 Select Id Source Value State Date Time Enable Akarmi 23 Not Triggered Not Acked 25 01 2011 16 59 31 Alarm 23 Not Triggered Not Acked 25 01 2011 16 59 31 Aarma 23 Not Triggered Not Acked 25 01 2011 16 59 31 Alarm 23 Not Triggered Not Acked 25 01 2011 16 59 31 Alarm5 23 Not Triggered Not Acked 25 01 2011 16 59 31 Alarm6 23 Not Triggered Not Acked 25 01 2011 16 59 31 Alarm 23 Not Tr
64. of type Every Hourly This parameter allows choosing between following way of working Time This is the default In this case is needed to specify details about time date week Parameters depend on Type of scheduler selected Random10 Executed 10 minutes before later the time specified So if time is 10 30 actions is executed in range 10 20 10 40 where 20 40 is random Random20 Executed 20 minutes before later the time specified So if time is 10 30 actions is executed in range 10 10 10 50 where 10 50 is random Sunrise Executed n minutes hours after sunrise time based on a specific location as explain in next chapter Execute n minutes hours before sunrise time based on a specific location as explain in next chapter Sunset Executed n minutes hours after sunset time based on a specific location as explain in next chapter Execute n minutes hours before sunset time based on a specific location as explain in next chapter 21 4Configuring Location in HMWIN Studio In HMWIN Studio there is a unique scheduler feature based on sunrise and sunset Before you start the sunrise or sunset scheduler you need to define the location Based on the UTC location the system automatically calculates the sunrise and sunset time In the installation only a few locations are set by default If your location does not show up in the list you can add your location by entering the latitude longitude and UTC information in the Target_Locati
65. on a page Object properties can be set at programming time or configured to be dynamic To change a property at programming time you can use the page toolbar or the property pane which shows the properties available for the selected object cy 100 X f e he e o H y al 0 S Font Arial i5 A E Ts Figure 54 4 The page toolbar permits a quick change of the most commonly used object properties When you need a complete view of all the properties of a certain object you need to use the property pane You have to select an object to see its properties shown in the property pane The property pane allows you to both change a property at programming time and attach the property to a dynamic element From the property pane when you click on the right side of a property cell you get the ability to Attach to the property to a tag This operation is done using the Attach to dialog shown in the figure below Properties a x Sd a s Field Value 100 Number F Attach To Keypad Tye Wiineric Events Figure 55 The Attach to dialog has two tabs The first is called Tag and allows you to attach the property to an element The source can be selected using the radio buttons The elements to which the property can be attached are e Tags e System Variables see chapter System Variables for an explanation of the meaning of all System Variables e properties from another Widget e elements of a Recipe
66. only 28 1 Search and Filter After selecting Filter by to key name you can start typing the name of the Key in the box at the left of the toolbar and the Keyboard Editor will list only the keys whose Label contains the text you have entered a T Filter by key name Shows all keys a Generic keyboard 5 Le Left Code oxio00012 Enable Inherits project actions z 5 l shift F Inherits project actions l Fi B l 7 Inherits project actions kJ F2 E only Keys contains 7 Inherits project actions F3 the lette E typed will F Inherits project actions H la F4 b shows 7 Inherits project actions L F5 En TTT e lv Enable Inherits project actions 5 LJ Fe Code 0x1000035 V Enable Inherits project actions LJ F7 Code 0x1000036 W Enable X Inherits project actions Figure 232 Alternatively if Filter by has been set to key code only the Keys contains the text in their Code column will appear in the list ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 220 Y Filter b amp F Code ox100003f Enable V Inherits project actions LJ F32 Code 0x100004f Enable V Inherits project actions Le Slash Code Ox2f Enable Inherits project actions c Question Code Ox3f Enable Inherits project actions J o Code Ox4f Enable M Inherits project actions d Underscore Code Ox5f Enable Inherits project actions E macron Code Enable Inherits project actions questiondown Code Enable Inherits proj
67. opened normally if they do not match HMWIN Studio shows a warning message to inform that the project has been created with a different version of HMWIN Studio and report this version ID if it is available in jpr In this case HMWIN Studio will offer two options to convert the project e Convert and open the project from current path The project will be converted without a backup copy of the original version e Convert and save the project to a new location and Open The older version is maintained as a backup copy Warning The project was created with a Version 01 80 00 21 Convert Cancel Figure 7 WARNING Do not edit projects with a version of HMWIN Studio older than the one used to create them It can result in a damage of the project and to runtime instability 1 2 6 Multilanguage for HMWIN Studio Starting from v1 91 HMWIN Studio is available in Multilanguage All languages are installed by default as part of HMWIN Studio To change default language english used by HMWIN Studio go to Help gt Change Language and change current with preferred language 1 2 7 Crash report Crash report dialog appears automatically in case HMWIN Studio freeze or crash and allows users to save a log file of crash The crash report may contain information important for technical support ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 15 NOTE Crash reports are disabled in Windows XP OS ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 16 2 The HMI Run
68. part of the operating system 31 3 Control List Widget Control List widget is a convenient way to represent the status associated with a particular process but also a way to control that process from the same widget The Control List widget is available in the Widget Gallery There are two types of control lists One is a control list group in which the up and down buttons are present on the control list itself The state can be selected with the up and down buttons The other type of control list has no pre configured buttons in the group In that case the state can be selected by pressing on the screen ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 232 i _ v Properties Tale a v x t ri 7 gt fe Ee Font Arial See Figure 261 31 3 1 State Control List State AS Selection l4 a a Read Ony fase List Data State 0 State 1 State 2 State 3 Sta OnDataUpdate 000 i KeypadType None List Display States are added by selecting Add Remove List Items from the List Data option in the property pane Any value can be assigned to a State activating the State will result in a write operation to the Tag which has been linked to the Value property of the Control List Widget Window Help Qa O w0 x e r e le a A RNR Ho fa Figure 262 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual rot ol ACT ES State o Selection 0 Read Ony fal
69. references to tags not existing not defined in the tag editor Identify tags not used in the project NOTE The Tag Cross Reference does not search for tags and related references used in Javascript code 29 1 Accessing Tag Cross Reference The Tag Cross Reference can be accessed by selecting Tag Cross Reference from the left side toolbar of HMWIN Studio Once selected a Tag Cross Reference window will open as shown below Tag Cross Reference ax Group by Location Show all References MA Filter by Property ne Searcn w T Pages Scheduler gt Trends Figure 237 29 2Using Tag Cross Reference The Tag Cross Reference window provides the following Group by allows to choose if group tags informationsare grouped by Location alarms pages trends etc or by Tag name Show selects content to shown Options available are All Reference all tags Invalid Tag Reference usually tags missing in tag editor and Unused Tags list of tags defined in Tag Editor but not used in the project Filter by Search filter allows applying a search filter to the selected content Filter can be applied to Location ex of locations are Alarms Pages Recipe Tag tag name or Property ex value fill visibility All data is results are organized in a tree that users can browse to search where the tags are used in the project Double click on resources inthe item inside th
70. reports When the programmed event is triggered the report printout is started and the entire printing activity is carried out in the background NOTE Printing of reports is not supported in remote using for example HMWIN Client or ActiveX 24 1 Adding a report In the Project Workspace double click on Reports to open the Editor Then add the report by clicking the button Two types of reports are available e Text Report e Graphic Report Text Reports are used to configure line by line printing of alarms Text Reports are designed to work with line printers Text is sent directly to printer s port without using any special driver Not all printers support this operation mode This printing mode only works in WinCE platforms and requires to use a physical port Graphic Reports contain graphical elements and may include complex widgets such as screenshots or alarms A specific printer driver for each printer is required for printing graphic reports the list of supported drivers is in following chapters 24 2 Text Report To add a Text Report for line by line alarm printing click on the Text Report button in Reports toolbar The format of the report can be freely defined using the report editor the paper size can be defined in number of characters while the available fields are listed in the box on the right side To include a field in the line to be printed just drag and drop it from the list to the page layout The field
71. some HMI panels hmi panels based on ARM Cortex A8 1Ghz and Win32 platform It doesn t work the HMWIN Client or Activex You can have only one Media Player widget in a page NOTE Runtime support up to one video player widget for page It s recommended also to use same codecs and settings for video of a playlist and not mix it lt supports videos encoded with the following codecs e DSP based video codecs o H264 using AVI MP4 container CABAC off and Level 3 suggested o MPEQG2 using AVI container o MPEG4 using AVI container e Software video codec o Microsoft MPEG4 v3 using an AVI container DSP Video Codecs The first three codecs use the processor DPS video hardware acceleration and you need a BSP 1 55 to play them These videos can have a maximum resolution of 720 576 pixels and a bit rate of 4200 kb s 720p and 1080p are not supported Audio is not supported Software Video Codec The videos encoded with Microsoft MPEG4 v3 are not using the hardware acceleration and have more limitations To prevent the videos from running jerky a maximum resolution of 640x512 pixels and a bit rate of 1300kb s are suggested In addition the size of the Media Player widget used on the page should have the same size as the videos in the playlist in order to avoid upscaling and downscaling Audio is not supported How to convert a video using SUPER video converter by eRightSoft 1 Drag and Drop the video you want to convert in Super
72. standalone application although it uses the same graphic rendering system as the server it relies on a specified Runtime as Server for live data HMWIN Clientfor Windows is available in the Runtime folder of the HMWIN Studio root folder Execute the HMWIN Client application from the Runtime folder or from the start up menu HMWIN Studio HMWIN Client The client will open in a browser like style window Type the server IP address the panel s IP address in the address bar for example http 192 168 1 12 The Client will connect to the server and the same graphical application running on the Server panel will be loaded in the client window HMWIN Clientacts as a remote client and communicates to the server sharing the local visualization with those Tag values that are maintained or updated by the communication protocol The HMI projects contain properties that let you know which page is currently displayed on the HMI and to force the HMI to switchto a specific page These properties can be used to synchronize pages showed on the HMI and HMWIN Client or to control an HMI with a PLC Please refer toSyncOptionsfor more details NOTE If any of the project files downloaded fromHMWIN Studio to the hmi panel change for any reason because corrupted or because has been manually changed via FTP client for example an error message appears into theHMWIN Client while downloading project Error message appear like a checksum does not match 10 1
73. string backgroundColor in format rgb xxx XXX XXX where xxx range from 0 to 299 The page background color Une Onana E On M u eE eea ene 4 page backgroundColor rgb 128 0 0 width number width The Page width in pixels i UME IE OIG lone MS IIc Ss OMIM USE Ne IiSeyee ike 4 var middle x page width 2 j height ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 268 number height The Page height in pixels Pn ron DEn td wonvousehe Tease ime var middle y page height 2 userValue string userValue It gets or sets a user defined value for the Widget This field can be used by JavaScript functions to store additional data with the page HUMES IE ALONG EMS IS OMG Sielsie Ihecl evs ime 4 page userValue Here I can store custom data Follow the list of Page Object methods getWidget object getWidget wgtName lt returns the Widget with the given name Parameters wgtName A string containing the name of widget Return value An object representing the widget If the widget does not exist nu11 is returned IG UMUC LOI IQ INS E16 LS ONMMIG re e e me var my button page getWidget btnStdl setTimeout number setTimeout functionName delay lt starts a timer to execute a given function after a given delay once Parameters functionName A string containing the name of function to call delay The delay in milliseconds Return value lt returns a number corresponding to the t
74. the server In Runtime the user has the flexibility to change all possible types and change the possibility to modes as described in the dedicated chapter ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 184 Name ochedulet Scheduled Schedule4 schedules ocheduleb Figure 192 Occurrence Type Mode Time Occurence Condition Enable By Date Time 17 01 JUN 20 2013 None Monthly i101 None Weekly 16 19 MTWTFSS None The Occurrence column specifies the date selected by the type of column as shown in the figure Condition The Condition column lists the available Boolean Tags from the project If a Tag is selected as a condition then the scheduler will trigger only when the condition Tag value is 1 otherwise the scheduler will not trigger Enable The Enable check box allows you to enable or disable the schedule The scheduler will trigger when the enable check box is set If you want to disable the scheduler temporarily then uncheck the Enable check box ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 185 22 User Management and Passwords This chapter describes the user management system The main purpose of User management module is to restrict access to various objects widgets and or operations by configuring user groups and their authorization level Users user groups and authorizations are the 3 entities defined for user management handling The basic entity is the user representing an individual that has the need to work
75. the Runtime starts Multi language ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 171 r Default Language Writing system Default Font sLang1 gt Any Tahoma Lang Cyrillic Langs Simplified Chinese Figure 176 20 1 1 Language Display Combo This combo can be used to change language at the design phase This helps users to view the page in the different supported languages at design time itself File Edit Run Format View Window Help Dega B adi C7 Toy Cis Figure 177 20 2 Multi Language Widget Multi language support is available for different objects like push buttons static text message alarm description and pop up messages 20 2 1 Multi Language for Static Text Widget When you double click a text widget on the page the dialog shown below will open Here you can edit the text for the selected language and select the font The bold italic and color properties are set for all the languages globally for the widget Text for each of the languages can be given by selecting the language from the combo box However it is recommended that you use the export and import features as described in the chapter Export and Import of Multilanguage Strings ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 172 7 So Muitianguage B z homa Label fh Choose text from other widgets Figure 178 20 2 2 Multi Language for Message Widget HMWIN Studio allows you to use Multi language in the message widget Aft
76. the internal flash disk data NOTE Folders present on the Flash disk external to the runtime directory are not accessible via FTP external USB drive and SD Storage Card are not accessible via FTP You can use any standard FTP client program to connect to the panel FTP server The FTP server responds to the standard port 21 when using the IP address assigned to the panel as host NOTE The server supports only ONE connection at a time if you are using an FTP client which is configured to multiply the connections to the server in order to speed up the transfer operation you will need to disable this feature in the client program or set the maximum number of connections per session to 1 The FTP server is configured by default to accept incoming connection from the following account when User Managemnit Security is disable e User name admin e Password admin FTP permissions and account information can be changed from the UserGroups under the Security item of the project folder as shown in the following figure ProjectView ee 4 Projecti 1 Fan E os Projectl a Contig e8 Protocols a Events Buffer my Scheduler AD MultiLanguage sr sia Securit Le Users a AuditT rail Common to all user groups 2 Sie E AuditTrail _ E Allow Al Paad Recipes lem Dictionaries SEES I a DialogPaqges oa m Page Templates W Keypads RootFolder Figure 121 Additional information can be fo
77. to define the users groups and assign tags to them Driver Specifies the communication protocol for which the tag is defined Address This shows the PLC controller memory address To edit it click on the right side of the column to get the dialog box where you can enter the address information Encoding Encoding type for string data type UTF 8 Latini UTF 2 and UTF 16 Comment Allows you to add a description of the tag Rate ms Define the refresh time for tag Default is 500ms that means tag is updated every 500ms R W This option determines if the tag must be managed as Read only R Write only W or Read Write RW When a Tag is Write Only W the system never reads the tag value amp status but can only write it When communication is not active content of Write Only tags may not be available in widgets Active As explained above tags are grouped per page and if needed in users groups By default tags are not active are not read from the controller this means they are automatically activated by the runtime when the visualization requires them for example when used on current page You can force the system to continuously read a certain tag even if not present in the current page by setting its Active property to true We recommend that you normally leave this parameter to false to avoid unexpected results in terms of communication performance Simulator HMWIN Studio provides online and off line simulation
78. to require auth for it Enable No Access Can be used to open access to files folders admin Authorizations Common to all user groups IP list Allow all Figure 199 Set default access limits icon on the left of can be used to restore default configuration removing user customizations Default is allow following public resources e PUBLIC folder and Index html that contain web console and public resources e ActiveX files hmiclientax html hmiax cab 22 3 5 Miscellaneous The Miscellaneous tab contains different settings related to several options as indicated in the following picture Please note that as indicated in the picture some settings are related to the group but some settings are global to all groups ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 191 admin Authorizations widget Acton Fip Http Mscelaneous Can enter config mode Can manage other users Can load factory settings Can Zoom Can see log W Can create backup Common to all groups Number of users allowed to login Figure 200 Can enter config mode Can manage other users Can load factory settings Can zoom Can see log Can create backup Number of users allowed to login Allow users of group to move runtime to configuration mode for maintenance usually Allow users of group to manage other users like a superuser at runtime A user with this permission can add new users remove users or
79. which the event has been triggered 9 7 15 ConsumptionMeterPageScroll The ConsumptionMeterPageScroll Macro is used to scroll page back forward in ConsumptionMeter widget Available parameters are e Trend Name Trend widget ID ex TrendWindow3 e Page Scroll Direction Forward Reverse Action List A W W ConsumptionMeterP Zoomin Trend Action Properties ZoomOut Trend ZoomPeset Trend One E EES 2 a Trend Name TrendWindow3 Resume Trend Page Scroll Dirt Forward l Show TrendCursor Scroll Trend To Time E Consumption MeterPage Scroll 5 Alarm Trend Name e SelectAllAlarms Trend Widget ID Figure 95 9 8 Alarm Actions Alarm Actions are macros used to acknowledge or reset the alarms The actions listed here can be used to build a custom Widget for the alarm display you can observe an example of how these are used in the default Alarm Widget available in the Widget gallery ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 97 Action List A W gH ewt a Macro Properties Co Figure 96 9 8 1 SelectAllAlarms This macro allows you to select all the Alarms in the Alarm Widget 9 8 2 AckAlarm The AckAlarm macro allows for acknowledging the selected Alarms 9 8 3 ResetAlarm The ResetAlarm macro allows you to reset the selected acknowledged Alarms 9 8 4 EnableAlarms The EnableAlarms macro is used in conjunction with the Save button of the Alarm widget it is required to properly
80. with the system Each user must be a member of a group Users can be a member of just one group Each group will have different types of authorizations and permissions assigned to them Authorizations and permissions for the groups are divided in two basic categories e Widget permissions hide read only full access e Action permissions allowed or not allowed The proper combination of these groups and permissions will implement the required level of security options for the application Administrator Group Ss All Permission HTTP Authorization FTP access Can Acknowledge Alarms User Group 2 Operators amp Ts Can Acknowledge Alarms B amp amp User Group nMax Figure 193 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 186 22 1 Configuring Security Options The section describes how to configure security settings in the HMWIN Studio NOTE To enable disable the user management feature right click on the Security folder in the Project View and set Enable or Disable See the following figure as a reference Enable a A U Force Remote Login Sis Auditrre Figure 194 22 2 Configuring Groups and Authorizations Open UserGroups to configure in the ProjectView i Authorized Home Page Use Last Visited Page Comments Authorization Settings a Praject admir tue Pagel Admin Pages guest true Pagel Guest guestAuth Ea unauthorized false Unauthorized unauthorized uth Figure 19
81. you can define the color writing inside the String Tag the RGB color code of the required color you can use these formats XXYYZZ Where XX YY and ZZ are the RGB components of the needed color expressed in Hexadecimal format the range for these values is 00 FF rgb XXX YYY ZZZ Where XXX YYY and ZZZ are the RGB components of the needed colors expressed in Decimal format the range for these values is 0 255 Note This feature can be applied to all the objects available into the Widget gallery that have a color property The runtime change of the color is possible thanks to the properties of the SVGs that are composing the object for this reason the color change can be applied on the objects that uses imported graphical files only if the graphical file is an SVG file created following the apposite guidelines this feature can not be applied for example on jpeg or bmp files ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 319 43 Functional Specifications and Compatibility The scope of this chapter is to provide a clear overview of the supported functions and related limitations for both programming software and HMI Runtime system What is listed below in this document is a safe limitation above which proper operation and state of the art performance of the system is not guaranteed 43 1 Table of Functions and Limits Max allowed Maxallowed o a On Number of pages 1000 up to 10k x 10k as resolution based on HMI model Number of concurrent
82. 1 Best Practice to use the Image DB ccccceeeccccseseeeceeeeeeeesseeeseseeeseaseeeees 317 AVA IPFOCACICwscsiuinscussaatesatinhtncta a a acu iicedyhulasmaacsusnehe 317 41 4 1 Best Practice to use the PreCache cceecccecseeseeeeeeeeeseeeeesseasseeeesseaeeeeeneas 317 41 4 2 Frequently asked questions PreCache ccceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeas 317 42 FAO useana thas catia tallied ald aa Mamet tata ltectal ccsed tS 1 lap neat face 318 42 1 How to change fill color property according to Tag ValUGS ccccsseeeeeeeees 318 42 1 1 Using ColorPaletteCustoMm XfOrM cccccseeecccecceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeas 318 42 1 2 Connecting Color property to a String type Tag cccccccccessseeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 318 43 Functional Specifications and Compatibility ccccccccceeeccceeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeesssseeeeeeeees 320 43 1 Table of Functions and Limits ccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeessseeseeeeesseeeeeeeeeas 320 43 2 Compatibility caseeccsccicecesdeetadesescieensndebicciddabetonsteibiasdedtaaecedeblaeidiebeteaedstbiedacsieessedt 320 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 1 Getting Started The HMWIN Studio is a software application used to create graphical HMI pages The HMWIN Studio has a drag and drop interface that makes it easy to create complex display pages The same features found in many popular Windows applications are also available in the HMW
83. 168 0 34 502 1 HREG 400008 unsigned Short 192 166 0 34 502 1 HREG unsigned Short 192 168 0 34 502 1 HREG 400010 unsigned Short 192 166 0 34 502 1 HREG 400011 unsigned Short 192 168 0 34 502 1 HREG 400012 unsigned Short Index Tag RoomNumber Umidity Room 1 Umidity Room2 Umidity Room3 Umidity Room4 Umidity Index Tag datatype can be a number a string or any type of simple data types 22 30 1 1 Autofill tag names The process of manually filling all required table entries can require a lot of effort and can be affected by typing errors To speed it up an autofill feature is available in the toolbar L AutoFill only requires setting ndex instances and Alias names that are consistent with tag names In our example the index column must be filled with room numbers 1 4 and columns names Temperature Pressure and Humidity AutoFill Table Roomi ressure Room 1 Temperature Room 1 Limidity Room2 Pressure AutoFill uses regular expression for populating the table with tags trying to match Instance room number and Alias sensor inside tag names For example RoomS instance Alias will match all tag names Roomi1 Temperature Room1 Pressure Room1 Humidity Room2 Temperature etc Regular expressions can be edited manually when needed and more conveniently you can use the wizard button to let the system guess a good filter expression for your application Fill button will fill in missing entri
84. 2 Tabler 7 PIONS rarai A E 284 35 2 Generating HM4Web Pages cccccccccccccssseeeeeeeseeeeceeeseeeseeeeesseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeas 285 35 2 1 Exporting Pages cisic s eiaeesiatiocsiwaeradaadeuntaauedeeduiecdeukinasdvadsiedecstacusdvesiiuddoasiawnard 285 35 2 2 Select Pages to Export cccccccccssssscceeceeseeeeecseeeeceeeeseaseceesseeeeeessesseeeeeseas 285 35 2 3 Setting Home Page cccccccseescceecceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeseueeeeeseeseeeeessageeeeeeags 286 35 2 4 Start HM4Web Export ccccccccccescsseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeesseeeeeessseaeeeesesegeeeeeeeas 286 35 3 Testing the HM4Web Proje ct cccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeesesseeeeeeeeas 287 25 31 Using the Online Simulator a a E 287 35 4 Downloading the HM4Web Proje ct ccccccceecseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeas 288 35 4 1 Running HM4Web from a BrowSe lr cccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseaas 289 35 5 HM4Web Connectivity Notes ccccccccccssssscceeceesseceeecseeseeeesseeaeeeessesegeeeeeseas 290 35 5 1 Server Disconnect cccccccccseeseceeceeeeeceeeceeeseeeeeceeeseceeesseageceeeseeaseeeesssegeeeeesaas 290 25 92 MTU LOVE MEU yates a cet cca cc cr ata in Cana oh ate ee ae eat 291 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 35 5 3 User Session Termination cccccccccececccecececcccccececucuaccececueaeaececscauaunecscacass 291 35 5 4 Non Active HM4Web Proje ct
85. 5 New User groups can be added by clicking the Button Three predefined groups are available by default these groups cannot be deleted and their names cannot be changed Predefined group authorizations and comment fields can instead be changed according to the application s requirements For each group of users you can assign a Home Page This means that whenever a user from this User Group is logging in the selected Home Page for that group will appear There is one additional option called Use Last Visited Page If enabled and a user logs in the page visited by the previous user will be displayed 22 3 Modifying the Access Permission of Groups To modify and assign the permissions click the browse button on the Authorization Setting column The Admin Authorizations dialog will open giving you access to tabs for the different available options ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 187 22 3 1 Widget Permissions The following figure shows the dialog where you can change the widgets permissions a _PageMLTextMarWat i 04 Alarms History 5 Page3 nf _PageMLTextMarWat ff Trendwat2 oi Binstd2 o Bi Binstd3 B 5 Pagel hioa _PageMLTextgrWgt a 94 ActiveAlarms ia o BinstdS 5 L TemplatePage 1 Figure 196 For the widget the possible options are e Full Access e Read Only e Hide When you click on Base settings the right part of the dialog shows the permissions that will be valid as d
86. 5 Upload CurReipe cccccccccssesececceeeseeeeeceeeeeceeeceeeeceeeseeaseeeesseeaseeesseeegseeeesaas 109 9 11 6 ResetRecipe cccccccseececccesececceeseeeceueeecseeeecssuseeeseaeeessaeeeessaseeessaeeesssaaeees 110 9 11 7 DumpRecipeDat a cccccccscccccssseeeceeeeecceeeecseseeecsaueeecsauseecseseeesseseeessaneees 111 9 11 68 Rest reRecipeDa la es ass eects vinci e E nein E teh iain ameoenniinc 111 9 12 User Management Actions ccccccccsccccssssseeeeecseeeeceeeceeeseeeesseeeeeeeessseseeeeeseas 112 2s P72 HA LP 0 apse a ee a on a ene 112 9122 BS WIC SCR ochre a otters cc wala aS twenties ee ss iacaleeed elias Sa ciee 113 9123 ENE SEU 1S SVU ONG senene ein cae nec aera Satta icon nesta eh lic eaten peaciae 115 9124 AGdUSE auc cete setae Ed acces ee Sal Sloe eas alti eS 115 9129 Delte USO i cae teeta a eee lee eae tit aod loans Satin Vat aca east ak 116 9 126 EQUUS ON Ss testes teen ase te cad cal et aes eet xe ce cit ald 117 9 12 7 DeleteUMDyMaImicFile isc ceviche Coheed a a a at 118 9128 EXPOMUSClS sie eacen te canals ha a ees act shad aed ln aa 118 9 120 AIMPOMUSCES rear sete occe ace saul had a ie hat hd clea aan dat alk 119 O13 CPAINCACHON Suosion Sst tae eso N ai eee ese teeta Meat 120 913 1 PARGI ONICREDOIT eiucciee teeth ree tent ie hd oe Ae Ree ee ieee 121 V3 2 PUN OX seco ees eee satan Se a acl ea ae eee toe 121 951373 EMPL PHINIQUEUS iuas e a a 121 TIA Pause ma LLL 0 o a rer esr a
87. 77 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 79 9 1 2 TriggerlPCamera The TriggerlPCamera macro allows you to start the image capture from an IP Camera Select the IP Camera Widget in the Macro Properties to trigger the capture from the IP Camera Figure 78 9 1 3 SlideWidget The SlideWidget macro allows you to show the sliding effect of a Widget or of a Widget group in HMI Runtime NOTE The widget or grouped widget can actually be outside of the page in the project and slide in and out of view Macro Script Widget Actions a Macro Properties z E a T EL B pal Hi m jipe Action 5 L Speed ganesh paciautesudhezda ucenee ee rey x Distance Y Distance ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 80 Figure 79 Widget The Widget to slide Direction Sliding Direction Speed The transition speed of the sliding Widget X Distance The travel distance of the X coordinate of Pixel Y Distance The travel distance of the Y coordinate of Pixel Slide Limit Enable Disable limiting the movement with Respect to the Coordinates X and Y of the Widget X Limit When specified automatically stops the slide action when the widget reaches the specified position Y Limit When specified automatically stops the slide action when the widget reaches the specified position Toggle Visibility Toggle the Visibility of the Widget at the end of each Slide action Image Widget Allows an image to show
88. 8s yam 08 6 1 aana er em nN ec ores ne can 92 oA Ses amc ae eae ne ON Nea OE aa ok eT eR 92 GGA TOSS Ulta tca tee a TS an eet ete SE et ato ee alas 92 2 feo mms 4A ool brs 6 Reem etre tires a err A se oe et ae 93 9660 clera caer etcetera Se i ee a ee tee aes 93 9607 ACIVALEGIOUD irc ceieaectet cai tse eee ee ee 93 908 Deactivate GhOUD civics tate sess a eased a vauivee a ion ele 93 9 7 NEE IG PAC OMS cect ee tac ethernet ada r eee ates 93 Gel HOMES Il i CAG sce coats eis actos la A endo antec outanutete i aetna ete 93 F2 SCO LeEm Trend sacra setae cisterns ata ae ait te daa apie ence ees eutiae mead watt eet 93 iS Fame 60 Ms Fal a pee rere ere ear Se eee eee 94 9A PAGS RCNG secant iii avetitien tinea nae aie inet 94 Oo Page RON IEN ece a a daankasemeb 94 S70 Page D raton Trendin aa a thet iaiekiiesnctea laduana semebe 94 Delt AOO O a a seh 94 O76 ZOOIMOUET O a atta eee 94 97 9 ZOOM RESE INCI science R a eae sot 94 9710 Rause Trend enren oem ET eT 94 GaP VM Resume lend seeen a a A a it atte 94 eT Nee Show Trond Cursor norreno e a a a E 95 2 Be gag ee ammo 6 WLI 21 10 oy O cenia mc a es a a E 95 g7 VA SEPM MPEG OM Crit ea acs Yee Yee ete gcse Saeed eke Dentin En 96 9 7 15 ConsumptionMeterPageScroll cccccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeseeeseeeeesaaeeeeeenas 97 9 8 Aam ACION S Saris eee Be See eee en eee et oe ee See ee eee eee 97 gol ORLAN aaa a a a a 98 982 ACKAIaN rinan e a a
89. 98 983 HRESSUA ANI eannan a a um hana bezeth meh ccn le tetouate 98 DOA Male A GMS west acest ce igi ce cna sts arising ee tS eae Ce ees taste ea a lean 98 9 9 Even ACTIONS ananena tetone ret tcciar a ee a N a 99 9 9 1 ScrollEventsBackward ccccccccecccecceecceeceueceueceueceueceueeeeauseauseeuseeuueaeueaeueneeeaass 99 9 9 2 ScrollEventsForward wocxcdiccacstansesetedntdanasiuatau2edhbvennd ints ante dabSannddat ect SabseasBiabseadsShes 99 DAO SSVSICM ACT ONS eeiiy a ai a eeii 99 FO RES r E E sate E E E EE E T 99 9 1022 Controls ED rerna a a e E E a Ea 100 9 10 3 WOUMP ICING pacsen i e ia aia e aai 100 9104 DESIG E a a a E aea 103 9 105 DUMDPEVEMEALCRING ates ucthies concics e a a a a a OET 103 G210 6 DeleteEve MATCHI E a a a a E aaa 105 9 10 77 FESELPIOIO ENCOUN etn a a a 105 9 10 8 SafelyRemoveMedia cccccseescccccceeseceeceeeeeceeeceeeseceeesseaeceesseeaeeeeessegeeeeeseas 105 9 10 9 CopyOodesySProject s cccc ose Ravi ee eee 106 9 11 FIC CID SG ACHONS iser ants uidardaagcnus skin lenact e a T 107 OAT IDOWNLOAGRECIDS inir E ORE 107 ACGM0195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 9 11 2 WOLOAGRECID Gis sc2c6 uesctinutabdecuteuhdie dis seta nck Sdduass aeseederb i eedslbaktnaGubdinessecanten 107 9 11 3 WriteCurrentRecipeSet ceeccccccceseecceeceeeeeceeeseeeeseeeesseeeeeeesseeeeeessseeeeeeeeas 108 9 11 4 DownLoadCurRecipe 2 2 0 ceeeeccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeesaeaeeeeeesaeeeeeeessaeeeeeteas 109 9 11
90. Alarm message s will be displayed in a special dialog Or alternatively you can program certain macro actions to be executed when the Alarm is triggered Please note that in HMWIN Studio there is no default action associated with a triggered Alarm The visualization of a specific page containing the Alarm Widget is optional and the specific action executed when the trigger condition is verified can be any one of the actions found on the Action list The configuration of an Alarm determines whether or not the alarm requires user acknowledgement It can also be used to determine how the Alarm appears when displayed on the HMI device like background and foreground color Alarm Configuration also determines whether and when the corresponding alarm is logged to the Event list For Alarms displaying critical or hazardous operating and process status a stipulation can be made requiring the plant operator to acknowledge the Alarm The Alarms are configured in the alarm manager and thus are a component of all screens of a project More than one Alarm can be displayed simultaneously in the alarm widget depending on its configured size An Event can trigger the closing and reopening of the Alarm window Please note that in HMWIN Studio working with Alarms is similar to working with Events In general there is no absolute need to have a pop up dialog when an Alarm is triggered Any background action from the list of available actions ca
91. As explained in the introduction these new values are stored in a separate file as modified Recipe data 15 4 Recipe Status After every Recipe Upload or Download or Recipe set modification the Recipe Status parameters contain a value with the result of the operation The following are the values and conditions for the Recipe Status system variable Code Function eseription jo Set modified Current selected set changed ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 148 Download triggered Triggered a download request Download Done Download action completed 3 Downoad Enor Error occurred when doing download errors like unknown set unknown recipe controller not ready Tags write failed etc 4 Upload triggered Triggered an upload request Upload done Upload action completed e Upload Error Error occurred when doing upload errors similar to download errors General Error Errors like data not available NOTE When the panel starts up the value of Recipe Status is 0 15 5 Configuring Recipe Widget for Runtime Execution Two default Recipe Widgets are available in the advanced Widget Gallery category The Recipe Set Widget allows you to select a Recipe set for the upload and download operations If you have more than one Recipe in the project then the Recipe Menu Widget can be directly used to manage all the Recipes from a single Widget listing Recipes and selecting the sets for each Recipe Recipe Set Recipe Menu Re
92. C running HMWIN Studio then you cannot use the previous two methods You must download the license from a PC with an Internet connection and then import the license using the Import License button License Manager Activate Your Product Now Step 1 Click here or goto https sicense x formation com using a standard web browser Step 2 Type your activation key ex 58DI0 FORL5 HR 675 585157 and proceed Step 3 Type your hmi MAC ID in Host ID Value as Custom MAC ID Host ID value Custom 0030D801DE27 Step 4 Click on Activate to generate the license file Step 5 Click on Download to save license file into PC Step 6 Click Import License to import license file Step 7 Click Activate Panel in manage target dialog to activate panel Figure 312 Go to hitps license x formation com using a standard web browser Type your activation key e g 5BDIO FORLS HR67G 5BI5T and proceed Type your HMI MAC ID in field HostID Value as Custom MAC_ID e g Custom 0030D801DE27 Click Activate to generate the license Click Download to save the license file to your PC Open HMWIN Studio and select Run gt Manage Target gt License property page Select the panel if it is connected or enter the MAC ID if you are generating the license offline Click the Import license button and select the license obtained via step 5 above Add more license files if more than one activation key was purchased You can press
93. E Name fadmin user Ely AuditTrail AuditTrail e Recipes gt Dictionaries Figure 201 Name Default User Group Password Change Initial Password Comments Logoff time In Min Minimum Length Must Contain Special Characters Must Contain Numbers user pecial characters false false false Password Must contain admin user user2 Default User Group admin admin admin Change Intial Password Comments Logoff Time In minutes Password Minimum Length false adminuser 0 4 true 0 4 false 0 4 O User Name Identifies the user which is automatically logged in by the system when Starting re starting or after a logout only one default user is allowed Groups of the user Groups are used to assign authorizations to users Password for the user If True the user is forced to change his password on first logon Comments for the user The user will be automatically logged off after the specified time with no actions on the panel After Log off the Runtime goes to the default user The minimum length of the password It should be equal or greater than the set value If True the password should contain at least one special character If True the password should contain at least one numeric digit 22 5Default User You can program a Default User for a project When the system starts or reboots the Runtime is logged in with the default user All the privilege settings of the default u
94. For example when working with a gauge object the most common action taken by the programmer is to attach a Tag to the needle so that the value of the Tag referenced in the controller memory is represented by the needle movement w Properties a x n e Br Bee ha Attach To Display Figure 35 To attach the Tag to the needle single click on the object to display its properties in the Property view Locate the Value property and click on the button on the right part of the field as shown in above figure Select the Attach To menu item and a dialog will be displayed as shown in the figure below ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 3 _ fieldL value 4 Modbus TCP protl Tagl Tag Tag3 Tag Tag5 Read Only Read Write Write Only Figure 36 When attaching a Tag you can attach four types of data sources e Tag tag defined in the Tag editor e System predefined system tags example date and time e Widget connect to a widget property example value of a slider widget e Recipe recipe data from Recipe Manager Select the Tag from the Tag list and Click OK to confirm Tags can be attached to many different properties of the object You can attach a Tag to a property by selecting the property in the Property view and clicking on the Attach To or you can right click on the object and select the Attach To menu item NOTE A chapter in this document describ
95. H a TE Old password New password Confirm password Network 299 This function allows you to protect access to the System Settings in System mode with a password so all the advanced and critical functions are not easily accessible to anyone To activate the protection simply mark the check box Password Protected and specify the desired password as shown in the figure The password must be at least 5 characters long If you are changing a password previously defined or disabling the protection you are asked to provide the old password first NOTE Please keep a note of the configured password in a safe place There is no way to reset the password protection and in case it is lost the unit must be returned to the factory for proper reconditioning When the System Settings menu is protected by a password for each critical function you try to execute that may compromise the proper system operation the HMI will prompt you to enter the password If correct the operation will proceed if wrong the operation will be aborted ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 300 37 License Activation of HMI Panel Software Modules HMWIN Studio provides the interface for activating software modules in the HMI Panel You can access the UI from Run gt Manage Target gt License The interface provides two operations Activate Panel and Save License which needs a working Internet connection or Import License which can
96. IN Client means each client will run the same script providing output results that depend on the input Inputs provided to the different clients may be different This can be clarified for instance considering a situation in which the script acts based on a slider position which can be different for the different clients 34 2Events You can add the JavaScript in the following events e Widget Events e Page Events e System Events For events of type OnMousePress OnMouseRelease OnMouseClick and OnWheel JS eventinfo parameter contains the following additional properties eventinfo posX local mouse touch X coordinate w r t widget coordinates eventinfo posY local mouse touch Y coordinate w r t widget coordinates eventinfo pagePosX page X mouse touch coordinate eventinfo pagePosY page Y mouse touch coordinate ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 259 eventinfo wheelDelta mouse wheel delta It is an integer value with sign Sign represents the rotation direction The actual value is the rotation amount in eighths of a degree The smallest value depends on the mouse resolution Typically this is 120 corresponding to 15 degrees 34 2 1 Widget Events 34 2 1 1 onMouseClick void onMouseClick me eventiInfo This event is available only for buttons and it occurs when the button is pressed and released quickly Parameters me The object that triggers the event eventInfo Details of the event triggered function buttonStdl onMo
97. IN Client will show page requested Changing page on HMWIN Client same page will be forced on HMI Example 6 Synchronize displayed page between HMI and on HMWIN Client PageRequest attached to a Tag A as Read Write CurrentPage attached to the same Tag A as per PageRequest SyncOptions Local Remote Changing page on HMI same page will be shown on HMWIN Client and vice versa 7 11 5 Behavior gt Hold Time Autorepeat Time Define default values for hold time and autorepeat time for buttons and external keyboards However for each button key they can be redefined in related widget instance 7 11 6 Events gt OnWheel A wheel is used by special products like handhelds or USB mouse with a wheel input device Usually a wheel is used to increase decrease the value of a Tag without the need to use an external keyboard device From Project Widget it is possible to attach to a change of wheel status an action like StepTag to increase decrease a tag value ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 69 8 System Variables System variables are special tags containing information about the runtime System variables are available in the Attach to dialog from the Source selection as shown in figure field Lvalue Source Tag System Widget Recipe Tag gt Alarms gt Communication b Daylight Saving Time Device b Dump Information gt Monitor and DVI Switch Settings b Network gt PLC bo Printing gt SD Card
98. IN Studio This document describes how to use the HMWIN Studio application and is divided into chapters that represent the key operations of the HMWIN Studio Each chapter is presented in a standalone manner allowing you to jump from chapter to chapter depending on the task you wish to perform 1 1 Assumptions We assume that those reading this manual are using the HMWIN Studio software to design control panel applications that run on HM panels and on PC We also assume that you have a basic understanding of PCs Microsoft Windows and the type of network environment in which you will run the application 1 2Installing the Software The HMWIN Studio contains the following as part of the installation HMWIN Studio HMWIN Studio is an application for designing custom HMI projects in a user friendly manner along with a variety of options in its built in library the Widget Gallery HMWIN Client HMWIN Client is a light weight application that can be used on Windows computers to remotely view and manage an application running on an HMI Runtime HMI Runtime The HMI Runtime is a standalone application that runs on the HM HMI panels The HMI Runtime can be installed via HMWIN Studio and is design for working with WCE 6 0 OS 1 2 1 System Requirements HMWIN Studio has the following system requirements Operating System Windows XP SP2 or SP3 Windows Vista SP1 or SP2 Windows 7 Windows 8 Storage 500 MB Min RAM 512Mb Other One Ethern
99. It can be an array type too Return value Interger value for denoting success and failure of action A 0 means success and 1 means failure var val 273 41 project setRecipeItem recipeName Set Element val if Status 0 Success else Failure downloadRecipe void downloadRecipe recipeName recipeSet Downloads the recipe set to corresponding tag Parameters recipeName A string representing the recipe name recipeSet A string representing the recipe set can be either the recipe set name or 0 based set index project downloadRecipe recipeName Set uploadRecipe ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 275 void uploadRecipe recipeName recipeSet Uploads the value of tags into the provided recipe set Parameters recipeName A string representing the recipe name recipeSet A string representing the recipe set can be either the recipe set name or 0 based set index project uploadRecipe recipeName Set launchApp void launchApp appName appPath arguments singleInstance Execute an external application Parameters appName A string contains the application name appPath A string contains the application path it must be an absolute path Arguments A string contains the arguments to send to application executed singleInstance true single instance allowed false allow multiple instance Peejeceleunchhpoer PDE exe hlasch N OTHMI APDET USBMemory
100. MWIN Studio User Manual 55 OnMouseHold OnHold Od time a 4 OnMousePres On MouseHold On MouseRelease OnHold Figure 61 6 2 3 Autorepeat lt is possible to enable autorepeat for Press event or for Hold event of a button key Autorepeat Time is specified in Project properties but can be redefined for each button key OnMouseHold OnHold and Autorepeat Repeat Repeat period period lt Hold time 344 eke y O OnMousePress nMouseRelease OnMouseHold OnMouseHold OnMouseHold Figure 62 OnMousePress and Autorepeat Repeat Repeat Repeat Repeat period period period period T T l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l t OnMousePress OnClick OnMousePress OnMouseRelease OnMousePress OnMousePres OnMousePress Figure 63 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 56 6 2 4 OnWheel This Event occurs when a wheel example a USB mouse wheel or a handheld wheel value change A wheel usually is used to increment decrement a value in data entry or attached to a tag 6 2 5 OndActivate This event triggers when a page is loaded and before widgets being initialized with the values read from Tag Manager 6 2 6 OnDataUpdate This event triggers when a data field attached to a widget changes Upon page change data is updated asynchronously at a time that depends on the time needed to read
101. Meters Switches Lights Media Advanced Icons Factory Automation Figure 31 Select the desired object from the Widget Gallery then drag and drop it on the page To change the appearance of the object select the desired property from the property pane and change the property settings All the HMI objects required to build an application are available in the Widget Gallery The Widget Gallery is accessible as a slide in pane from the right side of the workspace as explained in the previous chapter The gallery is divided into several categories each with collections of different types of objects Click on a category to display its sub categories For each sub category the gallery offers the option of applying different styles to the objects within that category when possible The figure below shows the Widget style button for round gauges ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 34 Widget Gallery Basic Buttons Meters Gauges Round Figure 32 Clicking on the style button will display the available styles for the current object Select one of the available styles to apply it to the gallery objects This is done using the Page Toolbar shown in the figure below NOTE Style change may not be available for all widgets ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 35 f Widget Gallery a X int Basic Meters E Gauges Round h i W Figure 33 Once on the page t
102. RightT rend PageLettT rend PageRightT rend PageD uration rend ZoormlnT rend oomOutT rend ZoomnAesetT rend True For enabling and False For disabling scanning of Mode IF a tag is attached its value will be used IF value of tag is greater than zera i PauseT rend i i then enable is true else enable is False Resume rend Figure 172 6 Enter the correct Protocol and Device ID and click Ok lipagel x wv Properties a RQQ Mon fll x OE HG Be ke GE alah a ar Button Fal Ch oe oS Font Tahoma w ow A E f vs ae Seer 2 Pu Tick Typa monent ar y i ient TESI uorps a isale GubeRepent Period ms i wut only 1 is connected Label Disable sode F Color u 197 1497 bout 80 90 sec the chow Frame Fale vice 1 must be good Fans Orias rk baon nosed Schon drate 19700 Manual Enable Disable OnDataLlpdabe Action OnMoeeP ress Ai i GrivaseRelees econ 1 Arbon Gy ation EnableNoce pe nt L Lid_to_ciscard False gt i 100 0 4 100 0 ii 100 0 ay Esa el ii b i Edt i arit J keboan Figure 173 7 The event set is shown in the row The associated device is indefinitely disabled and therefore no longer polled for data collection In the situation described above you may want to create another button to re enable the device when needed in this case the Enable field will have to be set to true WARNING all disabled device nodes will remain di
103. The HMWIN Client toolbar The HMWIN Client toolbar contain following URL related to the hmi panel address Aled indicating network requests During data exchange the led becomes red Reload button useful for forcing project reload Use F5 to reload project from cache simple reload of project or Shift F5 to force a full clean redownload of project to the client useful when project is changedin the target Bookmark Settings Panel Address http 192 168 40 16 a 3 i mi g sd Figure 120 10 2 Settings amp Time Zone Options HMWIN Clientprovides an additional option to handle the visualization of the timestamp information of a project and to configure client settings From the Settings dialog you now have access to a set of new options Update Rate default 1 second polling frequency used by HMWIN Client to synchronize data from server Time Out default 5 seconds max time wait from HMWIN Client before considering a request lost and repeating it Reuse connection allow to reuse the same TCP connection for multiple HTTP requests reducing network traffic and latency Please note that in some circumstances enabling this option can lead to the opposite result very high latency In particular this can happen when connecting through a HTTP ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 122 proxy like often seen in 3G connections if proxy server is not immediately terminating old requests Causing serv
104. The behavior of each tag during offline simulation mode can be specified by choosing between several profiles ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 28 Scaling Tag values are normally transferred as they are from the protocol to the real time tag database You can specifically apply scaling to the tag values before they are stored in the database The available scaling options are By formula and By range Scaling can be specified in terms of linear relationship as a formula or aS range conversion The tag name must be always unique at the project level often it may happen that the same tags from the same symbol file have to be used for two different controllers Since having tags with the same name is not supported you can use the Alias feature to automatically add a prefix to the imported tag to make them unique at the project level When importing tags for a Protocol the tag names may be prefixed by the name given in the Alias item of the protocol configuration dialog box Please note that not all protocols support the Alias feature See protocol documentation for specific information PLC Tag Name This is the original name of the tag when imported from PLC This field is managed automatically by Tag Importer and is available as R W in advanced view just to allow users to change it if any problem during tag import operation For tags not imported from external files usually this field is empty and can be ignored PLC Ta
105. V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 294 Figure 307 35 6 9 Dialog Page HM4Web supports Dialog pages You can show them and close them based on the ShowDialog and CloseDialog macro actions However Dialog pages are not movable 35 6 10 User Management HM4Web uses a login mechanism which will verify user credentials on the server The user name and password are based on the user credentials defined in User Management HM4Web does not support individual security settings applied to widgets or pages 35 6 11 Maximum Concurrent User Connections The web server in the HMI panel supports three 3 concurrent connections at a time If you try to connect to the server from more than 3 remote browsers only the first 3 connections will be permitted 35 7 Troubleshooting and FAQ 35 7 1 Enable JavaScript HM4Web requires JavaScript to provide interactivity with the server and the user HM4Web will not work if JavaScript is disabled in your browser By default most browsers come with JavaScript enabled But if you have disabled JavaScript in the past please re enable JavaScript before accessing HM4Web pages 35 7 2 Browser Cache HM4Web include resources that change infrequently such as CSS files image files and JavaScript files These resources take time to download over the network which increases the time it takes to load the HM4Web page in your browser Browser caching allows these resources to be saved by a browser and used without requestin
106. WIN Studio User Manual 249 Home Page Scrollbars Zoom to fit option enable disable Page load timeout seconds For embedded hmi panels WCE based the WebKit library needed for using widget browser has been designed as a plugin ref to Plugins chapter for more details that developer can enable and download to the runtime only when required This has been done to save around 3Mb of space required by this library when the widget is not used in the project Hyper Link widget is available to create labels into hmi pages working as ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 250 32 Custom Widgets HMWIN Studio has a large widget library which includes predefined dynamic widgets such as buttons lights gauges switches Trends Recipes and dialog items as well as static images Such as shapes pipes tanks motors etc With the widget library you can simply drag and drop an object onto the page and then size move rotate or transform it any way you want All widgets in the gallery are vector based so they look good at any size Custom widgets are widgets created by the user and based on the existing widgets from the gallery This chapter describes how to create a custom widget and assign properties to it The advantage of the custom widget is that it can be built out of several elements but with the flexibility to select only the necessary properties to be published and made available in the custom widget Property pane
107. Z a z 0 9 _ Name Keypad Name A Z a Z 0 9 _ Lo t OSSSsS Images Video etc Widgets ID A Z a Z 0 9 _ PLC Communication UTF 8 Latini UCS 2BE UCS 2LE UTF 16BE UTF 16LE ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 178 21 Scheduler HMWIN Studio provides a scheduler engine that can be easily configured to program the execution of specific actions at repeated intervals or on a time basis Depending on your application creating a schedule is typically performed with a 2 step process 1 The first step is to define the parameters of the schedule to run on the panel This includes selecting the actions to perform when the scheduled event is activated The first step is performed using the scheduler Editor 2 The second step is to create a Runtime user interface that allows the end user to change settings per each defined scheduler For example the Runtime user interface will allow the user to turn ona device at 5 00 pm and turn the device off at 10 00 pm every day This can be done by dragging and dropping a predefined Scheduler widget from the Gallery and placing it on the page Once on the page you can set the properties of the individual GUI elements to create the desired interface to be presented to the end user 21 1 Configuring the Scheduler Engine The configuration of the Scheduler Engine is done using the Scheduler Editor The Scheduler Editor is accessible from the ProjectView pane as shown in the figure
108. able Automatic runtime will show keypads in the best position based on widget position where data entry is required Absolute user can define screen x y position of keypad in pixel Left top Left center Left bottom Center top Center center Center bottom Right top Right center Right bottom predefined screen positions As default keypads can be moved using dragging Use Lock keypad position to disable it if required ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 218 28 External keyboards Runtime has been designed to work with external keyboards connected via USB Keyboards can be used for e Data Entry default e Actions map on specific keys You can map for example the right arrow key event OnClick to the LoadPage action You can configure your keyboard at project level so that the setting you create will be inherited by all the pages In each page you can then choose which key setting will be inherited from the project and which one you will customize for the specific page The Keyboard Editor can be opened using the tab Keyboard at the bottom of the project or page workspace ProjectView T ied Z a fm Project E Search 4 T Filter by Shows roject4 ae ae Pagel Ox 1000000 Enable Inherits project actions we W DialogPages 0x1000001 Enable Inherits project actions sedan E 0x1000002 Enable V Inherits project actions g Config E Backspace l 0x1000003 Enable Inherits project acti
109. ag it is possible to use this tag as Index as a selector Ex value 0 means show Image with Index 0 in Images collection Images Images collection Add Remove Images is used to add remove images that later can be shown using related Index Animate When Animation is true a slideshow is shown and images change every 1000 ms default Time interval 31 9 Multistate Image Multilayer The Multistate Image Multilayer widget extends the features available in Multistate Image widget Multiple layer support allows user to define more features for animations and select the best at runtime based on different situations ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 243 E erate Time Interval 1000 T Preview l C 1 J 7 Double cick to edit Figure 275 To use the widget proceed as follows 1 Drag and Drop widget from widgets gallery into the page Widget is available in category Basic gt Images 2 Click on Layers to open configuration dialog 3 Define all layers needed To add a new layer use the icon on the right of existing layers Figure 276 4 Double click on each layer to configure images that compose the layer ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 244 Layer 0 Figure 277 5 Browse images from the project gallery or any folder in the computer drag and drop images into the frame to add it to current layer To add a new frame use icon on the right of exis
110. age eet Security ae fo UserGroups R Insert Recipe 3 Pa Export Recipe baal m Import Recipe Figure 146 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 145 EB 2 Recipe Figure 147 Double click on the Recipes to open the Recipe Editor as shown in the figure below Add the recipe elements by clicking the button and then link the tags to the recipe element By clicking on the button Storage Type you can select where to store recipe data Figure 148 A dialog in which the selection can be made will open See the figure below For USB and SD card you can provide the folder location WARNING Recipes configuration files are created automatically when the project is saved Recipes files are saved into the subfolder data of the project folder into the PC by HMWIN Studio When external storages are used please copy this folder into the external storage selected Default path is Storage Card data for SD or USBMemory data for USB storage However a subfolder of it can be used like 7USBMemory MyRecipes data The subfolder name data cannot be changed and is required for the recipes to work Storage Device Storage Device Local Preferred Path Storage Card Note Make sure that the removable media contains the data folder copied from the project 0K cancel Figure 149 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 146 15 2 Configuring Recipe Sets on the Page The
111. age of the project However you can change the home page in the project configuration properties To change the home page double click on the project name item in Project View Once in Properties choose the home page as shown in the figure below File Edit Run Format View Window Help ProjectView HAVYv g Projecti F ig Projectl _VariablesWgt ee Pages _PageMgr iOa GH ec eR pgi ya Properties Temp Proj min j DI ie a PPerrrrr Tiere ree eer ttre r terete erie on al Config a Protocols Tags a Trends Alarms Events Buffer Context Men es Secur Figure 90 9 4 3 PrevPage The PreviousPage macro allows you to navigate the HMI Runtime to the previous page 9 4 4 NextPage The NextPage macro allows you to navigate the HMI Runtime to the next page 9 4 5 LastVisitedPage The LastVisited page macro allows you to load the page previously displayed on HMI Runtime 9 4 6 ShowDialog The ShowDialog macro allows you to display the Dialog Pages defined in the project After the execution of this macro the HMI Runtime displays the specified Dialog Page ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 89 AY Action List W ShowDialog Macro a Macro Properties Show Dialog gt TTT LL TE TECCELELET Pi ShowMessage eae ol aunchApplication fileName Launch Browser E Load Page fileName ShowDig gActio
112. alog Click the OK button Both attributes will be shown in the Tags list box as shown in the figure below Properties List 2s Name Bargraph Property Values Display Name Min Properties Je A Attribute Name BargraphWgt min Display Category Bargraph gt form Bargraphiot reverseScale Bargraph gt onDataUpdate Description ScaleWat visibility E E ScaleWgt offset Scale Wot stroke ScaleWat a ScaleWgt alarmm 3 ae Cees ScaleWat mre pee th Supports Tags F Advanced Ticks Wot stroke TicksWt stroke opacity EE OA TicksWagt labelFreg Ticks Wat tickSize Ticks Wigt tickFreg Ticks Wat tickSize Figure 287 You can arrange the order of the properties by clicking on the up or down button in the Property List To remove a property select the property name and click on the delete button When a property is selected in the Property List the property information is shown in the dialog box NOTE Custom widgets usually are composed by many sub widgets For example a button is a complex widget composed by two Image widgets a button widget and label This is clearly visibile in the ObjectView when the widget is selected To select a sub widget like the label in a button use ObjectView or Shift leftClick of mouse In this way sub widget can be changed without ungroup all widget ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 254 32 3 Editing Custom Properties If you want to change the properties of a Custom Widget
113. alues Any change to recipe data is stored on disk The use of a separate data file on Runtime ensures that modified Recipe values are retained throughout different project updates In other words a subsequent project update does not influence the Recipe data modified by the user on Runtime NOTE To reset the recipe data to the default values there is a dedicated action called Reset recipes see below in this chapter for further information The User can also select where the Recipe needs to be stored There are three options for this FLASH USB and SD Card The user can select any one You can configure Recipes by adding the required controller data items to a page from the Recipe Widget A Recipe can be associated with a particular page and is composed of all the Recipe data items on that page Recipe data items contain all the information associated with normal controller data items but rather than the data being read and written directly to the controller during the course of normal operation the data is instead read from and written to the panel memory that is reserved for the data item This chapter describes how to configure and use the Recipes in the HMWIN Studio application 15 1 Recipe Configuration Editor In the Project View pane select Recipes and right click Then choose Insert Recipe if you want to create a new Recipe The newly added Recipe item will be added in the project workspace ie Scheduler Sy MultiLangu
114. among all widgets objectName string objectName It gets the name of the Widget The name is a unique id for the Widget Tun eron Mtns Flv T ornou CRS eane me var wgt page getWidget recti var name wgt objectName X number x It gets or sets the Widget x position in pixels TOn Eronen edl Eon ue T E e aene jim var wot page getWidget rect1 wgt x 10 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 265 number y It gets or sets the Widget y position in pixels Pn Pron DEAS tdl onMo ou eRe lea e ie var wgt page getWidget recti wgt y 10 width number width It gets or sets the Widget width in pixels Fe TOn D aod TO nM oue Re lease ine ta var wgt page getWidget rect1 wgt width 10 height number height It gets or sets the Widget height in pixels TU OnE cell a e Re e Ee var wgt page getWidget rect1 wgt height 10 visible boolean visible It gets or sets the Widget visible state Tun CION ben tda ronu eke leased ime as var wgt page getWidget recti wgt visible false Tun eron Den td onou erke lease me var wgt page getWidget recti wgt visible true value number value It gets or sets the Widget value FUNG Pion obi eC oF Ono eRe lease dime var wgt page getWidget fieldl wgt value 100 opacity ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 266 number opacity range from 0 to 1 It gets or
115. and it will ask if you want to replace the last installed instance with the new one or if you want to install another instance Figure 5 Setup has detected a previous installation Would you like to REPLACE current version with new one f Yes It will replace current version No t will leave current version unchanged Figure 5 When the user tries to install a second instance of the same version of HMWIN Studio the setup procedure will detect it and will show a warning message that the same version is already available in the computer Setup will also provide the user with the reinstall option Figure 6 Figure 6 Each installation goes to a sub folder which has the version number as part of its name for instance C Program Files Panasonic HMWIN 1 90 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 14 Each installed version provides its ID in the Control Panel Add remove program facility is provided in order to remove it individually from the computer Each installation identifies itself in the Start Menu with a program group name NOTE Multiple Studio installations provide a common workspace folder for all instances of the HMWIN Studio that have been installed 1 2 5 Opening Projects Created with Older Version of HMWIN Studio When a HMWIN Studio project file with jpr extension is opened HMWIN Studio checks for the match between the version ID stored in the jpr file and its version ID if they match the project will be
116. anel using an FTP client NOTE The Log To File Option is saved and retained after power cycles when not needed any more it must be manually deactivated HMI Logger CProtocol updateTags i ABEN readBlock failed Error Timeout a CProtocol updateT ags CProtocol updateT ags CProtocol updateT ags CProtocol updateT ags 3 CProtocol updateT ags CProtocol updateT ags CProtocol updateT ags CProtocol updateT ags CProtocol updateT ags CProtocol updateT ags CProtocol uodateT aas 1 ABEN reacdBlock failed ABEN reacdBlock failed ABEN reacdBlock failed ABEN reacdBlock failed ABEN reacdBlock failed ABEN reacdBlock failed ABEN reacdBlock failed ABEN reacdBlock failed ABEN reacdBlock failed ABEN reacBlock failed ABEN readElock failed Error Timeout Error Timeout Error Timeout Error Timeout Error Timeout Error Timeout Error Timeout Error Timeout Error Timeout Error Timeout Error Timeout r Log to File Figure 17 Show log at boot Enables the logger at start up if the Log to file option has been enabled the files are saved in this case from the startup phase Developer tools ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 20 lt is a collection of utility functions useful for debugging problems at runtime About Shows information about the runtime version 2 4 Built in SNTP Service The HM Panels Operating System features an integra
117. ans put it regReset FALSE 6 Q k isTriggered A e reset oui z r s 7 sTriggered TRUE amp amp ue requireACK FALSE Ole multiTrigger TRUE amp amp new Trigger isTriggered c isTrigge 60 TRUE Figure 132 14 3 Setting Events This chapter describes how to set Events in the Alarm Configuration Editor ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 135 14 3 1 Log Events Select the Log tab in the dialog box as shown in figure The list below this represents a set of conditions for which you may want to store the specific event in the Alarm History Buffer Click the check boxes corresponding to the application requirements Set here the alarm status transitions that has to be logged in the event buffer When entering the triggered status When entering the not triggered status Both when entering the triggered and not triggered status When the alarm is acknowledged When the alarm is reset L When the alarm is disabled When the alarm is enabled Figure 133 The Alarm Events History can be accessed by logging in a dedicated buffer called Event Buffer to configure the Event Buffer you have to double click on Buffers in the Configuration Editor as shown in the figure below Here there is an Option for Selecting the storage type ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 136 ProjectView 1 x r twents Buffer x ASe d Tame Enabe Sze Type i
118. at Runtime all other scheduler parameters can be modified in Runtime such as type mode location etc 21 5Configuring the Schedule Interface for Runtime Interaction The User Interface for Runtime is the Widget called Scheduler To add this to the project just drag and drop it from the advanced section of the Widget Gallery Once the object is on the page in order to select the Scheduler items to be displayed in the Widget click on the button of the Name property that is part of the Scheduler object A Dialog page will open as shown in the figure below where you can add the schedule from the list at Runtime A 1 Pagel x Scheduler v Properties ax e 100 X Th Ty Mr lar Hiv Mr a1 amp ARE KEN ae O lt 3 i ny i sek Font Ara 0 RE Name Schedule1 Schedulp Columns Show Header true Name Type Mode Time Occurence Condition Enable g Text i Display Schedule1 Daily Time 04 19 PM None W Schedulet Daly Time jos2sPm None a m 1 Schedule List Name Select schedule name Figure 191 In the Properties pane you can customize the scheduler Widget to adjust row colors column width and show or hide column etc 21 6 Schedule the Events during Runtime If you defined the scheduler GUI on a page as described in the chapter Configuring the Schedule Interface for Run time Interaction then you can schedule the event and modify this schedule during Runtime on
119. ate 231 121 32 AW 01 01 0 Panel Unknown Bootloader Type Redboot Date 19 01 11 Version UN2ZOHS0 10026 File Name Size Date Figure 316 In the component list locate the one you need to update check the box and browse for the file from the Source file box as shown in the figure below Bootloader Property Value Source File Destination Folder Config OS E Main FPGA Safe FPGA I lnm om 2 tad domind Figure 317 Then click download and check the progress from the Status box below NOTE n the component selection you can mark more than one check box and provide the related file to be downloaded The system will then execute the transfer of the all the elements one after the other and at the end you will need to cycle the power of the system ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 307 Manage target also allows you to replace the default splash screen image shown by the devices during the power up phase Image for the splash screen must be provided in bitmap format saved in RGB 565 format NOTE Splash screen images must NOT be bigger than 500 KB and they must have a black background to ensure the best optical results 38 3 Update of the System Components via USB Flash Drive System components can be updated via USB flash drives For each component a specific file is provided Checksum file with an md5 extension is required to be present in the same location as the system file to be up
120. ature is not supported by all communication protocols Check protocol documentation to know if it is Supported or not 19 1 Offline Node Management Process Steps of the process are e A certain device is online and it is regularly polled by the system if the device does not answer to a poll the system polls it again twice before declaring the device offline e When a device is offline the system polls the device with a longer interval called Offline Retry Time ORT If the device answers to the poll the system declares it online and starts polling it at regular intervals The following schema shows the three polling attempts and the recovery procedure that starts when the Offline Retry Time is elapsed Recovery procedure Retry I Il f Ill I Timeout Timeout Timeout 90s Timeout device device device ORT device Offline a a Online Figure 170 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 165 19 2 Manual Offline Node Management Process Offline Node Management can be done manually e aspecific device on a Node ID is online and it is regularly polled by the system e Using a macro action connected to a button the user can declare the device offline the system stops polling it e Another macro action can be used to declare the device online the system restarts polling it at regular intervals 19 3 Manual Offline Configuration When you know that some devices in communication with the HMI are going to remain offline for a certain pe
121. bination of HTTP and FIP connection The HTTP connection is used to issue commands to the target device like switch to transfer mode or unload running project the FTP session is instead used to transfer the files to the panel flash memory The Default port for HTTP connections on the Target is set to 80 However the user can change the port number to a different value To set the port number from HMWIN Studio click on the Run gt Manage Target and then click on Target Setup on the dialog The HTTP FTP port or HTTPS FTPS port can be set for the target The Host Name can be defined by the user in the appropriate box in the Target Port pop up This will allow each panel to be easily identified on a network with multiple panels The drop down box will no longer show HMI 10 2 0 6 but will show for example Machine1 10 2 0 6 After renaming the host it is necessary to download the system files to the target ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 43 Load Project Unload Project Upload Project Delete Project Note Fa Target 192 168 0 14 k Status See a a eee a es ee es a r TE Advanced Settings Hostname Figure 43 NOTE Transferring a project after the above settings will result in a change of the default configuration At the next download the new ports will
122. ble updates USBMemary Auto select best match Components that wil be updated Project Files Font files System Files Figure 48 7 Mark the Auto select best match check box and click the Next button The rest is automatically done by the system IMPORTANT It is always recommended to create update packages with both flags Project and HMI Runtime checked Use latest runtime with old project not converted with HMWIN Studio can originate Stability problems ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 46 Update Package Target Project HMI Runtime amp Plug In Set Target Password Encrypted Location Figure 49 Target Target type When a project is open the target type is selected automatically otherwise it is responsibility of the user to select the correct target type Project Project opened in HMWIN Studio is added to the update package HMI Runtime amp HMI Runtime is added to the update package If a project is open in Plug In HMWIN Studio also required plugins will be added to update package Set Target Can be used to set password used by HMI Runtime to protect operations Password like upload of projects board management download of projects etc Ref to Remote access protection to HMI Panels for more information on to access protection Encrypted Enable Encryption of update package it cannot be read by any user and can be unzipped only by the HMI Runtime Location
123. but on the Trigger tag value change In any case the samples are plotted with respect to the time The Trigger tag and source tag can be the same This represents the buffer size expressed in samples This is an option to select where the trend buffer data file will be stored Trend data is organized as a FIFO queue Once the buffer gets full the oldest values will be erased to create space for storing the new values lf Save a copy when full is selected when the buffer gets full before overwrite it system create a backup copy of it into external storages When the triggering condition is the time a new sample is considered significant and then stored only if its value in comparison with the last saved value goes out from the specified boundaries In case the triggering condition is based on a trigger tag value change the boundaries are applied to the trigger tag value 16 2 2 Configuring Trend Window for History Trends The History Trend widget trend window is the area used to display the trend buffer in a curve format After configuring the trend buffer in Trend Editor you can use the Historical Trend viewer widget to plot the trend curve on the screen From the trend gallery page drag and drop the History Trend widget to the page 60 40 20 0 Figure 158 A fy LAL gz my Sag 05 30 00 05 30 00 Properties 1x A E amp Trend Num Curves 4 Page Duration 5 min History Trend X Labels
124. byevdenwaustmessuactesuniesrnegeudanemasmenee 32 392 Dialog PAG CS sssrin E EEEE ER 33 3 6 The Widget Gallery ccccccccceccccccceceeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeesssaeaaseeeeeeeessaaaeeeeeeess 33 3 7 Attach To and Dynamic Properties ccccccceececeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesaeeeseeesaeeees 37 ERS FAA IMUA lO ea EE E E ES 39 4 1 Launching the Simulator ccccccssesccesccsseceecscceeeceesscseeceescesseeeeescceseeeesscoess 39 4 2 UOMO IG MESMA oanien EEEE EE 39 4 3 Or o e N ee E S TO ES 39 Transferring the Project to TarQet cccccssccccsscecsesceceseeceeseeseeeeseeesseesesseeeesseeeesaeeeess 42 5 1 Download to Target eee ne ee ee eee 42 5 2 Update gas e 2 0 lt a a ei ne ee eee 45 5 3 The Runtime Loader aos chasenerccccsicndcdcadentavecsendacenseiedatctaedatensentetecieetwbassnniasendecintcask 47 5 4 Upload Projects sssini nania esa nee EENE EEE EEEE EEEN 49 Programming Concepts cccccccccesesecceccaeeeeececueeseceeeeseeseeeeeeseeeeeesseaeeeeessaaeeeeeessaseeees 51 6 1 AOT O ae E E EEE R E 51 6 2 EVO agen a EE EE E E EEE 54 6 2 1 OnClick ONMOUSECIICK ccccccccessseceeceeesseceeeceeeeceeeeeeuseceseeeeaseeeeesaeeeeeeeeas 55 6 2 2 OnHold OnMouseHold cc ceeeeeecccceeeeeaeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeceeeeesseeaseeeceeeeeseaaaaeess 55 029 FUTON SA eenei EE E ES 56 oza ONN MGE eee nE EEEN EE E E 57 2o 1 2 6 002 2 E EEE E E 57 626 OnNDataUpdal sisri a a eee one eee eee eee
125. bytes it is a 64 bit data itis a read only variable Returns the activation time in hours of the display backlight lamp since production of the unit it is a read only variable HMWIN Studio User Manual 12 Battery LED Battery Timeout Display Brightness External Timeout Flash Free Space System Font List System Mode System UpTime Touch Buzzer Buzzer Setup Buzzer Control Buzzer Off Time Buzzer On Time ACGMO195V1EN Enable Disable the use of the front LED indicator to report the low battery status It can have values 0 disabled or 1 enabled Reserved This variable is an integer of R W type Its range goes from 0 to 255 It can be used to check brightness level and adjust it from the application Typical use is connected to a slider widget When set to a low level 0 3 the backlight assume a low but visible value for around 8 seconds to let the user change it otherwise nothing is visible on the display and after that display appears as switched off However even with a value of 0 the backlight is still on and the counter of backlight life time continues to increase Allows setting the non operational time after which the display backlight is automatically turned off The backlight is automatically turned back on when the user presses on the touchscreen The variable is an int of R W type 1 switch off backlight and disable touch switch display off Backlight counter is stopped 0 switch bac
126. can be resized using the mouse the tooltip shows the dimension in chars In case the text cannot fit in the dedicated space than the auto wrap is applied Printer options can be used to control flush of pages in printer Depending on the printer text can be printed immediately or after a timeout from few seconds to minutes However it is always possible to force flush ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 203 when one of following conditions happens after n events after n lines or after n seconds A temporary buffer is used by runtime software Flush conditions are in OR so as soon as a condition is met the page will be flushed out of printer NOTE Not all printers support Text Report operation mode NOTE Text Reports only work in WinCE platforms and require to specify a physical port PDF format is not supported by Text Report NOTE In ine printing text is printed immediately line by line or after a timeout This timeout may depend on printer model could also take minutes for some models not designed for line printing 24 3 Graphic Report To add a Graphic Report click on the Graphic Report button in Reports toolbar The following figure shows report configuration editor J Graphic Report 1 E Active alarm report Use Default Printer Settings Add new page to the report Delete a page Report Page 1 Report Page 2 Figure 212 This part of the editor is used to set the number of pages a
127. can change the type of scheduler at any time during the Runtime as described in the chapter Schedule the Events during Run time Options available for Type are the following By Date By Date scheduler allows you to define the schedule for the specific date and time when the actions shall be executed Daily Daily schedules define the execution of a set of actions on a daily basis by specifying the time of day in which the actions are to be executed Every The Every Scheduler is much like the High Resolution scheduler with the ability to change it in Runtime The Every Scheduler allows you to execute macros with a specific time interval The time interval can be set from 1 sec to 1 day Hourly The Hourly Schedules allow you to execute a set of actions on an Hourly basis by specifying the minute in which the actions have to be executed Monthly The Monthly Schedules allow you to execute a set of actions ona Monthly basis by specifying the day in which the actions have to be executed ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 181 Weekly Weekly schedules allow you to execute a set of actions on a Weekly basis by specifying the time and day s in which the actions have to be executed Yearly The Yearly schedule allows you to execute a set of actions once a year specifying the date and time in which the actions have to be executed Mode Mode parameter is available for a subset of scheduler types It is not supported by scheduler
128. cation protocol 18 1 The Data Transfer Editor To configure each data transfer job you need to correctly map the tags This mapping is performed from the Data Transfer editor To configure the data transfer 1 Double click on Config node 2 Double click on Data Transfer item 3 To add a tag click on the icon a new tag line is added d Mf E gt Fiter keyword Fiter by TAG 4 w TAGA GB Direction Update method Trigger Levee limit High limit 1 COL Z COLI A 5 On update 0 o 2 COL 2 COL Z Ae gt B Qn updabe i 3 ANALOG 1 7 ANALOG 1 he gt B On update 4 ANALOG 2 2_ANALOG 2 A gt E Qn trigger Enable Transfer O 0 S ANALOG 3 2 ANALOG 3 B ain trigger Enatle Transfer 0 i 6 ANALOG 4 2_SNALOG 4 4 gt 6 On trigger Enatte Transfer2 2 20 4 Figure 167 Each line in the Data Transfer editor defines a mapping rule for the alignment of the two tags You can define more mapping rules if you need different update methods or directions 18 2 Data Transfer Toolbar Buttons Import Data Transfer settings can be imported and exported in csv format This feature can be Export effectively used whenever it is more convenient to perform changes directly in the csv file and then reimport the modified file ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 161 Filter keyword Sort only rows containing that keyword Click on the list box to select the column where you need to apply the filte
129. cccccceseeeeeeeceeeeeceeeceeeseceeeseeaeeeeeseeaneeeeesaas 237 Sich Media Player Widget cictes casa chert eels tees a a 238 How to convert a video using SUPER video converter by eRightSoft 239 31 5 1 Using Media Player in JaVaSCript cccccccecccceeesseeeeeesseeseeeeesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeas 240 Ske MC ANT a VIO GU sects sic acct cnc nc at nec an clara atta a 241 1 64 IP Gamera TeSICO isis cette eat a a at 242 S7 PZ CONC ONS re ascetic aod lores Sai Vata eat td cal 242 31 8 Multistate Image Widget sssi a a d a 243 31 9 Multistate Image Multilayer cc ceccccsssseeccesseeeceeseeeceeseeecseseesseseeesseaeees 243 SILO Combo BOX VVIGGC Uo ised ct sce to ak a Aes cae RO ue se ed ad 246 31 11 Consumption Meter Widget ccccccccccecssseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeesssaeeeeeeeas 247 3112 TBFOWSEI WIC laiene e E E oe stalbuuiaalintulntbendlat ant 249 32 CUSTOM VIGO CTS tases abate acs em er a a a a sy aated 251 32 1 Creating a CUSTOM Widget ccccceeeeccceceeseeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeaseeeeeeeeaseeesessageeeeeeeas 251 S22 Adding ING PIODCINCS xiao ater tensed ected cade tener a a 252 32 3 Editing Custom Properties s ccicrs dave tnniantersanstatiuniche cia leavendadtimsnssietchenRuercindes 255 33 Sendra E mal Message orrn n o a a o EAO 256 33 1 Configure E mail Server 00 0 ccccccceeccceeceeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeesaeeeeeeeessaaeeeeeseseaseeeeneas 256 33 2 Configure E mails 00 0 cee ccccccseeeceeeccee
130. ces When single instance is selected the system first verifies whether the application is already running If it is running then the application pulls it up the operating system puts it in the foreground to the user s attention if it is not running then the application is launched 9 4 10 LaunchBrowser LaunchBrowser opens the default web browser You can define the URL address of the webpage in the arguments NOTE This macro only works in platforms that have a default web browser as application Not all platforms are equipped with a default web browser For example this macro is supported in OS based on Windows CE PRO with Internet Explorer enabled 9 4 11 LaunchVNC Use this macro to execute VNC server configuration form This macro is working only on embedded devices WCE based 9 4 12 LaunchUpdater Use this macro to update project and or runtime searching for it into an external device Using Path parameter is possible to specify folder where searching the update package Examples of path could be USBMemory for USB devices in WCE Storage Card for SD devices in WCE NOTE This macro is supported only in hmi panels based on WCE OS ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 91 9 4 13 LockScreen Use this macro to lock touch screen temporary Usually this action is used to allow users to cleanup touch screen without fire events pressing buttons or other widgets on page Screen gt Time remaining to unlock
131. cipe Set Recipe Download Upload Recipe Set Download Upload Figure 152 15 6 Configure Recipe Transfer Macros The Recipe transfer action can be completed through the action list dialog The transfer of Recipes can be achieved by any of the following methods Attaching an action to an event for button or switches Configuring the action from the Alarms action list Using the Scheduler actions list Description of actions available for Recipes is included in the relevant chapter ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 149 Action List s it A Action Liste A W W UpLoadR ecipel Recipe Actions Macro Properties DownLoadRecipe UpLoadRecipe RecipeName Recipel Recipeset curset urm ipe User Management Actions RecipeSet Set the set index Figure 153 15 7 Upload or Download Recipes during Runtime 15 7 1 Recipe Download through Recipe Widget in Runtime Drag and drop the Recipe Widget as described in the Chapter Configuring Recipe Widget for Runtime Execution into the project to execute the Recipe transfer in Runtime Select the Recipe from the drop down box and select the Recipe set from the set dropdown list Then press the Download button to download the current selected Recipe set or press the Upload button to upload the current selected Recipe set 15 7 2 Recipe Download or Upload through Recipe Transfer Macro in Runtime The Recipes can be Downloaded or Uploaded through th
132. clude Send Key and Send Key Widget ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 84 9 3 1 SendKey The SendKey macro is used to enter the predefined character to the Read Write Widget Define the predefined key code and Shift key code to the Macro actions property In runtime first click the R W numeric Widget then execute the Macro to send the predefined keys to the Numeric Widget The action works on the field currently being edited NOTE To use the SendKey macro you must define the keypad type as Macro in the Numeric Widget properties Action List A W W Sendkeyt Figure 84 Properties a x Figure 85 9 3 2 SendKeyWidget The SendKeyWidget macro is used to enter the predefined character or function for a specific Widget To use the macro define the Widget ID and the key code in the Macro Properties ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 85 The Control List Widget available in the advanced category of the Widgets Gallery is a good example of how this macro command can be used Here Up and Down buttons have been implemented using the SendKeyWidget macro See the figure below for reference w Properties 1x e BE H Dag i HU k ClickType E Value ae oom Events OnMousePress Action OnMouseRelease Acti OnDataUpdate Acti i eae S SE EE Styles General Position a J H H H H Action Lit A W Sendkepwidget Figure 86
133. combo 20 4Change Languages at Runtime After the project download Runtime will start using the Default Language However you can change the language on Runtime using the SetLanguage macro LangID is the language index corresponding to the language ID as it can be read from the Language Configuration Editor NOTE After languages are changed at runtime with the macro execution the current language is saved and retained for the next run ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 177 20 5Limitations in UNICODE support HMWIN Studio has been designed for working with UNICODE text However for compatibility reasons with all platforms UNICODE is supported only in a subset of field types wa Fess Charset Rooted Reserved Chars Smis pace lt gt Tag Editor Name ASO VO Comment Unicode Loe eee Tes ee a Wea Printing Repons Name RSCM Vr lt A Tame AS96126 Vs lt 8 Description Unicode for live tags escape seq for and Buffer Name ASCII 32 126 Wier RA Scheduler Name ASCN a2 126 ___ Ps gt lt are Languages Language Name ASCITG2 126 ___ v gt lt 8 FM TTextsin widgets Once J ooo files eoe Hene Unicode Faerie EERIE Password fee Comment Unicode SSCS Recipes ASCII 32 126 View ot ee I ASCII 32 126 Lf 2s eH I ASCII 32 126 Wire RH l Project Name A Z a z 0 9 _ PUBLIC readme index html AZa209 Dialog Page Name A
134. compression level CPU of HMI Panel Quality of IPCamera Based on these factors the widget can reach upto 25 fps Multiple widgets are supported however in this case performance could reduce framerate of each single widget The supported authentication methods are Basic NTLM version 1 Digest MD5 No settings are required to select the method as it comes as an automatic selection from the camera web server to which the widget connects ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 241 31 6 1 IPCamera tested Follow the list of IPCamera tested at today IPCamera Protocol URL D Link DCS 932L MJPEG htto ip_address video cg Panasonic WV Series Network MJPEG http ip _address cgi bin mjpeg Camera D Link DCS 5605 PTZ MJPEG http ip_address video mjpg cgi D Link DCS 900W IP Camera MJPEG http ip_address video cg Hamlet HNIPCAM IP Camera MJPEG http ip_address video cg HTTP http ip_address image jpg DAHUA DH IPC HD2100P 080B HTTP http ip_address 9988 onvit media_service sn 1 3mp Outdoor Vandalproof apshot Apexis APM J901 Z WS PTZ IP MJPEG http ip_address videostream cg Camera HTTP http ip_address snapshot cg MOXA VPort 254 Rugged 4 MJPEG http ip_address moxa cgi mjpeg cg channel MJPEG MPEG4 industrial HTTP http ip _address moxa video encoder cgi getSnapShot cgi chindex 1 NVS30 network video server MJPEG http ip _address 8070 video mjpeg HTTP http ip address jpg image jpg Fosca
135. compromise for most cases 16 3 2 Color Bands Color Bands property of trends allow users to color the graph background based on the day of the week Sunday Saturay and time 0 23 Using the button you can be add as many color bands colors as needed Select multiple cells and click on a color band to assign color to that range of time NOTE Color Bands feature is working just using Local Time in trend viewer not Global Configure ColorBands Color Bands 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 20 Monday 329993 tuesday PRENES cheb kbs k Me Sunday 2 ColorBand 3 ColorBand3 4 ColorBand4 wednesday e e e e fe fe fe e fe e l fe f EEE E usa i de l fe a fe e fe fe fe f fe EEE comm 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 a p p s a a FET Saturday EOIN CMM NCNM EMMCCNMENENE E SG GG aaa a a 21 Figure 161 History Trend 100 0 80 0 60 0 40 0 20 0 0 0 Teen See Ree cee ee 00 03 25 06 51 10 17 13 42 17 08 20 34 00 00 Figure 162 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 157 16 4 Trend Cursor The Trend Cursor allows you to see the trend value at a point Use Show Trend Cursor macro and Scroll Trend Cursor macro to enable the Trend cursor and move it to the required point to get the value of the Curve at particular instant in time a Trend Title 80 60 40 20 11 35 03 11 36 43 11 38 23 11 40 03 Cursor Figure 163 To display the valu
136. controller ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 109 Action List A W W UpLoadCurhecipe Dump EventArchive DeleteEventArchive Reset ProtoEmCount UpLoadCurRecipe User Management Actions Figure 106 9 11 6 ResetRecipe The ResetRecipe macro allows you to restore the factory settings for the Recipe data The uploaded Recipes will be replaced with the original Recipe data In the macro property select the Recipe that you want to reset to factory settings Action List A W W ResetRecipel ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 110 Figure 107 9 11 7 DumpRecipeData The DumpRecipeData macro is used to dump recipes to internal or external storages In the Macro Properties define the location where to save the dumped file Recipe data is saved in CSV format Dump can be done in any external storage like USB SD or network path NOTE The external drives plugged in the USB port of the panel must have format FAT or FAT32 NTFS format is not supported Action List P A W W CumpRecipeD atal Action Recipe Action Properties 3 DownLoadRecipe DumpRecipeData UpLoadRecipe WriteCumentRecipeS RecipeName AllRecipes DownLoadCurRecipe FilePath Storage Card UpLoadCurRecipe FileName RecipeData ae ResetRecipe pa fix DatetimePreth false RestoreRecipeData TimeSpec Local User Management The folder location to where the data to be dumped _ ResetPassword
137. cript you can use the same type of commands in HMWIN Studio as you do in a web browser If you are not familiar with the ECMAScript language there are several existing tutorials and books that cover this subject such as https developer mozilla org en JavaScript This purpose of this document is not to explain JavaScript language but rather to describe how JavaScript is used in the HMWIN Studio applications 34 1 Execution A JavaScript function is executed when an event occurs For example a user can define a script for the OnMousePress event and the JavaScript script will be executed when the button is pressed on the panel It is important to note that JavaScript functions are not executed in the same manner as certain other controller programming scripts such as Ladder Logic JavaScript functions are not executed at a given scan rate the whole time but they are only executed when the given event occurs This approach minimizes the overhead required to execute logic on the panel HMWIN Studio provides a JavaScript engine running at the client side Each project page can contain scripts with scope local to the page where they are programmed The project can also contain global scripts that can be executed by scheduler events or alarm events but it is important to understand that the scripts are still executed at the client side In other words having more than one client connected to the panel for instance an external PC running the HMW
138. ct is running ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 230 Properties ax DateTime Value 2106 02 07711 58 Datalink System Time _SysPre Number Forma MM DD YY hh mm s OnDataUpdate f Cal 7 e Disph 12 29 11 11 24 29 ginal server E E E Figure 258 31 2 RSS Feed Widget The RSS Really Simple Syndication Feed widget allows you to display on the screen your favorite RSS feeds directly from the Internet The widget is available in the Widget Gallery When placed on the page the widget looks as shown in the figure below Feed Description Taaa l E E Figure 259 The RSS Feed widget main properties are RSS Source Allows you to specify the feed URL UpdateRate Allows you to specify the refresh time Properties are shown in the figure below NOTE Feeds sources are fixed and cannot be changed at runtime ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 231 w Properties 1 ty af amp 2 RSS Feed E L RSS Source http rss cnn com rss cnn_topstori UpdateRate 15 CNN http rss cnn com rss enn_topstoies C ESPN http sports espn go com espn T3s NEWS C NewsWeek http feeds newsweek com newsweek TopNews http articles moneycentral msn com Feeds R557 Figure 260 NOTE The RSS Feed widget is specifically designed to work on units where the Internet Explorer browser Pocket Internet Explorer is
139. ction when forceWrite is true A 0 means success and 1 means failure If forceWrite is false returned value will be undefined Wiel a rye Walle Bee oE Var Status projece setTag fagi val l true if status 0 7 oe Cees else Failure var val value project setTag Tagl val ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 274 getRecipeltem object getRecipeltem recipeName recipeSet recipeElement Gets the value of the given recipe set element Parameters recipeName A string representing the recipe name recipeSet A string representing the recipe set can be either the recipe set name or 0 based set index recipeElement A string representing the recipe Element can be either the element name or 0 based element index Return value An object with the value of the recipe undefined Is returned if invalid If of type array an array object type is returned var value project getRecipeItem recipeName Set Element setRecipeltem number setRecipelItem recipeName recipeSet recipeElement value Gets the value of the given recipe set element Parameters recipeName A string representing the recipe name recipeSet A string representing the recipe set can be either the recipe set name or 0 based set index recipeElement A string representing the recipe Element can be either the element name or 0 based element index value An object containing the value to store in the recipe
140. d a Software Plug in is considered as part of the runtime You can use HMWIN Studio to install it in the target using one of the following procedures e Installing runtime Updating runtime e Update Package Plug ins can be removed once installed using one of the following operations from System Mode e Format Flash e Restore Factory Settings ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 65 The system is not able to detect automatically if any Software Plug in is required by the HMI application so it is up to the user to select the Software Plug in manually from the project properties when required Software Plug in support has been designed for embedded HMI panels where storage Is limited and reducing software footprint is critical This option is not supported in Win32 platform 7 11 Behaviour gt Home Page Define Homepage of project The homepage is the first page loaded at runtime after log in page if security is enabled in project When Security is enabled it is possible to specify a different homepage for each groups of users in this case this property is ignored Refer to User Management for more details 7 11 1 Behavior gt Page Width Page Height Define default size in pixel of an HMI page Default is target type dependent depend on HMI panel screen resolution 7 11 2 Behavior gt Display Mode Define HMI panel orientation Landscape or Portrait 7 11 3 Behavior gt Project Type Define target tyoe HMI panel mo
141. d a Language to Pro eChsvdgeciwietisiie r e 171 2031 41 Language Display COMDOnrcasisis niinn e ENE gee 172 20 2 Multi banguage Widget erricdisiee e E eaten 172 20 2 1 Multi Language for Static Text Widget ccccccccecseecceeeeeeeeeceeeceeseeeeeesaeeees 172 20 2 2 Multi Language for Message WidQet ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeas 173 20 2 3 Multi Language for Alarm MeSSaQe s 0 c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeees 174 20 2 4 Multi Language for Pop up Messages ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeesaeneeeeeeeas 174 20 3 Export and Import of Multi language Strings cccccccccsseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeees 175 20 4 Change Languages at RUNTIMG ccccccsscccccssseeccseseeeceesseecseseeessaseeessaaess 177 20 5 kimitations in UNICODE SUPPO iania aaan a 178 21 oo 1 T 6 0 2 gee eet ger oe ene ER a eee eee ee 179 21 1 Configuring the Scheduler Engine cccccccccssseeeeeeceesseceeeeseeeeeeesesegeeeeseeas 179 Cle PAG MIASCSOMIMIO Gi cies lane ie ees gets a ena E E N E 180 Zio Recurrence Schedler ienie ayien ties aceasta vie dea ad 181 21 4 Configuring Location in HMWIN Studio cee ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeas 182 21 5 Configuring the Schedule Interface for Runtime Interaction ee 184 21 6 Schedule the Events during Runtime cccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeseeas 184 22 User Management and Pa
142. d more E mail servers by clicking the button on the left hand side 33 2 Configure E mails In the emailinfo configure emails using following parameters Name optional it can be used for information purposes Description optional it can be used for information purposes From Sender email address ex John domain com To Recipient e mail addresses If you want to send the email to more than one recipient separate the e mail addresses with a semi colon Subject Subject of email Attachment Path of the file to send in attach to the email The system support one single attachment for each email sent NOTE SMTP servers usually limit the max size allowed for an E Mail attachment ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 257 Body Main content of the email System support Live Tags You can add more emails templates by clicking the button on the left hand side Email info email Info e A W Email info Name Description From To Subject Tag 1 Tag 2 Tag 3 Message Figure 290 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 258 34 JavaScript The purpose of this chapter is to describe the JavaScript interface implemented in HMWIN Studio HMWIN Studio JavaScript is based on the ECMAScript programming language htip www ecmascript org as defined in standard ECMA 262 Microsoft Chakra and Firefox SpiderMonkey JavaScript engines support the ECMAScript standard If you are familiar with JavaS
143. d on a rotating menu with navigation buttons at the top and bottom to scroll between the available options The tool is shown in the figure below On the left side several components and functions are highlighted and for each of them the right side Info pane shows the information about the current version when applicable In the picture below the version of the Main OS component is shown nfo Name UNZO Download Configuration OS Date 21 10 09 Hi O1 Download Main OS HS 01 Type Windows Embedded CE 6 0 Version UNZOHS0160M0219 Date 01 06 10 Download Board Parameters Figure 308 System Settings tool has two operating modes e User Mode e System Mode The difference between them is the number of available options 36 1 User Mode User mode is a simple interface where users can get access to the basic settings of the HMI panel The System Settings tool is accessible at Runtime from the context menu by selecting the item Show system settings When activated in this way the System Settings tool always starts in User Mode The context menu can be activated by pressing and holding down a screen area without buttons or other touch sensitive elements until the menu is displayed Main Items available in User Mode are Calibrate Touch To calibrate the touch screen if needed Display settings Backlight and Brightness control ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 297 Time Internal RTC settings
144. dbus TCP prot Modbus TCP prot Modbus TCP prot1 Modbus TCP prot Modbus TCP prot Modbus TCP prot Modbus TCP prot Modbus TCP prot Modbus TCP prot 1 Modbus TCP prot Unsignedint using Variable protocol 3 From ProjectView double click on Config gt Tags gt Indexed Tag Set to open Indexed addressing configuration page 4 Click on Add button to create a new Indexed Tag Set 5 Assign Indexed Tag Set name Room 6 Select tag to use as selector for rooms RoomNumber 7 Create 4 Index Instance rooms one for each room 8 Create 3 Alias variables as table columns and rename it to Temperature Pressure amp Humidity using double click on table columns 9 Double click on cells of table to select tags as shown below or click F2 on cells for entering in edit mode Indexed Tag Set x GES Room Search amp Delete Alias f Pressure Figure 242 NOTE Room 1 Temperature Room1 ressure Room2 Pressure Room2 Temperature Room3 Temperature Rooms ressure Room4Temperature Room4 Fressure ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 192 168 0 34 502 1 HREG 400001 unsigned Short 1927 166 0 34 502 1 HREG 400002 unsigned Short 192 168 0 34 502 1 HREG 400003 unsigned Short 192 168 0 34 502 1 HREG 400004 unsigned Short 192 168 0 34 502 1 HREG 400005 unsigned Short 192 168 0 34 502 1 HREG 400006 unsigned Short 192 168 0 34 502 1 HREG 400007 unsigned Short 192
145. del Based on model many features and properties of project are automatically adjusted to fit it in the right way 7 11 4 Behavior gt PageRequest CurrentPage and SyncOptions The HMI projects contain properties that let you know which page is currently displayed on the HMI and to force the HMI to switch to a specific page These properties can be used to synchronize pages showed on the HMI and HMWIN Client or to control an HMI with a PLC Double click on project name present into ProjectView pane to open the project properties page pL ee ad dh 5 ce OB a Alias Lang E ou Propectview _PageMar EI MyProject Variables yigt Sle Pages E 1 Pagel e Config Protocols Tags fea Trends A Alarms Events Buffer TE Scheduler i MultiLanguage ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 66 Figure 72 Expand the properties view of the Properties pane by clicking on Show Advanced Properties button Properties q PET Project Widget errr errr re rire iii iret retire trite Id MyProject Full Path C Documents and Settings a SOO KELLCELEELELELEELLLELELELELEEELELELLELLELEELELLELLELELEEECELELELELELELEEET Version Context Menu on delay Image DB Enable true Behavior Home Page Pagel jmx Page Width 600 PageHeight 450 Display Mode Landscape Figure 73 Following properties highlighted in green in the picture above can be configured PageRequest This pro
146. dio User Manual 39 E HMSimulator Figure 39 When we invoke the Simulator Settings button a dialog showing the protocols used in the project will pop up Users can select to use actual or simulated protocols by using the Use Simulation checkbox By default the Simulator uses simulated protocols defined in the Jag Editor Simulator column for each Tag see Figure 40 Unchecking flag Mode the Simulator will communicate using real protocols with devices NOTE Some protocols for example the Variables protocol does not support communication with devices Win32 and for these protocols this option remains disabled Usually all protocols based on ETH or RS 232 can be simulated in win32 platform or in general all protocols that do not require special hardware F Simulator Settings PLC Settings ProtecallD ProtocolName 1 protl 2 prot Variables Use Simulation 3 prots Variables Use Simulation Figure 40 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 40 When defining Tag values the Tag Editor also includes a field Simulator to select a method for simulating the data Tag values can be simulated in the following ways Variables SawTooth Sine Wave Triangle Wave Square Wave ACGMO195V1EN The data is stored in a variable in the simulator This variable holds the value of the Tag so the client can read and write to the Tag value A count value is incremented from Offset to Amplitude Offset
147. during the movement the specified image will be shown during the Slide Operation between the start and end point of the movement 9 1 4 RefreshEvent The RefreshEvent macro allows you to refresh the selected Event Widget The Event Widget is a component of the Alarm History Widget see paragraph Alarms History Widget ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 81 Action List Action List A W a RefreshE venti Macro Properties RefreshEvent Slide Widget 1 Event Name EventBufferwgt1 Event Name Set the Widget name ok cancel Figure 80 9 1 5 ContextMenu Context menu is used to configure runtime parameters like Zoom level to update runtime amp project using an update package to show the log window to access the rotating menu for basic HMI configurations like IP Address or device local time etc By default the context menu appears when the user press click and hold for few seconds in the runtime area in an area free of widgets like buttons However in the project area it is possible to disable the OnHold event and configure the HMI to open the context menu just when the macro ContextMenu is called by the user Usually this macro is attached to a button and protected to be used just by system administrators Project Widget Id Full Path Developer Too on del on macro command Figure 81 9 1 6 ReplaceMedia ReplaceMedia macro is used at runtime to replace update existing Media fil
148. e HMWIN Studio provides support to change the display language from a language combo box This helps users see the page look and feel at design time NOTE In Windows XP operating systems for the proper operation of the Multi language editor in the Studio you will need to install the support for complex script and East Asian languages as shown in the figure below Regional and Language Options 1 Ed Regional Options Languages Advanced Text services and input languages To view or change the languages and methods vou can use to enter test chick Details Supplemental language support Most languages are installed by default To install additional languages select the appropriate check box below Install files for complex script and right to left languages including Figure 175 HMWIN Studio is actually supporting a restricted set of fonts for the Chinese languages For Simplified Chinese following fonts are supported ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 170 SimHei simhel ttf For the Traditional Chinese following fonts are supported Arial Unicode MS ARIALUNI TTF 20 1 Add a Language to Project To add a language to a project launch Multi language from the Project View pane Click the Add button to add the language then select the Writing system and the Default Font used by all the table like widgets such as alarms or events Use the Default button to set the default language used when
149. e 244 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 229 31 Special Widgets 31 1 Date Time Widget The Date Time widget is a widget that can be used to view and edit the current time and date at Runtime The widget can be found in the Widget Gallery In the Property pane of the widget you can set the format of the date and time as Date only Time only Date and Time Different formats for representing date and time are available as shown in the figure below Properties hx DateTime Value 2106 02 07711 58 7 Datalink System Time _SysPre Number Formal g Time Spec OnDataUpdate ft y 7 m Display 1212811 11 24 29 m n a MM YYYY DOTY DO YYYY Figure 257 The Time Spec option allows selecting which time the widget has to show during Runtime three options are available for this property e Server e Local e Global To understand the difference between the options available for the Time Spec property you need to recall the basic concepts behind the HMI system architecture Please read the chapter Runtime Modes to become familiar with the HMI software architecture first If you select Server as Time Spec the widget will show the time information as handled by the server side of the HMI system If you select Global as Time spec it will show the Global Time GMT If you select Local as Time Spec it will show the Local Time in the Widget the time of the target where the proje
150. e MacroActions and DataLinks Import page does not have the support for importing MacroActions and DataLinks Do you want to remove those links from page Figure 29 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 32 Page Import can support only import of the page and the widgets in it but not the Macro actions and data links attached to the widget By selecting Yes all the data links and the Macro actions attached to the widgets will be removed Only the Widgets will remain By selecting No the macro actions and the data links will remain attached to the widgets but may not function properly during runtime unless the tags associated with the Macros and data links are present or created in the new project NOTE The page import can be done between projects made in the same version of the software If the versions are different a warning message will pop up to save the project in the new version and then try again to import the page 3 5 2 Dialog Pages Dialog pages are windows opened at runtime on top of the current page when requested by the application Dialogs are used to inform user about something happening ex alarms notifications status errors or to allow user to answer a question Dialog type can be defined in the property window of each dialog and can be e Modal user cannot return to main project window page until dialog is closed e Non Modal user can continue to use main project window or other dialogs non modal w
151. e Recipe transfer macro At runtime execute the macro if the macro is programmed with a push button then press the button The Recipes data will then be transferred to the controller or uploaded from the controller depending on the action programmed The figure below shows a simple example of a project using Recipes at Runtime ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 150 Download Testset0 Figure 154 15 7 3 Backup and Restore of Recipes Data The Recipe data stored in the HMI device can be exported for backup purposes and later restored Please refer to the actions Dump Recipe Data and Restore Recipe Data for further information ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 151 16 Trends Trending is a method of sampling and recording the values of a specified Tag according to sampling conditions normally the time Trending is divided into two main parts Trend acquisition and Trend viewing Trend acquisition programmed with the Trend Editor collects the data into a database The Trend viewer Trend Widget displays the data from this database in a graphical format 16 1 Real Time Trend In real time Trend the data will be presented directly in the Trend window and the changes to the live data can be seen directly in the format of a curve on the Trend window Users can manage the process by seeing the Trend on the HMI The real time Trend Widget Is just a viewer for a Tag and it does not refer to any saved data
152. e a collection of utilities useful for debugging problems at runtime proceed as follow set to true Project properties gt Developer tools in HMWIN Studio Download the project to the target Open context menu Select Developer tools DONZ 2019 04 25 23 02 4 up 0 05 27 idle 4 Ferisd LLO ms Lowerhead 69m Thread ID Friv m kernel 596237774 3 ER ao Codesy 75529510 0 Other threads lt Sms BAM free 125822216 194211540 Eyres diff 0 ImageDG size 2ZMB free S445 E BaMsS IZE TSM Page Preload JEME free i BSMSIZE 6 45 Page Cache SOME free i BSMS IZE 40ME Storage free 45 92 ME Ew Qwewe a 1 Maxcise wh m max lms EvtH gr c l Act ionMgr i 1 fe Al miigr 1 i HODE 1 11 UI 1 Li Timelog is disabled Tap tap to change position Figure 69 The list of items available in developer tools is reported below To use developer tools Show Hide all Show an overview of all main information about device status like CPU Load memory usage event queues etc in one dialog in overlay ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 61 Cpu statistics Memory statistics Event queues Timelog summary Embed window Reset queue stats Disable watchdog Ignore exceptions Launch VNC Profiling 7 3 1 Profiling Show information about CPU load On top the actual machine time is shown along with the total machine uptime CPU statistics are collected with a frequency
153. e of the Trend Cursor on the page define a numeric field and attach the Cursor Value Widget Tag as shown in the figure below This is the Y axis Value of the Cursor Source Tag System Widget Recipe Tag TrendCurveWgtL cursor value Y Labels Title Grid Cursor A Scale Y Scale Curve 1 Curve 1 Value Visible Mini Max Cursor Value Draw Type Curve 2 gt LEE ReadOnly Read Write Write Only TagIndex ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 158 Figure 164 To get the Time at the Particular Point where the Cursor is placed define a numeric field and attach to the Widget Tag as shown in the figure below eau Tag System Widget Recipe TrendWindow Wat cursor timestamp Cursor Cursor Timestamp Curve 1 b Curve 2 Curve 3 b Curve 4 gt Curved b Curve 6 gt General b Grid Page Duration Position Title Read Only Read Write Write Only TagIndex O Figure 165 The Widget tag shown in the figure above represents the X axis cursor value for the trend window 16 5Exporting Trend Buffer Data to CSV file The trend buffers stored in the selected media can be exported to CSV file using dedicated actions Please refer to Dump Trend for further information ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 159 17 Scatter Diagram XY Graph A scatter diagram is a type of mathematical diagram using Cartesian coordinates to display values for two variab
154. e tree to open select the resource in the project ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 224 29 3Tag Cross Reference data update The Tag Cross Reference collects and organizes information in the background when the project is opened Usually dataBy default the information inside the Tag Cross Reference pane areis not updated every time something changed in the project Using the reload button available in Tag Cross Reference bottom toolbar the user can force an update refresh of the data The same reload button appears with a when a refresh is needed A a Figure 238 Users can choose to enable Auto Update by checking Tag Cross Reference gt Auto Update from the top toolbar of HMWIN Studio into View gt Properties dialog Tag cross reference Auto Update cancel Figure 239 29 4Export data in csv Tag Cross Reference allows exporting all information collected in a csv format The format of the csv file depends on Group bythe current selection in the Tag Cross Reference and can be one of the following by Location RESOURCE RESOURCE DESC WIDGET ID ATTRIBUTE TAG by Tag TAG RESOURCE RESOURCE DESC WIDGET ID ATTRIBUTE NOTE Separators used in export operation depends on regional settings of PC ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 225 30 Indexed Addressing Indexed addressing provides a simple way to select a set of tags to use depending on the value of another tag Indexed addressing comes
155. e web project from a panel Enter the login credentials and you will see the first page of the project When running from the simulator you will be executing web pages the same way that you would if you were running directly from the HMI panel ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 287 Mozilla Firefox File Modifica Visualizza Cronologia Segnalibri Strumenti Atuto E 127 0 0 1 81 public _weblogin htr C EB cy P EO F Usemame Password D sign In Figure 303 6 Atthis point you can test the web project in the browser 7 If you want to make changes you can change the project pages in HMWIN Studio and re export the project You do not need to restart the simulator at this point You can simply click the refresh button on the browser and your changes will appear However if you switch from one project to another project you need to restart the simulator for the new project NOTE You need to re export the web project after making changes to the project in order for the changes to appear in the web browser 35 4 Downloading the HM4Web Project After testing the HM4Web pages the next step is to download the project to the desired target device The HM4Web project is downloaded at the same time the normal HMWIN Studio project is downloaded To download HM4Web to the panel you perform the same steps as you would to download a normal HMWIN Studio project Both the HMI panel project and HM4Web web project are downl
156. e with SPT 8 printers compatible with M1POS printers compatible with MP300 printers compatible with Zebra CPCL language Intermec PB42 printers compatible with Intermect PB42 50 51 2 3 with ESC P language PB50 PB51 PB2 PB3 Supported ports e LPT1 USB printers e File PDF NOTE In Win32 platform the only supported printers are PDF and Default Default is used to indicate default OS printer configured in target Any printer not only USB printers can be used in Win32 platform 24 3 6 Printer tested Follow the list of printers tested with printCE drivers in WCE targets Driver Printer Model Line Epson ESC P 2 Epson AcuLaser M2310 Epson LX 9 pin Epson LX 300 lI HP PCL 3 HP LaserJet P2015dm Yes Simulate HP LaserJet 4700dtn Yes Yes HP Deskjet 1010 Yes No HP Deskjet D5560 Yes No HP LaserJet 4700dtn No Yes HP PCL 5e HP LaserJet P2015dm Yes Simulate HP LaserJet 4700dtn ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 206 INTERMEC Intermec PB50 with ESC P language with 4 inch roll paper Note HMI crash when trying to print on Intermec PB50 printer in standby mode after a first successful print 24 4Print Events The configured reports can be triggered by specific events For Alarms the configuration of the events can be done directly in the alarm editor from the Events dialog by clicking on the Print tab as shown in figure Set here for which transitions of Alarm s status the programmed printing
157. ect actions Idiaeresis Code ox Enable Inherits project actions Figure 233 28 2Shows You can easily select what keys will be listed in the Keyboard Editor window Code Description All Keys The editor will show all keys available in the keyboard layout Modified Keys The editor will show only keys that have been configured with some actions at the page level The editor will show only keys that have been configured with actions at Modified Keys In project project level 28 3Clear Actions The Clear Actions button is available to delete actions configured for one or more keys in the Keyboard Editor To Clear Actions select one or more keys and then press the Clear Actions button You will clear all actions configured for the selected keys either in the page or in the project Actions will be removed depending on what you are currently configuring either the project actions in the project view or the page actions in the page view A confirmation dialog will appear to request confirmation of the requested command ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 221 Code ox 100003f a 0x 100004F L Sash Code 0x2f u Question i its Code Ox3f L Underscore Code xf LJ macron Code Oxaf J eer l Idiaeresis Code Oxcf ll ssharp Code Oxdf Inherits project actions Inherits project actions e V Inherits project actions Inherits project actions Inherits project actions Inherits project actions
158. ed to switch of pages OnActivate OnDeactivate Events related to alarms Events related to scheduler Whenever the system generates an Event you can attach one of the following actions to the event an Action Macro or sequence of selected from a list of predefined actions a JavaScript function The figure below shows an example of an Action activated by pressing a button ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 54 Button Value 0 Click Type momentar Autorepeat Disabled Hold Time ms 1 Label Fill Color 12 Show Frame true Events OnMouseClick Action OnMouseHold Action OnDataUpdate Action OnMousePress Action OnMouseR Add Actions Configure Add JavaScript Text Figure 59 By associating Actions to Events the programmer configures user interaction with the program 6 2 1 OnClick OnMouseClick This Event occurs when the button key is pressed and released quickly OnMouseClick OnClick l OnMousePress OnClick OnMouseRelease Figure 60 6 2 2 OnHold OnMouseHold This Event occurs when the button key is pressed and held pressed for a certain Hold time Actions programmed for this Event will be executed only after the Hold time has expired Default Hold time is configured in project properties but can be redefined for each button key When a value 1 is specified as Hold time for a certain button the project default value will be used ACGMO195V1EN H
159. edie 145 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 15 2 Configuring Recipe Sets on the Page ccccccceccsseseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseaeeeeeas 147 15 3 Defining Recipe Fields ccccccccececccccsssseceeceaeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeseeeeeeeessaaeges 147 15 4 Recipe Status 0 0 cccccccsssessssceeececsseeessseeeeeessseeesseeeeeeeessueauseeeeeeeesiseasseeeseees 148 15 5 Configuring Recipe Widget for Runtime Execution ccccceceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 149 15 6 Configure Recipe Transfer M Cros cccccccccssseeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeesaeaneneeeeess 149 15 7 Upload or Download Recipes during Runtime ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 150 15 7 1 Recipe Download through Recipe Widget in Runtime cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 150 15 7 2 Recipe Download or Upload through Recipe Transfer Macro in Runtime 150 15 7 3 Backup and Restore of Recipes Data ceecceeessesseeeeeeeeseeeeesseaseeeeenseaees 151 16 Trend Seo tidus estend er sarees sate satencdansdeemascansacseed AA 152 16 1 Reak IMG Trend osiensa aa 152 162 MBIO rendian S E SAE 153 162 1 Trend EGUON sa esinceveonas any a a a 154 16 2 2 Configuring Trend Window for History Trends cceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 155 16 3 Trend Window Properties cccccseeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeseeeeeessaeeeseneeeeesssaneeeens 156 16 3 1 Request Samples Advanced View ccccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeasseeee
160. eeceeeceeeseeeeeceaescesessaaaeceesseaaeeesessageeeeseaas 257 34 Java oC Pie bec aeanenhssneseeetaeedeansanesseevarassniaheeeetevecomewix 259 34 1 E OC TOM ojo ssa2 b cerca e 259 OMe EVENS eonan E 259 34A Widg Eveni xaccaneccnssancecrrsncronusannoduearnsduapete veetendssuctnetvsdendeurdtbcdr aactuneeeansaa ice 260 3422 PAGS EVENS aane r a Aaa A 261 3423 OVStEM EVE INS irrena a aa A TaT 262 OAS e CODECS oiran ae a a a a N 264 SLA WdE aar a a a a S a E N 265 34132 PAJE trma r aa a a E IEN 268 343 NOU Dorit since Bois Naso OE a ASA aA SEA 270 SAO Projeti sereh a iE a iaeaea E e RDE 271 3430 Sale na a iaeaea er EEEE E a REAT 279 34 4 KeywordS 1 eee cece eeeeeccccceeeeeeeeccaeusceeeceeessceeeseaeseeeeeseauseceeesaaageceeesaaaseeessssegeeeeesaas 280 34 5 Global FUNCTIONS eee cccceceeceeeceeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeaeeeceeessaaeeeeeeseeeeeeesssegseeeeeeas 280 34 6 _ LIMITATIONS ccc eeccecesceccaneeceaececeaeeeceueeecaueecsaceceuseeseaeessaeeesageessueeessueessaaees 280 34 7 Debugging Of JavaScript 2 0 ccccccssseceecceeseeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeaseeeesseeaeeeeeesegeeeeeeeas 281 34 7 1 Remote JavaScript Debugger cccccccssseeeeeeceeeeeceeeceeeeceeesseaseeeseesageeeeesaas 282 35 HM4Web HTML5 based ACCESS ccccccsssscceccceeseeeeeceaeeeeeeeseeesceeessausseeeessaaeeeeeessaaaes 284 35 1 Supported Browsers PlatfOrMs ccccccssseseceeceeseeceeeeseseceesseeaeeeeeeesaeeeeeeseas 284 Oded POr aaaea ea aA eka a ONN 284 301
161. eeeas 198 23 2 Configure Audit Events cccccccccccesecceceeseeeeceeeceeceeeeessaeeeesseueceeseaeeeesaaaeees 198 23 3 Configure Tags in the Audit Trail ccecccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeas 199 23 4 Configure Alarms in the Audit Trail cc ccccccceeseeceeeeeeeseceeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeas 200 23 5 Configure Login or Logout Details in Audit Trail cccececccseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 201 23 6 Viewing Audit Trails in RUNtIMG cccccccccccccseeceecseeeeeeeeeceeseeeceeseeeeessaaeees 201 23 7 Exporting Audit Trail as CSV File ce cccccccecceeceeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeessaaeees 202 24 REDONS arer nee r oa a a S a E a a a uapiseabed 203 241 Aang A VOD OMT sraa a O aA N 203 242 TEXUREDO eroine a a AO NST 203 24 3 GEADAIGAACDOM ainsa i a AO NST 204 24 Page DOV irnn a T A R NE A ONN 205 24 32 Header And FOOUEN sirere enia A ERA AEN 205 24 3 3 The Context Widget Gallery cccccccccccsseeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeseeeseeesaeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeas 205 24 3 4 Printer CONFIQUIATION ccccceeeecceeceeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesseaseeeeesseaeeesessaeeeeeeaas 205 24 3 5 Supported Printers ccccccccssseccecccesseceeeceeeseceeeseeeeeceeesaeegeceessseaeeeeesseageeeesseas 205 24 3 6 Printer tested cc ceccccscccccesceceeeeceeeeeceeeeeseucesseceseaseeseaeeeseeeeseueesseeeessneeesaaees 206 24 4 Print Events ice seinece sash cendetdinoddcdasncnsndevedecdbsawed ved inwidedadwasQuadined
162. eeeeeseeseeeessaeeeeeeeeeas 225 294 sEXPOMCataNnCSV sic cei ces eis ee ee a oe ee cae 225 30 Indexed Addressing cccccccseececcesecceceeececceeeceeceeeceeseeseeeeceueeeesseeeetsasecesseeeeeseeeeeeas 226 30 1 Creating an Indexed Addressing Set cccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeseeas 226 30 1 1 Autofill tag NAMES cc ccccseeececcseseeeceeseeeceeeeecseuseeessaseeeesaueeeeseseesssaneesssaaeees 228 30 2 Using Indexed Addressing mode IN pages ccccccceeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeas 228 31 DOSGClal VV IO GSTS a toseient cass becte take te Section hae eng elmke secu batien Cal anions Geel custodians 230 31 1 Date THIMEWVIG GC er Sanita Shatcutsiecbeianernbautaenaadimcd E leone susinteoamavents 230 312 RSS Feed WICKET iieiea e E eee ee 231 Sto C nNtToOlFLISTWIJET eteiic iea E O ean eelax 232 ACGM0195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual US SOUL ere EE NEN antinnseeasanetecresausent 233 31 9 2 DE OCUOM sieci kinakaa a aAa aa vans bleguusenos REA Aaen 234 31 3 3 Write on Select 0 ceeccccccssseceeeceeeeeceeeseeeseceeeseeaeeceeesseaseceseesaaseeessesageeeessegs 234 31 3 4 Write on Enter ccc ccccccssseeecceseeecceeseeeceeuseecceasceessaeeessageeecseseeesseseessseaess 235 Iko Read OMY aeaa a A AE OEE E AERE REEN 235 31 4 Variables Wid eL cccccccccseseceeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeesseeeeceeesseaseceesseeageeesessegseeeeseas 235 31 4 1 Using Variables in Ja VASCIIDG ccc
163. eees 156 16 3 2 G l r Bands seisein R E a a eA 157 tea Tend OUSO seep aeeta co Aaa ees eee en eae 158 16 5 Exporting Trend Buffer Data to CSV file oo eee cece eee e teeter eeeeeeeeaaneeeeeeees 159 17 SCalier Diagramy XAY Gran eri an a a a N R 160 18 Data Fran lOr eia R E A aigeateanaiameimaaen 161 181 The Data Transtor Onl cinerea a a a 161 18 2 Data Transfer Toolbar Buttons 2 cicicccctececc2hiisccehedawaieedveceeadahevecn Uvaaccadalaenentddans 161 183 Data Transier Fields sceccscecocesenssarneceeeacd passe a RT 162 16 4 Exporing Data tO cCSV PIGS iwscc sseasocaviacedsnaar sceriuassanennnladernnueveieeaateeenateenk 163 18 5 Data Transfer Limitations and Recommendations ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 163 19 Offline Node Management satel anier ieee lena pleas ele 165 19 1 Offline Node Management Process cccccccssssssseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeseneassseeeees 165 19 2 Manual Offline Node Management Process cccceeceteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 166 19 3 Manual Offline Configuration costs rciccsacdesaandscamadibetnatn ssviamactessuaialenananvalonkannies 166 19 4 Automatic Offline NodeDetection cceeccccccsseeeceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeesssaeeseeessaaaees 168 19 5 Offline Management Toolbar buttons sssnnnnnnnnnnsseeeeessnserrnnnrnnnnnrrereeeeennne 168 19 6 Offline Management Fields vi ncctiassiticsindlwadsletancubiannintavaanalievtenialstamasbeuiuunavies 169 20 Multi Language ienaa a a 170 20 1 Ad
164. eessaeeeeesaneees 66 7 11 1 Behavior gt Page Width Page Height cccccseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeneeeeeeeas 66 7 11 2 Behavior gt Display Mode ccccccessecececeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeecseaeeeeessaeaeeeeesseaneeeesenas 66 Galles Behaviors Project Type ie satice Sctan cutis oie a a esas inernnn datas enticed iced 66 7 11 4 Behavior gt PageRequest CurrentPage and SyncOptions ccceeeeeee 66 7 11 5 Behavior gt Hold Time Autorepeat Time cccccceeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeas 69 APRO EVENS SOR VV MCC isis nicotene i ncincuneradhey tee tncduimcder aa hatiaa a kde 69 8 System VANAIDICS aranera coca casee a sues a a tfc aueaeraacedeasceeudesseaeson 70 8 1 PANNING aa eae ne gated me deabseceae S E E 70 8 2 COMING AOU sheesh saat ana a A nwsdedesaneerndenedeostenued E 71 8 3 Daylight SAVING TIIMG cccccccccccceecseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeesseaeeeeeesseaeeeesesaeaeeeeeenaaess 71 8 4 DVICE aise ae Becca Se a a ves ue E aad ne tosatnenateee wa cdoceecadened 72 8 5 DUMP INFOMATION eiiiai antn aaa ania aE EEN 74 8 6 KOYDA ee sb oat aoauenad tua sanatioust ioe a a atonal ioraue osmeecinents 74 8 7 BN 01 0 Gleeeee ence Sn A ce eer oe cee eee 74 8 8 ga ee eae a a ee ner ee ees 74 8 9 AE EINO PAE ata ic ora aetna aera E E A E N maaan ine eines eaten wet S 75 SA0 ECE ea a a ee eae ne loca 75 2 eg Caa ne PO een ra ne nme ee 76 912 GENO eset a lt a eee lt fea al alee Mele 76 see es T
165. eesseeceseueeeseaeeeseeeeesseesseeesaeeenes 129 13 Using VNC for Remote ACCESS i cenecscseaecteecuare tent aeteicratanden eee eit 130 Wel NNG SENE ernn eae eee eae 130 1322 WING VICWEP sinope n E ede 131 14 PUVA epetk hae ite the R ER de seu dese ate cen ea teegacteneacnaauneeeeectn aeeneted 132 l amp r Alam Coniguration Edto serer a a 132 Wee Alam Stale Ma CNNE r a a a A 135 IAS DENT VC NES rose ates nema tustaaiacta tienen ded sameot annem ecuev gata haeatenienacsuatemnennesacs 135 TA ed OQ HEV CU S sik ht iamuatdnen nnd ibcamertaantan Je laameni iamsashbhudcedahinaan O 136 IASA NOUN eis a a Jeccamectapeueeteantee 137 WAS ACUO eaa T ES 138 14 4 Active Alarms Widget tencsccccrsasauennevareieusdsetclrnoeneweaemesanarcnitadgiabenoeteeroemea 139 ge ie FE e E 139 TAA 2 SONNO serno east an taliened aeeeeaeaaee 141 14 5 Alarms History Widget vassworass sucogevasuitacd sted swenveeveremeraacanuaienedsdiatiaegvaevereweceens 141 14 6 Managing alarms at RUNTIME ccccccccceeeeeeseeeeeeseeseeesseeeesseeeeeesaaeeeesaaeeeeeas 142 14 7 Enable Disable Alarms at Runtime nnnsnnennnnnnnennennnnnnnnnnnrnrrrenrnrrreenrnrrrennne 142 14 8 Live Data in Alarms Widget cccccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeesaeeeeenaeeeessaneeeeas 143 14 9 Exporting Alarm Buffers as CSV filo ccceccccceceeseeeeeesaeeeeeeessaeeeeeeeeeaaess 144 15 RECIPE Seuns rna A ad aden aivia anus need eae ee osuanss 145 15 1 Recipe Connguraion EqnOhecse isc he ee
166. efault and at the project level ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual Widget Ticks Schedule TrendWindow EditBox AnalogVideo Message BarGraph shape ListBox Labels TrendCurve ComboBox admin authorizations ae te Dase settings fl eth Pages cet Pages cet Pagel E i TemplatePage 1 Figure 197 The widgets security settings can be changed not only globally but also for each single widget defined within the project all the widgets can be reached from the tree structure on the left part of the widget tab Permissions can be given at three levels e Project level e Page level e Widget level Widget Ticks Schedule TrendWindow EditBox AnalogVideo Message BarGraph ListBox Labels TrendCurve ComboBox Needle Label Grid Indicator In the tree structure the permission for a page can be set as e Full Access e Hide e Read Only Permission Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access All the widgets on this page will take the settings that have been assigned to the page with a type of hierarchy logic Suppose the page permission is set as Read Only then all the widgets in the page will have the permission as Read Only On selecting a widget inside the page from the tree structure you can see that the permission is gi
167. en the macro is executed the value of the selected bit value is set to 0 The BitIndex property allows you to select the bit position inside the Tag ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 92 9 6 5 WriteTag WriteTag allows you to write constant values to the controller memory In the Macro properties you have to specify the Tag name and the value to be written 9 6 6 StepTag The StepTag macro allows you to increment or decrement the value of a Tag TagName Name of the Tag you want to Step Step Step value Do not step over limit Step Limit enables Step Limit If the Do not step over limit is true then the macro will work until the Tag value reaches the specified value 9 6 7 ActivateGroup This macro activates tags update for a group of Tags Usually tags are updated when used in the current page or always when defined in Tag Editor as Active True Using this macro it is possible to force the system to keep a group of tags always active updated independently if they are used on the current page or not 9 6 8 DeactivateGroup Deactivate a group of tags Using this macro system stops reading a group of tags that had been previously activated 9 7 Trend Actions Trend actions are used for both Live Data Trends and the Historical Trends Widget 9 7 1 RefreshTrend The RefreshTrend macro is used to refresh the Trend window You have to specify the Trend Widget in the macro properties This macro can be used in any o
168. ent settings properties altering the actual rendering at runtime Q Why are the static images stored in a separate folder called Opt instead of storing them directly in the project folder A This solution avoids name collisions and allows skipping the upload of optimization images Q Why are the static images stored as a png file instead of common jpg file A PNG format uses a lossless compression for images and support transparencies JPEG files would render fuzzier compared to the PNG files with a different result in Studio not using optimization and runtime Q What will happen when no optimization is done in the software A Every single widget is rendered at runtime In particular SVG images may require a lot of time to render in an embedded platform 41 1 3 Templates Currently template pages can have large amount of static content Still static optimization may not be applied to a template page as it is decided based on the page where the template is used If a huge background image is repeated in every page via a template page we tend to increase the footprint of the panel as the same static image is created for each of the page using the template page 41 2Page caching Once accessed all pages are kept in a RAM cache up to the maximum allowed cache size depending on the actual platform s available RAM This allows a much faster access since cached pages once reloaded only need to re paint their content without reloadin
169. ent User Name Name of the user logged to the Client where the system variable is displayed This is a read only string 8 16 Version Variables return information on OS amp Runtime version Main OS Version Return the version of Main OS Ex UN30HSxx60M0166 Runtime Version Return the version of runtime Ex 1 90 0 Build 682 ACGMO195V1iEN HMWIN Studio User Manual 11 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 78 9 Actions Actions are the function used to interact with the system they are normally executed when events are triggered When considering events generated by buttons pressed or released not all the actions are available for both states In case the selected action is not supported for the actual state the software will report a warning message as shown in the following figure This action is not allowed OnMousePress event please configure OnMouseRelease event Figure 76 9 1 Widget Actions The following chapters will include the description of a set of actions dedicated to handling widget visibility and control 9 1 1 ShowWidget The ShowWidget macro allows you to show or hide the page widgets In the macro properties select the widget you want to show or hide then set the show properties as follows false to hide and true to show widget Macro Properties et Select Widget Page Actions LoadPage PrevPage ShowWidgetAction widgetname Neat Page Last VisitedPaae Figure
170. er Manual 293 The ColorPalette functionality works for Buttons Image and Bar graphs widgets limited to the properties Fill and Background Color 35 6 5 Widget Event HM4Web supports both macro actions and JavaScript actions for widgets NOTE You may find some limitations in the OnDataUpdate event in certain widgets especially with its initial level triggering due to page loading delays when running on a remote client 35 6 6 Page Events HM4Web supports both macro actions and JavaScript actions for pages with the following limitations e Page OnDataUpdate event is not supported e Dialog page OnDataUpdate event is not supported e Template page OnDataUpdate event is not supported 35 6 7 JavaScript API HM4Web does not support JavaScript functions 35 6 8 Keypads HM4Web provides keypad support for Numeric widgets only Custom keypads are not supported Numeric widgets with a Read Write or Write mode will display the keyboard of the device The user can click on the Numeric widget and the widget will show a textbox in which the new value can be inserted After inserting the value the user can either press Enter key Enter key equivalent in touch devices or the user can click on the Save button shown below the text box to make the newly inserted value permanent Only meaningful numbers will be accepted during the save process Anything else will be ignored and will not result in a value change p w Save x Cancel ACGMO195
171. er to saturate the available connection sockets Enable compression enabling this flag can improve download times on very slow connections For LAN ones the cpu overhead required to accomplish compression server side is just too high So by default the flag is disabled Time Settings information is used by the client to adapt the widget timestamp information according to the desired behavior Options for Time Settings Use Widget For each widget use time information according to the widget settings Defaults provided at the time of programming Local Time Translates all timestamps used in the project into the PC local time where the client is installed Global Time Translates all timestamps used in the project into UTC format Server Tine Translates all timestamps used in the project into the same used by HMI panel server in order to show the same time NOTE This feature requires you to set the HMI RTC with the correct time zone and DST Daylight Savings Time options 10 3 Workspace Using HMWIN Client project files will be uploaded from panel and placed into a cache directory Cache folder where project are temporary stored is under appdata Panasonic build number client cache where build number is a folder named as build number like 01 90 00 608 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 123 11 Using the Integrated FTP Server The HMI Runtime system features an integrated FTP server that can be used to get access to
172. er you drag and drop a message widget select the language from the Language combo box and enter the message description for the selected language Again you can also use the export and import features as described in the chapter Export and Import of Multilanguage Strings YI So Multianguage Langt oo m es a Continuous Index Min 0 Message Description Figure 179 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 173 20 2 3 Multi Language for Alarm Messages HMWIN Studio allows you to use Multi language for Alarm messages To add a Multi language string for an Alarm message open the alarm editor select the language list from the tool bar Language combo and add the alarm messages You can also use the export and import features as described in the chapter Export and Import of Multilanguage Strings Alam aI Alarm Butter baMaskAerm 0 Tagi Bh This is a test E AamBuferl btMask lam 1 Tagi This is a test C AamBuferl bitMaskAlam Tagi This is a test Figure 180 20 2 4 Multi Language for Pop up Messages For the popup message macro you can define the Multi languages To do this you first need to select the language from language list combo and then enter the message in the Show Message macro as shown in the figure below Action List Acton List fs W ShowMessagel Figure 181 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 174 20 3 Export and Import of Multi language String
173. erate reports A string representing the status of the printing system The possible values are idle error paused and printing The number of the available text jobs in the printing queue Variables return information on the screen status Time remaining to unlock ACGMO195V1EN Return time remaining to unlock screen ref LockScreen action HMWIN Studio User Manual 19 X Screen It shows the x screen resolution of the display resolution Y Screen It shows the y screen resolution of the display resolution 8 11SD Card Variables return information on the external SD Card plugged into the panel They are 64 bit variables except the drive name which is a string All the variables are read only SD Card Size in bytes of the available space FreeSpace SD Card Name Name of the SD card SD Card Size Size in bytes of the card plugged in the slot SD Card Status Status of the SD card 8 12 Server Variables return information on the Server status All following system variables refer to server not to client ex HMWIN Client Current page Return the name of current page Current project Return the name of current project Operating mode It shows the number of seconds elapsed after the last display start in time operating mode Project load time It shows the date time string in milliseconds like the System Date format when the project was loaded in runtime 8 13 Time Variables return information on the System Time expr
174. ere cet kee Ak ee eae eee es 87 9 4 ACS FAC OINS carters wisp stts a th erate all ls IR hes aca sale alia ete OE Maced iida a Osada 88 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual GAA LOAGDPAGS dccessticdecssetewcbeis E sa ktnasb ets wate biscatenbloe WibgaehencOebdavesecdaseuseubss 88 g42 HomePage eepika a aa nese eS 89 OAS PICVE AGG cereri aa ase aA 89 DAA ANGXUP AGG isinen kitne a a aaa a nase eaaa av searsamannls 89 9 4 5 LastViSitedPage cccccccccccsseecceeceeeeseceeceeeeeceeesseeaeeeesseaaseeeesseaaeeeeesssaseeeeseaas 89 9 4 6 SNOWDIAIOGL sscatiesisctscentebdinacdecbs nicer siuiaceastewaedubdusaldedaontauvad Wadesthandsduedsuavdearsovaieenis 89 2 hs damm 61 21 B 21 010 ener emcee een emer ener tee wen rears neers em en oe ere veneer 90 AO FSMMOWINIS SSAC E nna a en cian a acta aoa heat 90 949 MECAUIACINEN OO MC eLthO I arcsec ne cat ttn a a elt heat 91 9410 AUC IBV OWS CM settee at sie ei eee clea nocd nal et an eae aa doa 91 gA Laune FIV ING arane i i do eee ciate AN aod neal aan lata ete Sloat 91 g4 12 AuinCMU Cael xcs t ect asce tt od hn a heen as hel al 91 AN HOCK SCV ON n a a eat sated ce Nac tat act E 92 9 5 Mulika INC TOMS ea ed son tevin sudaseai easel a elect adeaed utes 92 95 1 SeiIPANQUAGS veda cote cece ei tat ele aac ee eeu a ark le 92 9 6 TAC ACOINS sorsra te lcet added al tant E Naat sed ladies Sdt ten ie Nat lead tie 92 2S ay Data grag ak 2 game rete ae ea PP ne ce NET rE Coe PP oR a a ae 92 2
175. ermissions for a specific action directly from the page view rather than locating the action from the tree view shown in the authorization dialog 22 3 0 FTP Authorizations For each group of users you can set specific authorizations related to the use of the FIP server FTP permissions can be enabled or disabled If enabled you can specify from the Permissions combo box the access level selecting between All Write Read Browse and None The IP Address list access allows you to specify from which IP an incoming FTP connection should be accepted NOTE IP access list configuration is common to all groups 22 3 4 HTTP Authorizations The HTTP authorization dialog allows to configure restrictions related to http access to the web server integrated into the runtime HTTP settings are common to all groups and are valid just if security flag is enabled IP list can be used to list allowed ip addresses Default is Allow all Only IP listed in IP list will be authorized to access to http server embedded into the runtime Access limits is used to allow or restrict access to particular files and folders into the workspace Based on Force Remote Login flag default workspace access change and as conseguence using Access limits is possible to open or close access to specific resources ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 190 Force Remote Login Default Access to workspace Disable FULL Can be used to block access to some files folders or
176. es in detail the Attach to concept ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 38 4 The HMI Simulator The HM Simulator provides the ability to test the project functionality before downloading it to the panel This feature is useful to test the project when no PLC or HMI hardware is available and to speed up development and debugging of projects The HMI Simulator support online simulation in communication with real devices PLC based on Ethernet or RS 232 based protocols and offline simulation where using Tag Editor gt Simulator field allows the configuration behavior of each tag in simulation mode 4 1 Launching the Simulator Start the Simulator with the menu item Run gt Start Simulator Format View Window Help ca Download To Target Manage Target b l Start Simulator il Figure 37 At this point the Simulator is running in the computer similar to the way the server runs on a panel 4 2Stopping the Simulator Format View Window Help s Download To Target Manage Target W Stop Simulator Figure 38 To stop the Simulator select the Run gt Stop Simulator menu item You can also exit the Simulator using the close button of the Simulator or by using the Exit option from the Context Menu 4 3 Simulator Settings The Simulator can be used with real protocols amp PLCs Ethernet or RS 232 based protocols or with simulated protocols ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Stu
177. es in the tag table using the set filter if any For example when new instances or new aliases are added you can use this option to just fill in the new missing entries Replace button can be used to replace all table entries with the ones provided by the AutoFill table Reset button reset Tag filter to empty no auto fill Filters are saved as project preferences and can be separately set for the entire table or for a column Once set for a column the table filter is discarded in favour of the column one So you can selectively change the filter for handling a particular alias only 30 2Using Indexed Addressing mode in pages Once defined an Indexed Tag Set let see how to design the HMI page introduced in the previous example ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 228 Temperature C 21 Pressure 1 Umidity Figure 243 To create this Indexed Tag Set page proceed as follow 1 Create a page and add a Combo box widget 3 labels and 3 numeric fields 2 As Index of Combo box will be used the tag RoomNumber Index Tag so the selector of the room 3 As List of Combo box will be used following O ma sngt 0 Room Number 4 Attach to each numeric field Value the corresponding Alias variable Room gt Temperature Room gt Humidity Room gt Pressure field Lvalue Source Tag Alias System Widget Recipe pee gt IndexedTagSet0 4 Room Umidity Pressure Temperature Figur
178. es of a project with new files provided via USB SD or any other external device Usually this macro is used to update project Images Video or Music ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 82 Following parameters are available MediaType Image Video or Music Define type of files to update Device define storage where runtime will search new media files ex USBMemory sourcePath define folder where runtime will search new media files ex images Image Resize if enabled the macro will resize images to the size of images at runtime This is applicable for image media type only Silent if enabled will execute replace media macro without user interaction Otherwise a dialog will appear to allow user to select MediaType amp storage where new media files are located USB stick SD Card etc Jf Select Device Type USB Local gt Folder SD ea z Music sourcePath USBMemoryinew Pictures eee nee Tene Cea Co Figure 82 ReplaceMedia Macro is working in WCE and Win32 OS When ReplaceMedia is executed in remote using HMWIN Client or via ActiveX files are searched on HMI local storages ReplaceMedia macro for Video amp Music has been design to work in combination with MediaPlayer widget ReplaceMedia macro for Images has been design to replace project images Follow API Javascript for replaceMedia method void replaceMedia var sourcePath var bSilent var Device var nMediaType va
179. esahsaeadvbsivecdbdeiaciswes 207 24 5 MINIMUM requirements ccccceeeeeecseeeeeeseeeeecceeseeeeseeeeeesaueeeesaaeeeessneeesaaaeess 208 25 Screen SAV Sl siorr ens T NETTEN dab ouiiiunsadduada TAE AUAA 209 26 Back p ReEStOl Eiaa a a a a ones nenic 211 27 KROVD AOS aia a R naman mauaneaiiiats 213 27 1 Creating and Using Custom Keypads cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeas 214 27 2 Deleting or Renaming Custom Keypads cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeas 216 Zhao KEY DAG Typermania r eed ieee 217 2YA Keypad POSITION mics delle E ieas dere east da ea deletes eee 218 28 ExternalikeyDO al GS iaa ee eels uel a eee es ee oe 219 201 ioeakehrand Filer sics cee cigs eel a ies aerate aesendeh ese 220 INOW S os ei cas es Selassie Cu eal aia et cece hee 221 26 0 Cear ACON eer rencteiis asi E E a a E Hunn aletitaaiNe 221 204 Keyboard Layout cesa tebestedl ican nnalateiieiedes 222 2809 ENADE Ke yO OAC eoa a bee sted ee eee et Rael eteies 222 28 6 Configure Macro Actions for Keys ccccccssssccecsseseeceeeeseseceeesaeeseeeesssageeeeseeas 223 29 ag GrOSS RGICl ONGC cerro aton e a a a ea Wench ees mateo sendin 224 29 1 Accessing Tag Cross Reference ccccccsseccccesseecceesececeeseeecseaseeessseeessaeees 224 29 2 Using Tag Cross Reference ccccccccccesseeeeeceeeeecececaeeseceeseeeaeeeeesssageeeeeeaas 224 29 3 Tag Cross Reference data update ccecccceccssseeceeeeeeeee
180. essed in UTC format They are all Int 32 bits of read write type except for the System time which is a 64 bit variable still of read write type This is actually the UTC time which also is available as date time from the other variables Day Of Month Day of the month 1 31 Day of Week Day of the week 0 Sunday 6 Saturday Hour Hour 0 23 Minute Minute 0 59 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 76 Month Current month 1 12 Second Second 0 59 System Time system time Year Current Year 8 14USB Drive Variables return information on the external USB drive connected to the panel they are 64 bit variables except the drive name which is a string All the variables are read only USB Drive free space Size in bytes of the available space USB Drive Name Name of the USB device USB Drive Size size in bytes of the device plugged in the USB port USB Drive Status Status of the USB device 8 15 User Management Variables return information on users and groups No of Remote Clients Alive Number of HMWIN Client connected to the server This is a read only short 16 bit This Client Group Name Name of the group to which the current logged user belongs to This is a read only string This Client ID The variable is valid with reference to the HMWIN Client scope Local and remote clients connected to the same server Same runtime get a unique ID returned by this variable This is a read only short 16 bit This Cli
181. et connection ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 11 1 2 2 Installation Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive If your system has Auto run enabled the HMWIN Studio installation will start automatically otherwise run the HMWIN Studio setup application 1 Click on the Start button and select Run from the popup menu 2 Type D setup in the box if you are running the installation from the CD drive if your CD ROM drive is not drive D replace with the appropriate letter 3 Click Next Fg yl ll 0 I accept the agreement I do not accept the agreement lt Back Next gt Cancel Figure 1 4 Read the HMWIN Studio Software License and accept the agreement 5 Follow the instructions on the screen The default location for the HMWIN Studio software is C Program Files Panasonic HMWIN Default installation path can be changed depending on needs 6 Ifthe Select Components step is available select the components you want to install 7 The installation procedure will create a program group called HMWIN Studio in the Start menu A HMWIN Studio icon can be added to the desktop Figure 2 a h ar a 9 a i Se Te i ee Tee Additional icons Figure 3 After installing the HMWIN Studio you can run the application by using the desktop icon or from Start gt All programs gt HMWIN Studio 1 2 3 Licensing HMWIN Studio is available with a friendly 30 days free trial policy After 30 days since the installati
182. eturns the index integer of selected item in combo List String List Strings to show as items into combobox widget This field is multilanguage Data Data List Optional parameter available in advanced mode that allows returning in the field Data of the widget the related value reported in the Data List as string Usually Index is enough for 90 of applications however sometime it is useful to return a custom value based on an item selected in the combo box Combo Box String List Data List Selection1 Valuel Selection2 Value Figure 280 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 246 lt is useful in many applications to attach fields like Index or Data to tags to know the values related to the selected item in the combo box When attached to Index the tag will contain the index integer of the selected item 0 n when attached to Data it will contain the data value string specified in the Data List 31 11 Consumption Meter Widget Consumption meter widget is available in the widgets gallery This widget has been designed specifically to monitor a resource which is continuously increasing The system reads the value of the resource and calculate the increment in a predefined range of time the increment is then represented in a trend like window using bar graphs A typical application for this widget is the calculation of the power consumption of a system Representation is done using a bar graph where it is also po
183. eypad is shown below Newly created keypads will be saved in the project folder Figure 226 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 215 Once the custom keypad has been created it may be used for any specific field where the Keyboard Type property has been properly set by selecting the corresponding keypad from the property Keypad Type in the property pane as shown below Froperties ax hy A Ex ET Numeric None Macro Figure 227 The Up Down keypad is mainly used for moving cursors in Widgets that are requiring this function An example is the Control List as shown in the following picture State 1 l State 2 Eo State 3 State 4 State 5 State 6 x Figure 228 27 2 Deleting or Renaming Custom Keypads In the Project View pane right click on the keypad you need to delete or rename A context menu will be displayed as shown in the figure below ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 216 3 2 Keypads i Alphabet Remove KeyPad Page Rename KeyPad Page Figure 229 The user can choose the options e Remove KeyPad Page to remove the keypad from the project e Rename Keypad Page to rename the keypad NOTE By default any numeric widget read write numeric field will be assigned the numeric keypad If you decide to modify the default numeric keypad that will be used throughout the project the following procedure is recommended so you won t need to
184. f available graph widgets like Historical trends Scatter Diagram and Consumption Meter 9 7 2 Scroll Left Trend The ScrollLeftTrend macro is used to scroll the Trend window to the left side by one tenth 1 10 of the page duration NOTE With the Real Time trend it is recommended pausing the trend using the macro PauseTrend otherwise the window is continuously shifted to the current value ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 93 9 7 3 Scroll Right Trend The ScrollRightTrend macro is used to scroll the Trend window to the right side by one tenth 1 10 of the page duration NOTE With the Real Time trend it is recommended pausing the trend using the macro PauseTrend otherwise the window is continuously shifted to the current value 9 7 4 PageLeftTrend The PageLeftTrend macro allows you to scroll the Trend window by one page duration For example if the page duration is 10 minutes then with the PageLeftT rend macro you can scroll the trend left for 10 minutes 9 7 5 Page Right Trend The PageRightTrend allows you to scroll the Trend window by one page duration For example if the page duration is 10 minutes then with the PageRightTrend macro you can scroll the trend right for 10 minutes 9 7 6 Page Duration Trend The PageDuration macro is used to set the page duration of the Trend window In Macro Properties you must define the Trend Name and Page Duration NOTE You can also use a combo box Widget to select the page du
185. factory default settings from System Mode To restore factory settings proceed as follow 1 Enter in System Mode 2 Use one of the following operations available in rotating menu Format Flash cleanup entire Flash disk and registry configuration Restore Factory Settings allow user to select components to cleanup Both operations do not manage firmware factory restore MainOS ConfigOS Bootloader FPGA images etc For more information related to Format Flash and Restore Factory Settings please ref to System Mode ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 312 41 Tips and tricks to improve performance HMWIN Studio allow max flexibility for a projects designer User can change svgs and replace images with customized versions However following some simple rules is possible to have faster projects in terms of boot time page change and animations 41 1 Static Optimization Static optimization is a technique used in HMWIN Studio to improve the runtime performance Using lot of graphics images and photos in a project might degrade performances The idea of the static optimization is to merge many different images to a single background image in order to save rendering and loading times only one raster image needs to be loaded and rendered instead of loading and rendering many single raster and or vector images When you create a project in HMWIN Studio the pages might contain some widgets like texts images background images backg
186. fault port used for this remote service is 2100 NOTE A format of hmi panel reset password device side NOTE For Win32 runtime password is saved into Users username AppData Roaming Panasonic bulldNumber server config RemoteUpdateConfig xml NOTE Leave Old password empty as default if target password is not set 39 1 Ports amp Firewalling The table below shows all ports required by components of HMWIN Studio Remote Board Runtime Project Codesys Access Management Management iPLC FTP data port 16384 17407 tcp passive mode a Yes Yes UDP broadcast ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 310 2100 tcp Board port a Yes am ee e gm om w am om we sw a O ooo o w Remote Access Required If you need to connect to runtime using one of following HMWIN Client Activex Web access HM4Web Runtime Project Management ports Required If you need to connect to runtime using in HMWIN Studio for Runtime and Project operations like Update Runtime Install Runtime Download Project Board Management ports Required if you need to connect to device with HMWIN Studio for Board operations like Update BSP download Splash Image etc NOTE When broadcast service is not available ex in VPN networks user have to type exact IP Address directly to reach device from HMWIN Studio ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 311 40 Factory Restore If you re having problems with HMI device you can try to restore
187. fault user the LogOut automatically logs in the Default user If there is not a Default user or you logout from the Default user then the log in screen is shown ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 112 Action List Action List A w W LogQOut Figure 110 9 12 2 SwitchUser The SwitchUser macro allows you to switch between two users without logging out the logged in user The server continues running with the previously logged in user until the next user logs in This means after executing the SwitchUser macro the runtime will display the User Login template Internally however the server runs with the previously logged in user This action is useful for ensuring that there is always one user logged onto the system ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 113 Action List Action List A W W Switch ser COo Figure 111 Click on the Back button to go back to the previously logged in user User name Password ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 114 Figure 112 9 12 3 ResetPassword The ResetPassword macro allows the current user to restore his or her original password this macro will restore settings specified in the project for the current user password No parameter is required to set this macro Action List Action List A Ww W ResetPassword Figure 113 9 12 4 AddUser The AddUser macro is used to add users at runtime When t
188. fies the Buffer file to which the Alarm history will be saved Trigger This selection determines the triggering condition for an alarm Three Alarm types are available e Limit Alarm A Limit Alarm is triggered when the monitored Tag value goes OUTSIDE of its given boundaries low limit and high limit When the Tag value is equal to its low or high limit the alarm is not triggered e Bitmask Alarm To get a valid trigger the bitwise AND operator compares each bit of the bitmask with the Tag value corresponding to that Alarm If both bits are on the alarm is set to true When the Bitmask Alarm is selected you can specify one or more Bit positions inside the Tag When one of the Bits is set the alarm is triggered The Bit position must be given in decimal format if more Bits are specified each position must be separated by a Bitmask is a position so it starts from zero 0 e Deviation Alarm For the Deviation Alarm a predefined set point as well as a value for deviation will be given If the percentage of deviation of the Tag value from the set point exceeds this deviation then the trigger condition becomes true deviation Value a SetPoint gt 100 x SetPoint Tag Attach the Tag for which the Alarm shall periodically check the Tag value so that the respective alarm s is triggered when this deviates from its limits The Alarm function will refer to the value of this Tag or to the state of a Bit in the ca
189. formation 9 10 3 DumpTrend The DumpTrend macro is used to store the Historical Trend data to external drives such as a USB drive or an SD card In the macro properties you must configure the Historical Trend name you want to store and the destination folder path If you use a USB drive plugged into the USB port the path will be USBMemory or if you use an SD Card the path willbe Storage Card followed by the specified folder in the memory NOTE The execution of the Dump action will automatically force a flush to disk of the data temporarily maintained in the RAM memory See the chapter Trend Editor for further information about the policy used to save sampled data to disk NOTE The external drives plugged on the USB port of the panel must have format FAT or FAT32 NTFS format is not supported ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 100 Action List Action Lit P A W W DumpT rendi Macro Script Macro Properties Control serLED DumpTrend Dump Trend Delete Trend TrendName Dump Event Archive FolderPath USBMemory DeleteEventArchive Reset Proto ExCount i Sateh Remove Media DatetimePrer true CopyCodesysProject timeSpec Global Recipe Actions DownLoad Recipe l UpLoadRecipe TrendName WriteCurentRecipeSet The name of the trend to be Down LoadCurRecipe dumped UpLoadCurRecipe DumpAsCSY true Cancel Figure 99 DumpAsCSV If this option is set to true then the buffer will be di
190. from the root of the USB drive to the computer disk the folder structure will look as follows config alarms xml eventconfig xml data AlarmBuffer1 dat AlarmBuffer1 inf A AlarmBufferReader exe NOTE The utility is distributed in HMWIN Studio in the folder Panasonic HMWIN Utils The AlarmBufferReader can be called from command line with the following syntax AlarmBufferReader AlarmBuffer1 FILE AlarmBuffer1 csv Where AlarmBuffer1 is the name of the dumped dat file without extension and AlarmBuffer1 csv is the desired output file name ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 104 Action List Acton List P A YW W DumpE vent rchivel Macro Event Actions Macro Properties DumpEventArchive EventArchive AuditTrail FolderPath USBMemory DumpContfigFile false DumpaAscsy true Control UserLED Dump Trend i Delete Trend Dump EventArchive DatetimePreftxedF true DeleteEventArchive timeSpec Global Reset Proto ErCount 7 l Safely Remove Media CopyCodesysFroject Recipe Actions DownLoad Recipe UpLoadRecipe Figure 100 The utility called AuditTrailBufferReader exe is available for Audit Trail buffers NOTE The action must to be configured with the option DumpConfigFile set to true The result of the dump is a directory structure similar to the one generated for Events The conversion tool can be called from the command line according to the following syntax AuditTrailBufferReader AuditTrail FILE
191. g Project properties f gt ji MamBuferi True 1000 ams m e Pages 2 AuditTral Tue 1000 ea Config Ll Protocols mE Tags Local USB Preferred Storage Device B Reports se F Ewents Buffer see TE Scheduler vee MultiLanguage Screen Saver M Data transfers cee Security H AuditTrail m Recipes Figure 134 When the events buffers are stored in persistent storages Local USB SD etc the system saves the file on disk every 5 minutes However events of type alarms are saved immediately 14 3 2 Notify The user can choose the conditions under which the Alarms should be posted in the Alarm Widget This specifically refers to the default Alarm Widget available in the Widget gallery The user can decide when the Widget will be updated with a change of an Alarm Status We recommend leaving the default settings here and changing only those necessary for specific application requirements ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 137 When entering the triggered status When entering the not triggered status Both when entering the triggered and not triggered status When the alarm is acknowledged When the alarm is reset E When the alarm is disabled When the alarm is enabled Figure 135 14 3 3 Actions The user can specify the conditions under which the action s configured for the specific Alarm must be executed Set here for which transitions of Alarm s status the programmed
192. g Name are used so as link between tags used by HMI application Tag Name and tags exported from PLC 3 4 2 Data Types When creating a tag HMWIN Studio shows a dialog box in which you need to specify the tag properties The tag Memory Types are specific to the selected Protocol The tag Data Type must be selected from the list of available HMWIN Studio Data Types according to the internal representation you need for the selected controller address HMWIN Studio Data Types are summarized in the following table Character strings The characters are coded in UTF 8 format Boolean is one bit data 0 1 Float corresponds to the IEEE single precision 32 bit floating point type 1 17e 38 3 40e38 double Double corresponds to IEEE double precision 64 bit floating point type 2 2e 308 1 79308 float Te Int is signed 32 bit data 2 1e9 2 1e9 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 29 unsignedShort UnsignedShort is unsigned 16 bit data 0 65535 unsignedByte UnsignedByte is unsigned 8 bit data 0 255 3 4 3 Dictionaries A dictionary is a list of tags imported in the tag editor for a specific protocol Usually these files are generated by 3d party tools and are in csv xml or other formats Refer to Tag Import section of each protocol for details related to supported formats Dictionaries folder in ProjectView list all files imported in the tag editor for each protocol Selecting a particular protocol it is
193. g all page resources images for instances 41 3lmage DB Image DB is a technique used to track usage of image files and amortize the cost of image loading by caching most frequently used images for instance Push Button images Gauge needles Slider thumbs etc So the same image used in many different places is loaded just once The image DB will preload the top most used images at start up until memory limits are hit This would further improve the individual page loading times The file imagecachelist xml is created in project opt folder containing relevant information for ImageDB e Fill color in case of SVG e Size of the svg image e Number of times an image is used in the project e Number of different sizes for the same image ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 316 41 3 1 Best Practice to use the Image DB 1 Use uniform size of buttons gauges and other widgets wherever possible 2 Use same color themes as much as possible among widgets of same kind 41 4Precache Precache attribute of pages can be used by users to notify runtime to preload some pages in RAM at boot time for quicker access Precache is useful for complex pages having many dynamic widgets In short when precache is enabled on a page access to the page is faster As side effect precache slow down boottime because system will be not ready at boot until all pages with precache flag enabled has been cached in RAM 41 4 1 Best Practice to use the Precache
194. g them each time to the server This results in faster loading of HM4Web pages For optimal HM4Web performance caching should be enabled in your browser By default the browser comes with caching enabled and you do not have to do anything with it unless the cache has been disabled Note that HM4Web pages will work properly with disabled browser caching however resource loading time will be slower compared with normal cached operations 35 7 3 Using a Proxy Some users may be accessing the HM4Web project through a proxy The proxies may control the number of parallel connection settings for the browser If the proxy controls the parallel connection settings then make sure that the maximum possible parallel connections max connections is set to a number greater than 5 and less than or equal to 10 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 295 35 7 4 Why I m not able to see changes in web pages Everytime a new web page has been included or edited into the project we must perform a Download to Target action to download changes into panel Connecting with a web browser to the panel IP address can result in the visualization of cached pages instead of the latest downloaded pages To avoid this behaviour you can disable cache of your web browser force web page refresh by passing browser cache ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 296 36 System Settings Tool The System Settings tool comes with an interface base
195. graded To update a system component proceed as follow 1 Copy all the files you need to upgrade to a USB Memory and plug this into the USB port of the panel 2 Start the System Settings tool with the special procedure for getting this in System Mode and then locate the desired item in the rotating menu 3 Click directly on the item the blue button with white label and browse to locate the proper file stored on the pen drive USBMemory The figure below shows an example of the Main OS components Select File File info Nok available configos UN2Z0HS z E hi46xaf01t08 bin E1 mainns_UN20HS0 La E redboot_UN2OHSI Figure 318 4 Select the Download command to transfer files to the panel Select the Upload command to get files from the panel 5 Follow the instructions on the screen to proceed with the update A progress bar on the screen will inform you about the status of the operation Please make sure to NOT turn off power to the panel while a system component is being upgraded Some of the components will require some time for the upgrade to complete NOTE Upgrade procedure may change depending on the hardware revision or operating system version from which you start please contact technical support offices for any detail about the exact sequence ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 308 39 Access Protection to HMI Devices The following operations can be protected with a password set at device side e
196. gs BSP Settings Operating system version Unit operating timers power up and activated backlight timers Buzzer control Battery LED control Network IP address settings Plug in List Provides a list of the plug in modules installed and recognized by the system this option may not be supported by all platforms and all versions 2 3 Other Context Menu Options The context menu has several other options Zoom In Out 100 Select view at runtime Pan Mode Enables disables pan mode works only when you have previously activated a zoom in ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 18 Settings Following runtime settings are available Context Menu The context menu activation delay Range is 1 60 seconds Delay sec Show Busy Cursor When enabled shows an hourglass when the system is busy Use keypads When enabled shows touch keypads when users touch click on fields for data entry When disabled does not show any keypad on screen useful when an external USB keyboard is connected to device Password Change the password protecting operations such as Download Project Runtime Upload project Board management BSP Update Please ref to Remote access protection to HMI Panels for more information related to access protection Context Menu Delay s 2 T gt Show Mouse Pointer Show Busy Cursor i Use Keypads Figure 15 Project Manager When activated a dialog box will appear see figure below providing optio
197. gs f gl Transfer from disk No HMI found Waiting for transfer Figure 218 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 212 27 Keypads Keypads are used for data entry operations Several keypads are provided in the Studio by default including Numeric Alphabet Alohabet Small and Up Down as shown in the following pictures Figure 221 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 213 27 1 Creating and Using Custom Keypads Keypads can be created from scratch using the following procedure Note that you can also change the existing keypads From the Project View pane right click on the Keypads folder A context menu will be displayed as shown in the figure below Figure 222 Clicking on the Insert Keypad will generate a pop up with the New Keypad dialog as shown below Figure 223 The user can select any of the available keypads that are provided in the project template the list shown on the left side to create a custom keypad If you need to create a keypad from scratch then select the Blank option This will insert a Blank Keypad as shown below ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 214 Figure 224 You can use the widgets available from the Keypad Widgets gallery as shown in the picture below to create the custom keypad Widget Gallery a x Edit Controls Custom Shapes Alphabets Generic Numeric US Int Alphabets US Int Generic US Int Numeric Figure 225 A sample custom created k
198. he HMI application to keep the smallest footprint for the application 12 2HTTP Access to Activex files When security is enabled ActiveX files HMIAX cab and HMIClientAX html have tobe accessible from the http server embedded into the runtime Refer to HTTP Authorizations chapter for more details 12 3Internet Explorer Settings Internet Explorer settings must be changed adding the panel s IP to the list of the trusted sites In Tools Internet Option Security tab choose Trusted sites Then click on the Sites button Type in the IP address of the Target device the location where the ActiveX component has been installed and it will be loaded to the browser ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 125 Onia Lax _f You can add and remove websites from this zone All websites in Add this website to the zone Require server verification https for all sites in this zone Figure 122 12 4Security Setting for Trusted Site Zone Set your Internet Explorer Browser as seen in the following images ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 126 Select a zone to view or change security settings Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet Trusted sites This zone contains websites that you trust not to damage your computer or your files You have websites in this zone Security level for this zone Custom Custom settings To change the settings dick Custom level To use the recom
199. he object can still be subject to additional style changes This is done using the Page Toolbar shown in the figure below Depending on the object selected you can have options for the style frame fill color along with the font type and size and other standard object properties NOTE Some widgets are composed of many sub widgets For example a button is a complex widget composed by two Image widgets a button widget and label This is clearly visible in the ObjectView when the widget is selected To select a sub widget like the label in a button use ObjectView or Shift leftClick of mouse In this way sub widget can be changed without ungroup all widget ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 36 ObjectView Ax Ge Binstdl RAR om X Bm ee Bere ewe eT a inp imagel6 O Font Tahoma 10 A B Z Eph buttonStdl ed hb label LL aanl imagel _ Figure 34 3 Attach To and Dynamic Properties HMWIN Studio allows for simple binding between Tags and Widget Properties Many different Widget Properties can be attached to a Tag which allows you to control the device and animate objects based on live data To attach a Tag to a property click on the property in Property view A button will be displayed on the right side of the property Click on this button and select the item Attach To from the menu as shown in the figure below
200. he page Parameters me The object that triggers the event eventiInfo It is reserved for future enhancements function Pagel onDeactivate me eventinfo Ao Somer na mG 34 2 2 3 onWheel void onMouseWheelClock me eventiInfo This occurs when a wheel device is moving ex Mouse wheel Parameters me The object that triggers the event eventInfo Details of the event triggered function Pagel onMouseWheelClock me eventiInfo ea 34 2 3 System Events There are three types of system events e related to the scheduler e related to the alarms e related to Wheel device Be sure to use unequivocal function names in JavaScript between code at page amp project level scheduler alarms When a conflict happens at runtime two functions with the same name in current page and at project level the system execute JavaScript callback at page level not a project level When a JavaScript callback is not found in current page the system search for it at project level automatically 34 2 3 1 Scheduler Event The event occurs when triggered by the proper action available in the scheduler system as shown in the figure below ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 262 Av ee e aaa i aM H 1 Schedulet Daily Time 18 31 Action List Action List A Y W JavaScript Schedul MutiLang Actions Figure 291 34 2 3 2 Alarm Event The event occurs when triggered by a specific alarm conditio
201. he static optimization attributes of each single widget e Normal HMWIN Studio automatically detects if the widget can be merged with the background This is true if the widget is not a dynamic widget and does not overlap i e it is stacked above a dynamic widget e Static The image is forced to be merged to background This flag can be used when the static widget overlaps a dynamic transparent widget In this case the automatic optimization will fail because it does not make any assumption on invisible areas might be rendered at runtime e Dynamic the widget is not optimized at all For example we need to use this flag when a static widget needs to be changed by Javascript ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 313 a Studio b Runtime a Studio b Runtime Figure 321 41 1 1 Best practices for max performance 1 Don t use static optimization at all if you have pages with almost only dynamic objects In fact static optimization will save a lot of almost identical full size images for each page wasting a lot of memory that can be otherwise used to speed up project with other techniques like for instance page caching 2 If possible avoid overlapping static widgets over a dynamic widget This is the most important rule to follow The overlapping area is computed considering the bounding rectangles of the widgets that is the rectangles delimited by editing handles 3 Bounding rectangles can include transparent areas
202. her you want to redirect to the active project or stay in the non active project If the you want to redirect to the active project then click on OK button and you will be redirected to the current active project page NOTE This redirection is based on the assumption that the current active project has HM4Web pages in it If you want to stay in the non active project whatever actions you perform in the browser may not complete properly as the HM4Web will not perform any server bound communications 35 6 HM4Web Limitations Currently not all HMWIN Studio features are supported in HM4Web For example HM4Web only supports a subset of widgets available in HMWIN Studio The following sections define the items that are supported by HM4Web 35 6 1 Widgets e Label e Numeric Fields e Buttons e Hotspot Buttons e Horizontal Vertical Sliders e Gauge Needle e Images e Multistate Images Multistatelmage MultiLayer not supported e Indicators Lights e Date Time e Bar Graphs e Segmented Bar Graphs e Message widget e Knobs e Shapes e PCamera single frames or streaming MJPEG for devices supporting it There are some known issues that you may experience while using HM4Web e Widget rotation is not supported e Notall custom fonts appear correctly in iOS devices e Vertical Slider reverse mode is not supported e Shape widgets are generated as images As a result the look and feel of the shape cannot be changed by attach
203. hile a dialog is shown on top of it ProjectView ax wv Properties A AN am Tix Bh Oo amp amp o tos 6 sA m Project30 A ee Js C a t J Dial ARG Project30 qye on one Z T AA name Page3 A a DialogType non modal a 1 Pag Bier Width 350 b a DialogPages st MQ Page Background Color 255 255 255 BB Paget JavaScript Debug false a W Page5 Title Bar true a es Page6 Title Name Page3 H an Runtime Position y Page Templates innau Mobile Pages e d Config Y 0 a Q Protocols Events ve Tags OnActivate Action a Trends OnDeactivate Action gi Reports gly Alarms sen go Events Buffer FE Scheduler Zz RB MultiLanguage lf Screen Saver Figure 30 Max number of dialogs allowed is reported in Table of functions and limits When max number of open dialog has been reached the runtime will close automatically the oldest dialog open to open the new one A dialog can have a Title Bar on top of it When Title Bar is enabled Title Bar true a Title Name may be shown Runtime Position can be used to specify a fixed position for the dialog window 3 6 The Widget Gallery The Gallery is adjacent to the Property View panel and can be opened by clicking on the Widget Gallery tab as shown in the figure below ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 33 Widget Gallery a x Basic Text Numeric i abel 99999 7FFF Message Buttons
204. his is the primary key used to identify the information in the internal runtime tag database Note that you cannot use the same tag name even if you are referring to different communication protocols Group After the tags have been defined in the Tag Editor they are used in the project by attaching them to the widgets properties see chapter Attach To for a complete explanation For each screen the system is able to identify which tags are used in the specific page and identifies them as part of the page group This allows easy handling at run time of the requests made by the communication protocol to the connected controller s only the tags included in the displayed page are queued for polling from the controller memory This mechanism is fully automatic and there is no intervention required by the user The tag editor allows you to define groups of tags not belonging to a specific page but for instance grouped according to their logical meaning We can call these groups Users groups Users groups have no meaning for the local visualization but they are very useful when external software communicates with the runtime requesting sets of data that must be independent from the currently displayed screen The Runtime web server publishes a set of communication interfaces that can be used from a cg party application to interface with the local tag database and read the tags according to their grouping The group column allows you
205. his macro is executed a template page pops up where parameters for the user can be set These parameters include Username Password Group Comments flags like password must contain numbers password must contain special character user must change his initial password enable logoff time and Inactivity Logoff Time The User Log is shown in the figure below ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 115 User name Password Group Comments Password must contain number Password must contain special character User must change his initial password Enable logoff time Inactivity logoff time Figure 114 9 12 5 DeleteUser The DeleteUser macro is used to delete users at runtime Upon executing this macro a template page will pop up where you can select the user you wish to delete No parameters are required to set this macro After executing the macro the Delete User form will be displayed as shown in the figure below ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 116 User name Password Group Comments Password must contain number Password must contain special character User must change his initial password Enable logoff time Inactivity logoff time Figure 115 9 12 6 EditUsers The EditUsers macro is used to edit users at runtime When executing this macro a template page pops up Here you can select a user and modify this user s parameters such as Username Passw
206. ie See renee ene ee rn a a Re Peete eee ne eer ep meee ene Se eens 76 014 oo DIVE pretence eee ren et ne Re eee een ee eee a en Se eames 77 BAS WISER MaAMAGS INS eree cee eet slant coe Natta cure ce a 77 0 10 Vorons erin er ere ene eee re er ee ee eee ee nee en eens eee ee 77 9 PAG UO MS aoe cea Bushee fete ett eet haa sas a E E E 79 9 1 Widget ACU ONS iesnas a nawine wanna Hate a dh maui aa a 79 ite SSIMOWVWVIG ST i258 ios secret a cate a ane edmmsannts uted a entiaias 79 92 TRIO GSI GAN eles asters saciid wnt cat vate a eatin tated cumin a ene eibeniteas 80 Dele ASICS VV VAG CU es cies raratetes eased acta auntie a a wend uamieients 80 Phad IACIFESIIEV GIN socciiee jc ecto cate inte a ude taeda ante Jeanede wedi a 81 Fro COMTEXUM CMU ere pareres 2 cried anaes a nen a a a 82 9 16 REDIACCIMOGIA sa sep tt ck a a a a a 82 9 2 Meda ACION ies e eer n ge attr reenter ee ee ates 83 Qe PAYMON sal is ted alae a Sod a 84 er yom 0 1 0 210 f mene ee en eter a ene ee ee eee ee 84 923 IRCIOACIMCGIA eens titer kad ede etad ys sales a a a elvan eau aie 84 924 PAUSCM CCI estes cpicet kak lee tin ha ala a stale ced Alva maul tnaiaeie 84 9257 BrOwSeMeda acetic oes yee et a aac rcan eT eee Danae seaeneae 84 9 3 KEY DOAN FACOG ceni a ts edece se Ae eae eae 84 2 es ay 12 618 on et a ee tan OR en re T ee ne 85 932 SCHOKEY WICC ES eiis ete te eae Re T T 85 9339 SOMOWKCY PE AG cnni a a Aneasiseiasa nerd 87 934 KeyDOarOMaClOS ss is
207. iggered Not Acked 25 01 2011 16 59 32 Alarms 23 Not Triggered Not Acked 25 01 2011 16 59 32 Alarm 23 Not Triggered Not Acked 25 01 2011 16 59 32 Check Uncheck All Filter Show All Ack Reset Save Figure 143 Later if you want to enable again the Alarm select the Alarm and check the Enable check box Then execute the Save command The Alarm will now be subscribed and subject to being triggered 14 8 Live Data in Alarms Widget This feature is used to view the live Tag data value inside the alarm description It is applicable for both Active Alarms and History Alarms widget To configure the live data visualization in the Alarm Widget follow a simple syntax rule The Tags to be included must be specified in the alarm description string including the Tag names in square brackets Tag name An example is shown below d Name Enabe Ack Reset Tag Buffer Tigger Action escini Tag Alam Bufer bitMask arm Show Dialog Alam 1 Tag Value is Tag1 1 Alarm1 2 Alam Tag1 Alam Butter bitMaskAlarm 1 Show Dialog Alam 2 Tag Value is Tag2 Aam3 Tag1 Alam Buffer bitMaskAlam 1 ShowLialog Alam 3 Tag Value is Tag3 Figure 144 During Runtime in the Alarm Widget the markers and Tag name will be replaced in the description column by the actual value of the Tag The Widget automatically refreshes and shows the current values of the Tags in the Widget In History Alarm Widget it will show the value
208. ign or snap to other objects When you select an object to move one of the following hot points is selected as the source of the snap point depending on the area you pressed top top left top right bottom bottom left bottom right left right center ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 57 Top left Top Top nght gt Gen Right Bottom left Bottom Bottom nght Figure 64 The algorithm tries to find a matching hot point among the neighbourhood widgets hot points which matches either x or y coordinates of the source snap point For line widget the source snap points are the terminal points of the line 6 4 Z order of widgets Z order is an ordering of overlapping two dimensional objects widgets such as shapes or objects in a 3D application One of the features of widgets is that they could overlap so that one widget hides part or all of another When two widgets overlap their z order determines which one appears on top of the other A widget with greater z order is always in front of an element with a lower z order Z ordering of widgets is essential for performances since overlapping dynamic widgets can invalidate static optimization and reduce performance of hmi applications In HMWIN Studio a new toolbar is available to help user understand widgets overlapping The toolbar allows to Enable visual filtering hide widgets stacked above and or below selected widgets using the two buttons available in toolbar
209. imerID Weil guration 000 var myTimer page setTimeout innerChangeWidth duration clearTimeout void clearTimeout timerID It stops and clear the timeout timer with the given timer Parameters ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 269 timerID The timer to be cleared and stopped var d ration 300 0 var myTimer page setTimeout innerChangeWidth duration do something page clearTimeout myTimer setinterval number setInterval functionName interval lt starts a timer that executes the given function at the given interval Parameters functionName A string containing the name of function to call interval The interval in milliseconds Return value It returns a number corresponding to the timerID var interval 3000 var myTimer page setInterval innerChangeWidth interval clearInterval void clearInterval timerID lt stops and clears the interval timer with the given timer Parameters timerID The timer to be cleared and stopped var interval 3000 var myTimer page setInterval innerChangeWidth interval do something page clearInterval myTimer clearAllTimeouts void clearAllTimeouts It clears all the timers started Pagene beget ine emiEe ja 34 3 3 Group A group is a basic logical element that is associated with a set of logical tags It provides an interface to enable the uniform operation on a set of logically connected tags
210. ing has be suspended Vel Stablice Pro C sol Mims we Eley CLO Ge Sere ele eke ise Ss e E Ss 5 Sie EE printGfxJobQueueSize project printGfixJobQueuesize Returns the number of graphic reports in queue for printing var gfxqueuesize project printGfxJobQueuesize project setTag printGfxJobQueuesSize gfxqueuesize printTextJobQueueSize project printTextJobQueueSsize Returns the number of text reports in queue for printing var textjobqueuesize project printTextJobQueuesize ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 2 7 project setTag printTextJobQueueSize textjobqueuesize printCurrentJob project printCurrentJob Returns a string representing current job being printed yar curr ntlo Pro ect PrimeCurrentuob PEG Scr Serlag OrineCurrentwIoo eurrent ob printActualRAMUsage project printActualRAMUsage Returns an estimate of RAM usage for printing queues var myVar project printActualRAMUSsage alert ectual ram usage Is Eoman printRAMQuota project printRAMQuota Returns the maximum allowed RAM usage for printing queues var ramgquota project printRAMQuota project setlag print RAMOuota ramquota printActualDiskUsage project printActualDiskUsage Returns the spool folder disk usage for PDF printouts var myVarl project printActualDiskUsage alert W actualwdisk usage 15 P myvarl printDiskQuota project printDiskQuota Returns the maximum allowed s
211. ing tag to the Ul based properties of the widget e ColorPalette XForm works only with selected widgets including Buttons Images Bar Graphs ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 292 e Ticks Labels and Scale widgets are not supported However if you set static optimization to static on ticks labels and scale widgets they may be available under certain conditions e Widget properties with Attach to dynamic behaviour may not work for all properties supported by HMWIN Studio e Dialog pages support only modal dialogs e Dialog pages do not support runtime positioning and are not movable e Round Bar Button widget is not supported e User management features of widgets are not supported e onDataUpdate event on Page Template Page Dialog Pages is not supported 35 6 2 Actions HM4Web currently supports the following HMWIN Studio actions e HomePage e LoadPage e NextPage e PrevPage e LastVisitedPage e WriteTag e Steolag e SetBit e ResetBit e ToggleBit e ShowDialog e CloseDialog 35 6 3 Tag Attachment HM4Web supports Tag attachments on some selected widget properties However HM4Web does not support tag attachment to properties that change the range of a widget For example a tag attached to the min or max property of a Slider or Bar Graph is not supported 35 6 4 XForms HM4Web supports the following XForm options e Scaling e Offset e ColorPalette e Bitlndex ACGMO195V1iEN HMWIN Studio Us
212. ion is set to true the buffer will be directly dumped to the specified location as a CSV file If it is set as false then the dump of the trend file will be in binary format an external tool is then required to convert it to a CSV format DateTimePrefixFileName When this option is enabled the dumped file will have the Date and Time as prefix to the name of the file For example if we are making a Dump at 10 10AM on 1 1 2012 then the file name will look like D2012 01 01 110 10 alarmBuffer1 csv DYear_Month_day_THour_Minute_Filename This helps to know the Time at which the Dump was made and also to identify which one is the latest NOTE This option is only supported when exporting to CSV directly timeSpec This option defines the time format used when dumping the event archive to file e Local the time values exported are the time of the HMI device e Global the time values exported are in the Coordinated Universal Time UTC format Example e Local 2012 10 11105 13 43 724 07 00 e Global 2012 10 11112 13 43 724Z When exporting Event buffers in binary format assuming the DumpConfigFile option is set to true recommended settings the result of the dump action execution is 2 folders one is called data and it contains the data files the second one is called config and it does contain the configuration files needed by the tool to recover the complete information for proper conversion to CSV Once the two folders are copied
213. isabled Changing value of A HMI and HMWIN Client will show page requested Example 2 Force page change from PLC to HMI and HMWIN Client Read current page loaded on HMI PageRequest attached to Tag A CurrentPage attached to a Tag B as Read Write SyncOptions Local Changing value of A HMI and HMWIN Client will show page requested On B will be written page currently showed by HMI Example 3 Force page change from PLC to HMI and HMWIN Client Read current page loaded on HMWIN Client PageRequest attached to Tag A CurrentPage attached to a Tag B as Read Write SyncOptions Remote Changing value of A HMI and HMWIN Client will show page requested On B will be written page currently showed by HMWIN Client Example 4 Force page change from PLC to HMI and HMWIN Client HMWIN Client page Synchronization with HMI not vice versa PageRequest attached to a Tag A as Read Write CurrentPage attached to the same Tag A as per PageRequest SyncOptions Local ACGMO0195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 68 Changing value of A HMI and HMWIN Client will show page requested Changing page on HMI same page will be forced on HMWIN Client Example 5 Force page change from PLC to HMI and HMWIN Client HMI page Synchronization with HMWIN Client not vice versa PageRequest attached to a Tag A as Read Write CurrentPage attached to the same Tag A as per PageRequest syncOptions Remote Changing value of A HMI and HMW
214. ivation of HMI Panel Software MOdules ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 301 37 1 Activate PAINE oot itesssar6aceantd nun adtiawuie bd Ave SaeeaaedetdaveiesGheacausaieiisesatseasduadimalessivonlues 301 37 2 Save LICENSE aiokaan 2 ew stone Sea aaa sor ouadbodesecdeubs be eaa AEA 302 37 3 WMPOMMIGENSC stiasscatswectebsGvavdnnie wierd mindeoaksawedvediverdadas waded tiesesabieus lel iwalteass owes 304 38 Updating System Components in HMI Panels cccccceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeaeess 305 38 1 List of Upgradable Components cccccsseeecceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeas 305 38 2 Update of System Components from HMWIN Studio ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 306 38 3 Update of the System Components via USB Flash Drive eee 308 39 Access Protection to HMI DEVICES atissaire iini aaa aaa aiia 309 39 1 Fons amp Firewalle a AA E ARAA 310 40 Factory ReSlolG oraaa a a i nenaahreatannetuaiuihes 312 41 Tips and tricks to improve performance cccccccsesseceeceeeeseeeeecaeeeeeeeseaaeeeesseeageeeeeseas 313 ANAS Stac OP UMMZ AU ON aes E a a A even ee ee 313 41 1 1 Best practices for Max PerfOrMAaNnCe cceecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseseeneeeeeeeas 314 Alcl2 FAQ Static optimization nen towed eet ee a a Scene 316 AlS Templates aena a a a a ite tact aa Ne 316 Ale Page CACINING ecen a a a iets ldeliaa 316 AV made DB ies ics eetae onc a a a a a a ian Me 316 41 3
215. ize of spool folder for PDF printouts var dicskguoto prolec i printDiskOue ta Prol cte eag print Die kouota t di Sskguotal printSpoolFolder project printSpoolFolder Returns current spool folder path for PDF printouts Val spoolfolder Provect priIntopoollPolder PEOVJSecCE Setlag printSooolFolder socoltelder printPercentage project printPercentage ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 2 8 Returns current job completion percentage meaningful only for multipage graphic reports var percentage project printPercentage project setTag printPercentage percentage 34 3 5 State Class for holding state of a variable acquired from the controlled environment Beside value itself it contains the timestamp indicating when the value is collected together with flags marking quality of the value Follow the list of methods for State object getQualityBits number getQualityBits Returns an integer a combination of bits indicating tag value quality Return value A number containing the quality bits var state new State var value project getTag Tagl state 0 var gbits state getQualityBits getTimestamp number getTimestamp Returns time the value was sampled Return value A number containing the timestamp for example 1315570524492 Remarks Date is a native JavaScript data type var state new State var Voluc project gerlag Tagl stare 0 var
216. klight on so switch display on 1 n set a timeout for switch off backlight so work like a screensaver timer Returns the free space left in the device internal flash List of system fonts The variable is a read only string Returns a value informing the operation status of the runtime Possible values are Booting Configuration mode Operating mode Restart Shutdown Ole ee I Returns the total time in hours in which the system has been powered since production of the unit It is a read only variable Touch Buzzer allows enable disable the touch audible feedback It can have values 0 disabled or 1 enabled Starting from BSP 1 66 6 ARM 2 73 1 MIPS buzzer control has been extended as below Buzzer Setup replace Touch Buzzer System Variable 0 disabled no buzzer sound under any condition 1 enabled buzzer sounds as audible on any touchscreen event 2 buzzer status controlled by System Variable Buzzer Control Buzzer Control 0 Buzzer off 1 Buzzer on 2 Buzzer blink on and off times programmed by System Variables Buzzer On and Off Buzzer Off Time duration in milliseconds of off time when blink has been selected minimum value 100 maximum value 5000 default value 1000 HMWIN Studio User Manual 73 Buzzer On Time duration in milliseconds of on time when blink has been selected minimum value 100 maximum value 5000 default value 1000 8 5Dump Information Variables return informati
217. le at fila Amanas 4 mn Takes effect after you restart Internet Explorer Reset custom settings 127 a Le x Security Settings Trusted Zone Select a zone to view or change security settings tod i J Disable Internet Localintranet Trusted sites Restricted _ Enable sites Run ActiveX controls and plug ins Trusted sites Administrator approved This zone contains websites that you a trust not to damage your computer or a your files Prompt You have websites in this zone Script ActiveX controls marked safe for scripting W ima ie IOE ii y sF t aN l ri r 3 eo 3 F Security level for this zone a ae a A i Custom l Downloads Custom settings e Automatic prompting for file downloads To change the settings dick Custom level g sAN To use the recommended settings dick Default level F Ei sbi ne n at File daamlasd 4 TT E Enable Protected Mode requires restarting Internet Explorer i Se ae hn t Explorer Reset custom settings Reset all zones to default level Reset to Medium default Bikes x id Figure 125 12 5Install Active X in Internet Explorer In Internet Explorer allow the installation of the ActiveX component when the question pops up in your browser CE tp 192 168 5 12 HMIClientAX htm E eE E E ir Favorites d E Scarica altri add on E http 192 168 5 123 HMIClientAX html Ei gab Page
218. les from a set of data The data is displayed as a collection of points each having the value of one variable determining the position on the horizontal axis and the value of the other variable determining the position on the vertical axis Scatter Diagram 100 fis 50 25 Figure 166 In Scatter Diagram a linear interpolation of points is done To create a new Scatter Diagram you have to proceed as follows Add Scatter Diagram widget into the page Select the number of curves Graph1 Graph5 to show Customize the general graph properties as for Trends like X Min X Max Grid details Define the max number of samples values to consider Max Samples for each curve This parameter set the max number of values to show in the graph starting from first element in the array Ex Tag1 20 and Max Samples 10 will show just first 10 elements of the Tag1 array e Define for each curve the two Tags of type Array to show X Tag and Y Tag When the array tags change is possible to force a refresh using the dedicated macro RefreshTrend NOTE The ScatterDiagram is considered as a different type of Trend Widget However only the RefreshTrend macro is supported for it ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 160 18 Data Transfers The Data Transfer feature allows the transfer of variable data from one device to another Using this feature an HMI panel can operate as a gateway between two devices even if they do not use the same communi
219. login credentials if the browser has been inactive for several minutes If no activity has occurred for 10 minutes the login screen will reappear and you need to enter your login credentials to continue operation This feature has been provided as a safety measure so that unauthorized users cannot operate if the remote device is not being actively used 35 5 3 User Session Termination A user session termination completion can come either from the server or based on the actions by the user At times the server may send a response to the client browser to perform the login process In such a case the user will be redirected to the login page The user will be redirected back to the last page they were in If the user clears the browser cache or browser cookies the server will ask for user login After a successful login user will be redirected back to the project page that was active before NOTE fthe user is in a dialog page during a page redirection to the login page then after the successful login the user will be redirect back to the page from which the user had opened the dialog page 35 5 4 Non Active HM4Web Project You can be in a situation in which you have a HM4Web page in your browser which comes from a project that is no longer active in the panel ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 291 In such a case you will get a confirmation box through which you can redirect to the active project if you wish You can choose whet
220. m F18916W MJPEG http ip_address videostream cgi HTTP http ip address snapshot cgi 31 7PTZ Controls A pan tilt zoom camera PTZ camera is a camera that is capable of remote directional and zoom control PTZ is an abbreviation for pan tilt and zoom and reflects the movement options of the camera Widget PTZ Controls use action MovelPCamera to send HT TP cgi commands to the PTZ IPCamera Following parameters ara available Camera URL URL of IPCamera Ex http 192 168 10 123 User Name Useful when IPCamera device is protected by a username amp password Password Useful when IPCamera device is protected by a username amp password Command Command to send to PTZ controller Ex decoder_control cgi command 0 The supported authentication methods are Basic NTLM version 1 Digest MD5 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 242 No settings are required to select the method as it comes as an automatic selection from the camera web server to which the widget connects 31 8 Multistate Image Widget Multistate Image is a widget designed to show an image from a collection based on the value of a tag used as Index This widget may be used also for simple animations w Properties a x Scale To Ft true Animate Events ti gt nnn M U tistatelm age Se a m a Figure 274 Follow the list of parameters of Multistatelmage widget Value Index of Image to show in Widget By attaching this property to a t
221. mM Figure 108 DateTimePrefixFileName When this option is enabled the dumped file will have the Date and Time as prefix of the filename For example if we are making a Dump at 10 10AM on 1 1 2012 then the file name will look like D2012 01_01_ 110 10 recipe1 csv DYear_Month_day_THour_Minute_Filename This helps to know the Time at which the Dump was executed and also to identify which one is the latest TimeSpec define time format Local for HMI time and Global for UTC time 9 11 8 RestoreRecipeData The RestoreRecipeData macro allows you to restore the Recipe data previously saved In Macro Properties provide the file full path of the Recipe files Recipes to restore can be in any external storage like USB SD or network paths NOTE The external drives plugged on the USB port of the panel must have format FAT or FAT32 NTFS format is not supported ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 111 Action List S A w W RestoreRecipeD atal Action Properties RestoreRecipeData WriteCurentRecipeS RecipeNam Down LoadCurRecipe Figure 109 9 12 User Management Actions User Management Actions macros have been designed for user management and security settings in Runtime 9 12 1 LogOut The LogOut macro allows you to log off the current user in Runtime After executing the LogOut macro the HMI behavior depends on whether a Default user is configured in the project or not If there is a De
222. me Click Next to go to the panel selection dialog Project Wizard MM HMiT rgeti Panel size 430 x 272 HMI Target Panel type UN31_SDK ARMV41 HM Targets HMI Target4 HMI TargetS HM Target l I ll 272 Portrait Figure 18 The panel selection is shown in the figure above Here you can scroll through a list of available HMI models to select the model you are working with For each model two radio buttons are available to select the orientation landscape default or portrait In portrait mode the device is rotated 90 clockwise ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 22 Some software features are not rotated when portrait mode has been selected A list of these features is shown in the table below WCE dialogs all dialogs related to System Settings System Dialogs ex System Mode ContextMenu and related dialogs Project Manager About Settings Logging Backup Analog Video Input IPCamera MediaPlayer JavaScript Alert and Print function Dialog pages Title of dialog pages Scheduler Dialogs for data entry do not support portrait Macro ShowMessage LunchApplication LunchBrowser ee PDF Reader VNC applications Click Finish to complete the Wizard Once the HMI model is chosen you can convert the project to any other model using the project properties portion of the screen as shown below This will not resize all widgets in the project to the correct size to fit a smaller
223. memory space hence making it possible to download the current project By pressing Cancel the dialog will close and the download operation is aborted NOTE The automatic check for available space for project download is a feature present from HMWIN Studio and runtime version 1 80 5 2 Update Package Both Runtime and project can be installed or updated using an update package via USB To create an update package proceed as follows 1 From the Run menu in the top toolbar select Update package 2 Select the target and components you need to update 3 Specify the output directory for update package example USB flash drive 4 Click Create to generate package ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 45 5 Assuming you have stored the package in the root folder of a USB drive remove the drive from the PC plug it into the HMI activate the context menu by holding your finger for a few seconds on the screen see also Basic Unit Settings and select Update as shown in the figure below foom In zoom Out foom 100 Pan mode Settings Project Manager Update Backup Restore Logging Show Log at Boot Show system settings About Figure 47 6 The system will automatically check for the presence of the update package in the root of the USB drive and ask confirmation to proceed with the update according to the figure below HMI Update Wizard 1 2 OK Please wait examining system Availa
224. mended settings dick Default level C Enable Protected Mode requires restarting Internet Explorer Reset all zones to default level me Figure 123 r Internet Options Select a zone to view or change security settings a y 9 Internet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Trusted sites This zone contains websites that you trust not to damage your computer or your files You have websites in this zone Security level for this zone Custom Custom settings To change the settings dick Custom level To use the recommended settings dick Default level Enable Protected Mode requires restarting Internet Explorer Reset all zones to default level em Figure 124 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 5 Disable Enable Allow Scriptlets Disable E Enable E Prompt Automatic prompting for ActiveX controls Disable Enable Binary and script behaviors Administrator approved Disable Enable Display video and animation on a webpage that does not use Disable PA Enshle a F Takes effect after you restart Internet Explorer Reset custom settings cet iain aa Disable E Enable Run ActiveX controls and plug ins Administrator approved 5 Disable Enable Prompt Script ActiveX controls marked safe for scripting Disable Enable E Prompt l Downloads at Automatic prompting for file downloads Disable 5 Enab
225. mpled at the moment the alarm is triggered and that is the value recorded and included in the description In the Alarm description displayed by the Alarm widget the value may change because it is constantly updated but no additional values are recorded This feature is supported starting from version V1 80 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 144 15 Recipes Recipes are a feature for organizing data storage in the HMI device and include services for exchanging data with connected controller devices This data can be written to the controller and conversely the data can be read from the controller and saved back on the HMI panel This concept offers you a powerful way to extend the capabilities of the controller This is especially true for controllers that have a limited amount of memory The Recipe memory is the physical storage for the Recipes The Recipe Tag block basically identifies the current Recipe From the Recipe memory you select one Recipe data record or Recipe set and designate it current active Recipe Then you can transfer this recipe data to or from the controller Recipe tags can be displayed and edited on a page Currently the Recipe data is configured in the HMWIN Studio workspace and the user can specify default values for each element of the data records On Runtime the data can be edited this new data is saved to a new and separate data file different from the original one containing the default v
226. n Data Figure 4 To verify the status of an activation in case of problems is possible to introduce the Activation Key in the following URL https license x formation com licenses From this website is possibile also to download the license file once activated and later save it in one of the following folders based on OS e C Documents and Settings username Application Data Panasonic e C Users username AppData Roaming Panasonic NOTE Trial is not supported in virtual machines However with a valid license virtual machines are supported ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 13 1 2 4 Installing Multiple Versions of HMWIN Studio on the Same Computer You may install different instances of HMWIN Studio on the same computer Each installation has its own settings and can be uninstalled individually During the installation process you may encounter three scenarios 1 First installation of HMWIN Studio in the system The installation procedure asks for the destination folder and installs that software in the specified folder 2 System with only one instance of HMWIN Studio already installed The installer detects that one version is already available and it will ask if you want to replace the current version with the new one or if you want to install another instance 3 System with multiple instances of HMWIN Studio already installed The installer detects that one or more installations of HMWIN Studio are present
227. n and programmed in the proper action as shown in the figure below Action List Action List A W W JavaScriptAlarm1_ ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 263 Figure 292 Once the system events are configured the custom code for them can be edited from the global JavaScript editor interface which is available from the Project view double click on the project name icon as shown in the figure below ProjectView 2 function Alarm 1_OnAction me eventinfo 3 5 function Schedule 1_OnAction me eventinfo 5 E 1 Pagel Ej 2 Page Config Events Buffer 5 T Scheduler i MultiLanguage id Pagel Figure 293 34 2 3 3 onWheel void onMouseWheelClock me eventiInfo This occurs when a wheel device is moving ex Mouse wheel Parameters me The object that triggers the event eventInfo Details of the event triggered function Projectl onMouseWheelClock me eventiInfo coe e 34 3 Objects HMWIN Studio uses JavaScript objects to access the elements of the page Each object is composed of properties and methods that are used to define the operation and appearance of the page element The following objects are used to interact with elements of the HMI page The Widget class is the base class for all elements on the page including the page element This object references the current HMI page The page is the top level object of the screen A group is a basic logical eleme
228. n be associated with this Event 14 1 Alarm Configuration Editor In the Project Workspace double click on Alarms to open the Editor Then add the Alarms by clicking the button ProjectView a x E amp Projectl A fg Projecti J i Alat a Tagi Hambier biMaseAlarm 1 J ya Pages 2 Alarm Tag Alam Burter1 bitMaskAlam 3 bg My 1 Pagel H 3 Alarm3 Tag3 Alam Butter1 limit Alarm 0 300 Pde Ei Fage E lr Config pee Ek Protocols Figure 129 Name Specifies the name of the Alarm Enable A user can enable or disable the triggering of particular alarms Alarms can be enabled or disabled on Runtime as well for more information please see Chapter Enable Disable Alarms in Run time Acknowledgement ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 132 For an alarm that needs to be acknowledged by the operator when the alarm is triggered select the check box to enable the Acknowledgment If checked an operator is required to acknowledge this alarm any time it is triggered before it will be cleared from the Active alarm widget Reset This check box specific to each alarm works in conjunction with the acknowledge check box After an alarm requiring acknowledgment has been acknowledged it will be cleared from the alarm list If the Reset check box is checked the alarm will continue to be listed in the alarm list as Not Triggered Acked until the Reset button present in the alarm widget is pressed Buffer Speci
229. n errOn COn ne me OnMOUseheledse ie vemr iio jae var shape page getWidget rect2 var y posicion shape gethProperty T1 One eO DUE a NEC a e e aie 4 var image page getWidget multistatel var image3 image getProperty imageList 2 Ze ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 267 setProperty boolean setProperty propertyName value index Sets a property for the Widget Parameters propertyName A string containing the name of property to set value A string containing the value to set the property index The index of the element to set in the array Default is 0 Almost all properties that are shown in the HMWIN Studio Property view can be set by this method The index value is optional and only used for Widgets that support arrays for example a MultiState Image widget The set Property method returns a boolean value true or false to indicate if the property was set or not PNerLonm uh EOnon cl oOnMoOuse Ne ledse Me a Imi ar var gelting recul shape setProperty vy 7 129 He e chigte eerie alert Shape returned to start position IMME LCI e E eC 2 OM Seine heeisia ils Swen Iino 4 var image page getWidget multistatel var result image setProperty imageList Fract004 png 2 ee 34 3 2 Page This object references the current HMI page The page is the top level object of the screen Follow the list of Page Object Properties backgroundColor
230. n fileName SubscribelGroup Dialog page 1 jmx Dialog Page 2 jmx Figure 91 9 4 7 CloseDialog The CloseDialog macro is applicable only to Dialog pages The Close Dialog macro allows you to close the dialog page currently displayed 9 4 8 ShowMessage The ShowMessage macro allows you to display warning message popup when the macro is executed Type the message that you wish to have displayed while executing the macro 90 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 9 4 9 LaunchApplication The LaunchApplication macro allows the user to launch an external application when the macro is executed To configure the following information must be provided in order to execute the requested application App Name Name of the executable file complete with extension For example if you want to run Notepad application the argument should be notepad exe Path Application path when the target platform is Windows CE the path is flash qthmi This is the folder that you see and have access to when connecting to the panel via FTP Arguments Some applications may need arguments to be passed For example to open a pdf file specify the file name so that while launching the application the file name set in the argument is loaded on the application For example flash gthmi Manual pdf will open the document Manual pdf Single Instance This argument allows the application to start in a single instance or multiple instan
231. n properly loaded and started no communication errors 2 At least one communication protocol is reporting an error Protocol Error This variable returns an ASCII string containing a description of the Message actual communication error The communication protocol acronym is reported between square brackets to recognize the source of the error in case of multiple protocol configurations The variable is a read only string If no errors are present the string will be blank Protocol Error This variable returns the number of communication errors that occurred Count since the last time it was reset The variable is a read only integer The reset of this variable is only possible using the dedicated Action Reset Protocol Error Count 8 3 Daylight Saving Time Variables return information on the system clock and allow adjusting it from the application They contain information on the local time All the variables are read only this means that you cannot change them to update the system RIC All the variables are bytes 8 bit except for the DLS and Standard Offset that are shorts 16 bit Standard time is the solar time and other is Daylight Savings Time Standard offset Represents the offset in minutes when standard time is set with respect to GMT with respect to the picture it is 8 60 480 minutes Standard week the week in which the Standard time starts w r t the picture it is First 1 Standard Month the month in
232. nal columns are present Column H Unique identifier automatically associated by the Data Transfer to each line When you edit the csv file and you add one extra line make sure you enter a unique identifier in this column Columns l J reserved for future use 18 5Data Transfer Limitations and Recommendations Correct definition of data transfer rules is critical for the good performance of the HMI panels To guarantee reliability of operation and performance keep in mind the following rules e The OnTrigger method allows only unidirectional transfers A gt B or B gt A e The OnUpdate method allows changing the values in accordance with the direction settings only when the source value changes e HMWIN Studio is not a supervisory system Its performance depends on ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 163 number of data transfers defined in the Data Transfer editor number of data transfers eventually occurring at the same time frequency of the changes of the plc s variables that are monitored Number and size of features used in the project i e tags Alarms Trends Always test performance of operation during project development e lf inappropriately set data transfer tasks can lead to conditions where the tags involved create loops Identify and avoid such conditions e Using the OnUpdate mode of the Data Transfer you force the system to continuously read all the defined source tags to check if there are changes
233. nced E Apply default to all alarms ACGMO195V1EN HMWAIN Studio User Manual 134 Figure 131 AckBlink Make alarm row of Active alarms widget blink when an alarm is triggered Stop blink when alarm has been ack ed Blink can be used only with alarms that have the Ack flag enabled Severity A user can indicate the Severity of each alarm If multiple Alarms are triggered simultaneously the actions will be executed based on Severity settings Events These options allow you to specify conditions relating to the following matters when the Alarms events are to be logged when the Alarms Widget View is to be refreshed or updated by the system and some particular options for action execution Setting Events is described in a dedicated chapter 14 2Alarms State Machine The HMI system implements an alarm State Machine which is described by the following figure The graph includes states and transitions between them according to the selected options and desired behavior isTriggered FALSE Notifyt riggered j TRUE isTriggered FALSE isTriggered TRUE isTriggered j TRUE true isTriggered FALSE TRUE NOT_TRIGGERED ACKED disable jaGpymoupoe acknowldge amp amp raqgReset multiTrigger TRUE amp is Triggered A A isTriggered TRUE amp amp requireACK TRUE 3z 7 enable an i Bes Q alarm isTriggered FALSE amp amp F me
234. nd their order Use the icon with the symbol to add a new page to the report layout When the mouse goes over a page already configured two icons appear to allow reordering or deleting pages Double click on a page to edit the page report content using the page editor Each page is divided in three sections the header the footer and the page body In the page editor the area under editing is shown in white the others are grayed out To edit a different section just double click over the grayed out area ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 204 24 3 1 Page body The page body is the central part of the page The widget gallery accessible from the right side sliding tab is context sensitive and includes only the widgets available for the area under editing 24 3 2 Header and Footer Header and footer are respectively the top and bottom parts of the page The widget gallery accessible from the right side sliding tab is context sensitive and includes only the widgets available for the area under editing 24 3 3 The Context Widget Gallery The widget gallery which can be normally recalled from the right side sliding pane is always adapting itself to the context The available widgets are Page Number Widget Automatic page numbering Screenshot Widget Used to take a print screen of the current page HMI is showing When you drag amp drop the widget on the page it will get automatically get the page dimensions of the HMI
235. nd upgrades the back up operating system see relevant chapter for additional details checks actual version and upgrades the main operating system see relevant chapter for additional details Loads a new file for the splash screen image displayed by the unit at power up the image must be supplied in a specific format We suggest that you update the splash screen image directly from the HMWIN Studio programming software Checks the actual version of the system boot loader and upgrades the system boot loader Checks the actual version and upgrades the main FPGA file this command may not be available in all platforms and versions Checks the actual version and upgrades the back up safe copy of the FPGA file this command may not be available in all platforms and versions Checks the actual version and upgrades the system supervisor firmware used for the RTC and power supply handling Operation with the System Settings Tool is critical and when not performed correctly may cause product damages requiring service of the product Ask Technical Support for further details When executed in System Mode the System settings also provide the BSP Settings Only when recalled from the System Mode the BSP settings show an additional tab called Password as shown in the figure below Figure 309 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual Next Next Name UN31 Serial 0x000000 mm Password Protected a pat H
236. new tags to the project e Update Tags to update tags already imported previously NOTE When importing tags the period is replaced with a forward slash character This is normal and the protocol will use the correct syntax when communicating to the PLC The is a reserved character and cannot be used in a tag name NOTE The amp ampersand character cannot be used in a tag name as it can cause communication issues 3 5 Designing a Page When a project is created a page is automatically added to the project and shown in the Page Editor To add objects to a page simply drag and drop the objects from the Widget Gallery to the page To add a new page right click on the Page node from the project tree and select Insert new page A dialog box will appear asking for the name of the new page ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 31 Figure 27 3 5 1 Importing a Page A page can also be imported from another project By right clicking on the page folder in the Project View you will see an option named Import Page Please refer to the Figure below E Insert New Page Create Group Events Buffer ee Scheduler Multilanguage E Screen Saver a ia Security Gn lrerfsrni EAT Kaie 28 After selecting a page to be imported from the desired project when you click OK you get a warning message in the editor as shown in the figure below HMIStudro Imported Page has som
237. ngs slow operation to restore device factory settings Options available are Uninstall HMI removes the HMI Runtime entire gthmi folder from the unit if present at the next start the panel will behave as a brand new unit This command does not reset settings like IP brightness or RTC Clear System Settings allows you to reset the system parameters registry settings Files deleted are Flash Documents and Settings system hv Flash Documents and Settings default user hv Flash Documents and Settings default mky Flash Documents and Settings default vol Also System Mode password Is reset Clear internal Ctrl App clear current folders used by CODESYS V2 3 and CODESYS V3 internal controllers for applications e Flash QtHmi RTS APP e Flash QtHmi RTS VISU e Flash QtHmi codesys e Flash SysData codesys Clear sysdata settings clear Flash SysData folder used by tech supp only for problems related to display settings ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 298 Resize Image Area Download Configuration OS Download Main OS Download Splash Image Download Bootloader Download Main FPGA Download Safe FPGA Download System Supervisor IMPORTANT NOTE Not all targets and BSPs contain all these options Resizes the Flash portion reserved to store the splash screen image that is displayed at power up Default settings are normally ok for all units checks the actual version a
238. ns to unload de activate the current project load activate another project present on the panel memory or delete a project Please note that projects can be deleted only after they are unloaded If you click on a project name other than the active one the option Load project will first unload the running application and then automatically activate the new one ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 19 Project Manager E4 workspace Project1 UnLoad Project Load Project Delete project Figure 16 Update When activated the panel verifies first the presence of an external USB pen drive inserted in the panel USB port and later for the presence on its root folder of the update package See the Updating Runtime from USB Pen Drive chapter in this document for further information Backup Creates a backup copy of runtime and project Logging Enables you to display a trace of the system operation log it may be very useful in case there is a need to debug a problem of any nature The following figure shows a case in which the system reports a communication error the decoding of the reported information may not be immediate but you can always use the option Log to file to save the dialog context to a file that can be later provided to Technical Support for investigation The log file is called logger txt and it saved to the folder var log on the panel flash disk The file can be retrieved from the p
239. ns will be ignored and no crash report window appears Launch VNC server if available in runtime VNC server is available as a plugin for WCE target only Using this option it is possible to check the time spent for loading rendering the active page Using this option of the developer tools it is possible to check time spent for loading rendering the active page Profiling will be available from the next page load and only for the first painting of the page to the screen please note that the configuration is retained ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 62 2014 04 25 23 27 1 Feriod 052 m owerhead 47ms Page Alarms ym aT ims cpus Time parsing 457 45 Time unloading oe Time lst update Time gfx creation t OnLoad Time rendering e ImageDB cache 15 hit 0 miss 0 m cp Page Templ atePagel jm Time init tart E Time lst update 125 Time gfx creation t 459 OnLoad ImagelE cache 4 h it 0 mis s Tap tap to change position Figure 70 Profiling data can be saved to file Save timelog to file save a txt report of time spent loading project amp pages Usually is better to avoid it since it could have high and unpredictable effects on page change performance However it s useful to export amp share profiling details visualized using context menu Timelog Summary a Summary about current page and related template if any There you can see partial times
240. nt that is associated with a set of logical tags It provides an interface to enable the uniform operation on a set of logically connected tags ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 264 This object defines the project widget The project widget is used to retrieve data about the project such as tags alarms recipes schedules tags and so on There is only one widget for the project and it can be referenced through the project variable Class for holding state of a variable acquired from the controlled environment Beside value itself it contains the timestamp indicating when the value is collected together with flags marking quality of the value 34 3 1 Widget The Widget class is the base class for all elements on the page including the page element Widget is not a specific element but a JavaScript class IMPORTANT When you change the properties of widgets with JavaScript you have to set the widget Static Optimization to Dynamic otherwise changes to properties will be ignored You can find the option Static Optimization in the Advance Properties Whenever a call to getWidget fails remote debugger report following error Trying to access static optimized widget label1 Disable widget static optimization to access widget from script This error is visible also using following Var wgl Ce ame wgt page getWidget labell jenersnielay a alert I a err The following properties are common
241. ntime gt gt the tag is read from device irrespective of forceRefresh flag the tag to read with getTag is present in page so tag subscribed amp forceRefresh True gt gt the tag is read from device the tag to read with getTag is present in page so tag subscribed amp forceRefresh False gt gt the tag is read from the tags cache at UI side forceRefresh parameter is working in both sync and async with callback mode NOTE The value read from getlag when forceRefresh parameter is not set could be obsolete var state new State var value project getTag Tagl state 0 ia 7 Or MOM array tyoe tags index is not considered so Cam be left as 0 ly if value undefined do something with s var state new stare project getTag Tagl state l fnTagReady function fnTagReady tagName tagState if tagName Tagl var myValue tagState getValue setTag number setTag tagName tagValue index forceWrite Sets the given Tag in the project Name and value are in a string Parameters tagName A string of the tag name tagValue An object containing the value to write index An index if tag is array type Set 1 to pass complete array Default is 0 forceWrite A boolean value for enabling force write of tags the function will wait for the value to be written before it returns back Default is false Return value Interger value for denoting success and failure of a
242. number value that is the status 1 for success 0 for fail var group new Group var status project getGroup enginesettings group if status 1 var Value Group geulag kagi if value undefined do something with the value var g new Group var status project getGroup enginesettings g fnGroupReady function fnGroupReady groupName group varl Vall Grol Gan lag agin if val undefined do something with the value getTag object getTag tagName state index forceRefresh void getTag tagName state index callback forceRefresh lt returns the tag value or the complete array if index value is 1 of the given tagName Parameters tagName A string of the tag name state The state element to be filled index An index if the tag is array type 1 returns the complete array Default is 0 callback Function name if an asynchronous read is required Default forceRefresh Optional parameter false as default that force runtime to read tag value directly from device and not from cache Return value Tags value is returned If tag is array type and index 1 then the complete array is returned Remarks For non array tags provide index as 0 Follow some additional details related to the use of get7ag function with forceHefresh parameter If ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 273 the tag to read with getTag is not in page so not subscribed by the ru
243. oad the play list mediawgt e Property mediali t T Stora ae Card demouo raw So orage Card videom avi eee he loop yen maol oop eao p one e oop aaa raadon mediaWgt setProperty loopstyle 2 J Stare a a Ene iliesic iil mediawgt mediapath a Se magen cacy Come 3 avi For a complete reference about JavaScript refer to chapter Working with JavaScript ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 240 31 61PCamera Widget An IPCamera widget is available in Widget Gallery Using this widget is possible to show images captured from an PCamera or show a video stream Figure 273 Follow the list of main parameters available for IPCamera widget Camera URL URL of the IPCamera when used in JPEG format Refresh Rate Number of JPEG images for second allowed The max frame rate is 1fps User Name Useful when IPCamera device is protected by a username amp password Password Useful when IPCamera device is protected by a username amp password MJPEG Camera URL IPCamera widget can be used also with streaming HTTP MJPEG In this case parameters Camera URL and Refresh Rate are ignored MJPEG Camera URL is the URL of MJPEG streaming Ex http 192 168 0 1 video cgi The only supported protocol is HTTP For showing single frames the only supported format is JPEG while for streaming the only supported format is Motion JPEG Performance of streaming is not fixed and depends on many factors like Frame size Frame
244. oaded at the same time To perform the download click on the Run gt Download To Target menu item You can also initiate the download process by clicking the Download To Target button in the HMWIN Studio toolbar After the download process is complete the Download dialog box will be removed and the HMI project will be automatically started on the HMI panel The HM4Web project is now ready to be used ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 288 35 4 1 Running HM4Web from a Browser After the successful download of the project to your panel and the panel is running your HM4Web pages are ready for access through a web browser from any device of your choice To run the project open the browser and type in the IP address of your HMI panel You will see the HM4Web Login page Firefox o UserName Password sign In Figure 304 Enter User Name and Password and click on Sign In The User Name and Password are the credentials that you have defined in your project using the User Management features lf the correct credentials are entered you will be redirected to the home page that you have selected during the page export An example of the home page is shown in the figure below ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 289 Mozilla Firefox File Modifica Visualizza Cronologia Segnalibri Strumenti Aiuto P ff PLAY RELOAD SETUP IN CYL 56 FINISH STOP Figure 305 You can interact with the p
245. of 2000 milliseconds The actual period time and the overhead required to collect and visualize statistics are displayed as well The more the actual period time is far from the nominal 2000 milliseconds the more the system is busy Cou consumption of threads of is listed reporting the name of the thread if available main thread is marked with a the thread ID the thread priority and cpu time spent during the 2sec period divided in user and kernel time Show information about CPU load In particular the free system RAM is shown along with the difference of memory usage from previous iteration a negative value means free memory is decreasing Show information about the size of event queues Many core components of the HMI are event driven For each event queue the actual size of the queue the maximum achieved size of the queue the total number of events processed and the last and maximum times required to process events are shown respectively timing statistics are only available for non Ul queues Show information about time spent for loading active page See 7 3 1 for more details Allows to embed in runtime the scene or leave the developer tool window as a standalone window dialog Reset information collected related to event queues Disable the watchdog and avoid system restart in case of freeze or crash of services Usually when an exception is captured the crash report panel is shown By setting this option exceptio
246. ogin Figure 206 Force Remote Login when enabled blocks all access from the web to the workspace folder in runtime The only files folders still accessible when this flag is enabled are by default e PUBLIC folder and Index html that contain web console and public resources e ActiveX files hmiclientax html hmiax cab Please check Security gt UserGroups gt Authorization Settings gt HTTP tab for more details related to HTTP access limits or chapter HTTP Authorizations ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 197 23 Audit Trails HMWIN Studio supports Audit Trail functionality which provides basic process tracking and user identification linked to events with a time and date stamp The logged users and events allow for a review and or report of your production processes The Audit Trail function provides flexible tailor made and easy to review event logs The Audit Trail or audit log is a chronological sequence of audit records each containing information on the actions executed and the user that did them The Audit Trail can be enabled with or without user management So it can access and supervise all actions from all users and a normal user could not stop or change this 23 1 Enable or Disable the Audit Trail In the Project View pane right click on the Audit Trail and click either enable or disable the Audit Trail recording on Runtime The padlock symbol in the tree informs you that in the project the Audit Trail is
247. on about the status of the copy process to external drives USB or SD Card for trend and archive buffers Dump Trend Returns value 1 during the copy process of the trend buffers If the copy Status duration time is less than one second the system variable does not change its value Dump Archive Returns value 1 during the copy process of the archive buffers If the Status copy duration time is less than one second the system variable does not change its value 8 6 Keypad Variables return information about the status of the keypads Is keypad open Returns value 1 if a keypad is open 0 if no keypads are open 8 7 Network Variables allow you to show network device parameters The network system variables are all strings in Read Only Gateway Gateway address of the main Ethernet interface of device IP Address IP address of the main Ethernet interface of device Mac ID MAC ID of the main Ethernet interface of device Subnet Mask Subnet Mask of the main Ethernet interface of device 8 8PLC Variables return informations about the status of CODESYS 2 3 integrated in HMI panels PLC Status Status of Integrated Codesys 2 3 0 RUN 1 STOP 2 RELOAD FROM FILE 3 RESET WARM 4 RESET COLD ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 14 Get CopyCodesysProje ct Action Status 8 9 Printing 5 RESET HARD This is a read only system variable Status of CopyCodesysProject Action related to intergated Codesys 2 3 0 ACTION NOT CALLED
248. on the system will present a registration form where you can enter license activation keys Message shown after trial has expired and no valid licenses are found is Invalid license license not found To register software before trial period expires goto Help gt Register NOTE The registration process requires an Internet connection Ports TCP 80 and 443 are used for activation ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 12 When HMWIN Studio performs the registration a license file is downloaded from the License Server to the PC License files are saved in following folders depending on OS e C Documents and Settings username Application Data Panasonic e C Users username AppData Roaming Panasonic Licenses are locked to the BIOS ID or to the Windows product ID of the PC where HMWIN Studio is installed If HMWIN Studio is not able to reach the server for example because no Internet connection is available a new button appears it can be used to activate the license via email This mail can also be shared with technical support for assistance W Send an Email Please Send an Email as below license s Formation com Subject Request License For HMIStudic ACTIVATION KEY HOSTID BIOS VMyware S64db69cae955fbF Seatdsd7Geadd6esS A license will be emailed to vou after verifying the activation code is valid and registering the product Please place the license file in the Folder C Documents and Settings admin 4pplicatio
249. on xml file located in the HMWIN Studio studio config folder For example the information for the city of Verona is shown below lt file cty Verona lattude 45 44 longitude 10 99 utc 1 gt After entering the location information the software displays the city name in the Location combo list and you can see the sunrise and sunset time on the dialog as in the figure below ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 182 schedulel Properties Offset Calculated System Times GMT 1 SunRise Time 04 32 55 Sunset Time 20 06 06 Figure 189 Condition The Condition combo allows you to select a Boolean Tag Yes No to be evaluated before activating the specified actions at the moment the timer is triggered If Tag True actions will be executed and if Tag False the actions will not be executed By default there is none gt the actions are executed when the timer is triggered NOTE The condition combo will list only the Tag attached to the Boolean data type Actions From the Action List dialog you can add as many Actions as desired The Actions will automatically be executed when the Schedule time occurs Action List Action List A W W ToggleBit Project_Taghgr i BitIndex jo o Figure 190 ACGMO195V1EN HMWAIN Studio User Manual 183 NOTE The Actions should be programmed in the Studio Actions cannot be modified
250. once Please select the files to export and the start page for each type Phone Page Name a a S gt ee amp gt a a S E gt a a K a a K a a K Figure 300 HM4Web supports 3 platforms Web Phone and Tablet The Web platform is intended for desktop web browsers the Tablet platform is intended for tablet devices and the Phone platform is intended for smart phone devices By providing multiple platforms users can create different pages for different platforms and provide different pages designed for different screen sizes For example you may want to create a set of ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 285 smaller pages e g pages the size of a mobile phone screen in your project for phones whereas you will use full size pages for desktop web browsers and tablets If you have created different pages for each platform the Export dialog allows you to select the pages that correspond to each platform If you have a single set of pages in your project simply click on the check boxes for each platform and the same page will be used for each platform 35 2 3 Setting Home Page The start page or home page of the HM4Web project defines the first page that is shown in the browser of each platform type The home page Is important because it defines the starting point for your web application Pages that are shown after home page depend on the how the project links other pages For example if you have set of pages for a
251. ons _ Protocols o Return Ox 1000004 Enable Inherits project actions B d l Enter i 0x1000005 Enable X Inherits project actions i Reports La Insert i 0x1000006 Enable V Inherits project actions neg AON L Delete 0x1000007 Enable VW Inherits project actions E Scheduler BIU mine od i i i sD MultiLanguage B poto P Figure 231 Each row in the Keyboard Editor corresponds to a Key For each key the following information is available tem eserition O Label The name of the key The individual enable status of the key Inherits project actions Defines whether the key is inheriting the action programmed at the project level The table shows the possible configurations ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 219 Enable Inherits project Editor appearance Runtime behavior Action lists show the page l Checked Unchecked actions or nothing if the list Only the page actions if any will be executed is empty Action lists show the project Only the configured project Checked Checked actions only and cannot be actions if any will be edited executed Inherits project actions checkbox and all action lists Nie paae or prGlecaciion Unchecked Checked are disabled Action lists 9 pag ae will be executed show the project actions only Inherits project actions checkbox and all action lists No page or project action Unchecked Unchecked are disabled Action lists aioe exzectited show the project actions
252. ool 0 temp undefined H lt varbool undefined var temp project getTag var2 project setlag var 1 temp 4 Welcome to the Qt Script debugger Debugger commands start with a period Any other input wil be evaluated by the script interpreter Tvoe helo for help qsdb gt conse o C Figure 295 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 281 For a complete reference guide about Qt Script Debugger you can open the following link in your browser NOTE For UN20 target WCE MIPS hmi panels local debugger has been disabled However remote debugger is available to debug JS from a PC connected to HMI panel via ethernet NOTE Remote debugger not supported in HMWIN Client and Activex http qt project org doc qt 4 8 qtscriptdebugger manual htm 34 7 1 Remote JavaScript Debugger Remote JS debugger can be opened directly from HMWIN Studio Run gt Start JS Remote Debugger or from icon in toolbar To start remote debugging proceed as follow 1 Download project with Allow JavaScript Remote enabled in project properties and JavaScript Debug enable in all pages where debugging is required 2 Once started runtime shows waiting for remote debugger as shown below Figure 296 3 In JS Debugger window select IP of the target and click Attach to connect debugger to the target Remote JS debugger require port 5100 TCP in the runtime side ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 282 NOTE F
253. or UN20 target WCE MIPS hmi panels local debugger has been disabled However remote debugger is available to debug JS from a PC connected to HMI panel via Ethernet NOTE Remote debugger not supported in HMWIN Client and Activex Figure 297 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 283 35 HM4Web HTML5 based Access HM4Web allows users to access HMI projects from a remote web browser running on a computer or on a mobile device like a tablet or a phone With HM4Web users can create a web project tot show at a remote location the same graphical display shown on the HMI panel HM4Web projects are based on HTML5 technology which means that no plug ins or external software is needed for displaying the information This document assumes that you have a basic understanding of how to operate the web browser on your mobile devices as well as how to set up a connection to the HMI panel where the server is running For example you may need to set up Wi Fi access if you are working with tablet or phone devices to access the HM4Web pages on the HMI panel 35 1 Supported Browsers Platforms 35 1 1 PC HM4Web works with all modern web browsers The following browsers have been tested for compatibility with HM4Web Mozilla Firefox 3 6 Microsoft Internet Explorer 9 Apple Safari 5 Google Chrome 6 mozilla Firefox Figure 298 35 1 2 Tablets Phones HM4Web works with most tablet and phone devices The following tablets have been tested
254. or larger screen it will simply change the model type and give a warning if some objects will be lost during the conversion Properties a x amp Gf amp Full Path enn nnn Context Menu on delay Image DB Enable true Peers a Home Page Pageljmx i ttt S tt eae aaa maaaes eee DisplayMode landscape t t S ee PageRequest c CurrentPage Figure 19 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 23 3 2 The Workspace The HMWIN Studio workspace is divided into following main areas Project View Presents the elements of theprojec in the form of a hierarchical Project Tree Object View Lists the Widgets with the corresponding ID s used in the page Working Area Main working space where editors create the HMI pages The current page or pages opened in the Editor View are indicated by a tab at the top of the center area You can quickly switch between the different pages in the Editor View by clicking on the desired tab Properties Properties for the selected object widgets Widget Gallery Large library of symbols and graphic objects Properties Tx yp 4 P amp With 0 Height 460 Bkod Color 255 255 255 T mpht mone 3 Events Project ia Pregectl ya Pages E 1 Pagel yo Config El Protecals po DialegPaqes po Page Templates Project Tree Ready Figure 20 The workspace layout can be freely changed at any time any change is saved
255. ord Group Comments flags like password must contain numbers password must contain special character user must change his initial password enable logoff time and Inactivity Logoff Time After executing the macro a User Edit form will pop up as shown in the figure below ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 117 User name user Password user Group Comments Password must contain number Password must contain special character User must change his initial password Enable logoff time Inactivity logoff time Figure 116 9 12 7 DeleteUMDynamicFile The DeleteUMDynamicFile macro allows you to delete the dynamic user management file This means that the users created edited or deleted in Runtime will be erased and the server will restore the settings from the project originally downloaded from HMWIN Studio No Macro Properties are required 9 12 8 ExportUsers The ExportUsers macro allows exporting user details to an xml file usermgnt_user xml User details will be in encrypted form In the Macro Properties the destination folder path must be set to the location where the usermgnt_user xml file is saved If using a USB drive plugged in to the USB port the path will be USBMemory followed by the specified folder in the memory or left empty for root folder NOTE The external drives plugged in the USB port of the panel must have format FAT or FAT32 NTFS format is not suppor
256. ould block machine and make it not more usable for HW FW compatibility problems Downgrade operations are not allowed and reserved to tech support only 38 1 List of Upgradable Components The HMI panels support the upgrade of the following components System Supervisor Firmware of the system supervisor controller sample file name packaged_GekkoZigBee_v4 13 bin IMPORTANT The System Supervisor Component can be upgraded only if the actual version on the panel is V4 13 or above Version V4 08 V4 09 V4 10 and V4 11 MUST NOT be updated they do not support automatic update from System Settings Main FPGA FPGA firmware sample file name h146xaf02r06 bin Safe FPGA back up copy of the Main FPGA that ensures unit booting in case of main FPGA corruption may be after failed update Sample file name h146xaf02r06 bin NOTE When updating FPGA firmware on the panel the same file must be used for Main and Safe FPGA components Bootloader Loader to handle panel start up sample file name redboot_UN20HS010025 bin Main OS Main Operating System sample file name mainos_UN20HS0160M0237 bin Configuration OS Back up operating system that ensures units are recovering in case of main operating system corruption may be after a failed update sample file name configos_ UN20HS0160C0237 bin ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 305 38 2 Update of System Components from HMWIN Studio HMWIN Studio provides a dialog to update system componen
257. ound Image true Consumption Meter Min oO Max 100 X Labels 7 Y Labels 11 Figure 282 In TimePeriods dialog to assign the color to the cells of the table you can select the cells and click on the related band color Another way is to enter the index value of the band 1 2 3 into the cell to color it ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 248 Configure TimePernods 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 8 9 Sunday 3 3 3 7 rere b hhh Monday vey AED ehh b bbb h Mcteeceamm 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Ea a Mice 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 fo 2 fa fa fa fo 2 fa RRR m ais A ml x BADAR i a a ma ENF ERE EEE EG saucy 8 a Se ae a W Scale 1 00 i fF 2 00 x Value 0 00 all Figure 283 The Macro ConsumptionMeterPageScroll can be used to scroll the bar graph back and forth The macro RefreshTrend is necessary to refresh the bar graph because it is not automatically refreshed All other Macro of Trends are not supported today by the consumptionMeter 31 12 Browser widget An HTML5 compatible browser widget based on the WebKit engine has been added to the widget gallery Media Yeb Controls hd em et Sees Hyper Link Figure 284 Browser widget can be used to embed web pages into hmi pages Browser widget is not supported by MIPS based panels and Activex Widget properties allow user to customize many parts of the widget like ACGMO195V1EN HM
258. owTrendCursor Trend Name JrendWindow Show Cursor true The ScrollTrendCursor macro allows the user to scroll the Trend Cursor in forward or reverse time direction The Y Cursor value will display the Trend value at the point of the cursor The scrolling percentage can be set at 1 or 10 The percentage is calculated based on the Trend window duration ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 95 Action List Action List A W W ScrollTrendCursor Scroll Percent 1 Scroll Percentage Cursor scroll length in Figure 93 9 7 14 ScrollTrendtoTime The ScrollTrendtoTime is used to scroll the Trend Window to a particular point in time When you execute this macro the Trend Window will move to the time specified in the Macro Properties Action List Action List A W W ScrollT rendT of ime ZoomOut Trend Select Tag Pause Trend Scroll TrendCursor ee ee Scroll Trend to Time Scroll Trend To time i SelectAllAlams P ee a Figure 94 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 96 This Action may be very useful when you need to scroll at a specific position in a trend window based on the time at which a certain event occurs This can be achieved by configuring an action for that alarm event that executes a Data Transfer of the system time into a Tag when selecting that tag as ScrollTrendtoTime parameter see above figure the trend windows will be centered at the time in
259. perty determines the page to be shown on the HMI and on HMWIN Client Attached Tag must contain an integer value within the range of the available project pages The attached Tag must be available at least as a Read resource CurrentPage This property represents the page number actually displayed on the HMI or on HMWIN Client or on both Attached Tag must be available at least as a Write resource and must have data type that allows containing an integer value SyncOptions value can be set as one of following options e Local if you want that CurrentPage represents the number of page actually displayed on HMI e Remote if you want that CurrentPage represents the number of page actually displayed on HMWIN Client SyncOptions This property determines the synchronization of the project pages with the value contained into the CurrentPage property e Disable CurrentPage value is ignored e Local CurrentPage value corresponds to the page displayed on HMI e Remote CurrentPage value corresponds to the page displayed on HMWIN Client e Local Remote CurrentPage is changed according to page ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 67 displayed on HMI and on HMWIN Client if different pages are displayed CurrentPage refers to the last page loaded Examples related to the use of PageRequest and CurrentPage Example 1 Force page change from PLC to HMI and HMWIN Client PageRequest attached to Tag A CurrentPage Empty SyncOptions D
260. phone you can set the start page to a page that is sized appropriately for a mobile phone display If this phone page only contains links to other phone pages the user will only see phone pages when accessing the HM4Web project from a phone To select the home page for each device click on the home icon next to the check box When the home page Is selected for a given page you will see a full color home icon next to the page check box All other home icons will be grayed Only one home page can be active for each platform An example is shown in figure The page Page1 has been set as the home page for Phone and Tablet while Page2 is the home page for desktop web browsers Dialog Please select the files to export and the start page for each type Phone Tablet Page Name E E E All Mone g E gt E Pagel Page2 K E K Paget K E K Page5 E K K Pageo K E E Pages Figure 301 35 2 4 Start HM4Web Export After selecting the pages and home page for each platform click on OK button to start the HM4Web page generation ACGMO195V1EN HMWAIN Studio User Manual 286 Once the export has been started HMWIN Studio will show a progress bar that indicates the status of each page as it is being processed If you have many pages in the project this process can take several minutes Exporting web files Exporting Fage html Figure 302 After the Export has been completed the progress
261. possible to delete or look at the imported dictionary files for the related protocol ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 30 ProjectView a x Protocol Name Modbus RTU os Project28 Data pe A Project28 3 unsigned Short H P Pages 1 HREG 400002 unsigned Short d m DialogPages 1 HREG 400003 unsigned Short S Page Templates 1 HREG 400004 unsigned Short S Mobile Pages 1 HREG 400005 unsigned Short i i _ 1 HREG 46 unsigned Short fe Config aT i Flic a 1 HREG 400007 unsigned Short fgg Security 1 HREG 400008 Se tg AuditTrail i HREG 400009 oe em Recipes 1 HREG 400010 unsigned Short Ele Dictionaries 1 HREG 400011 unsigned Short Gj Modbus RTU 1 HREG 400012 unsigned Short be all Modbus RTU 1 1 HREG 400013 unsigned Short AD Modbus RTU 2 T See E E unsigned Shor P E Modbus_TcP i HREG 400016 unsignedShort H 8 Keypads 2 HREG 400017 miei Figure 26 To import a new Dictionary proceed as follow in Tag Editor From top toolbar select interested protocol Clickon gt button to call importer Verify controller type and select format of file to import csv txt sym protocol dependent Click OK Select file to import POR ci D a As result a new dictionary file is added to the Dictionaries folder and a list of tags imported are available in the tag editor and shown at the bottom of the tag editor page Tags shown in dictionary can be imported into the project using following e Import Tags to add
262. r 18 3 Data Transfer Fields TAG A TAG B Names of the pair of tags to be mapped in order to be exchanged through the HMI panel Direction A gt B and B gt A Unidirectional transfers values are always received by one tag and sent by the other tag in the specified direction A lt gt B Bidirectional transfer values are transferred to and from both tags Update OntTrigger Data transfer occurs when the value of the tag set as the trigger changes above or Method below the values set as boundaries of a tolerance range Limits are recalculated on the previous tag value the same that triggered the update NOTE this method applies only to unidirectional transfers A gt B or B gt A OnUpdate Data transfer occurs whenever the value of the source tag changes NOTE this method applies both to unidirectional and to bidirectional transfers A gt B B gt A and A lt gt B NOTE The runtime monitor source tags the trigger tag when using OnTrigger or tags to transfer when using OnUpdate for changes in a cyclic way based on Tag Editor Rate parameter So if rate of source Tag is 500ms default system check for updates every 500ms All changes on source tag lt rate time are ignored on When checked execute data transfer on startup if quality of source tag is GOOD Startup NOTE Data transfers executed on Startup could have major impact on hmi boot time Avoid to use it where not really needed Trigger Tag values that trigger
263. r Safety Toos lig To help protect your security Internet Explorer stopped this site from installingwap cto cootre oo outer Col bere for atis Install This Add on for All Users on This Computer Check Your IE Security Settings To Alloy What s the Risk Information Bar Help F Done of Trusted sites Protected Mode Off Figure 126 In case you are using a Vista or Windows 7 operating system you need to click on Yes on User Account Control as shown in the following picture ACGMO195V1EN HMWAIN Studio User Manual 128 Program name Unknow Program Publisher Unknown File origin Download from the Internet M Show details Figure 127 12 6 Uninstalling Active X To remove the ActiveX component from your system you must delete it from the computer By default the component is installed in the following folder C Program Files Panasonic HMIClientAX 12 7 ActiveX information The ActiveX is able to show projects at a maximum pixel resolution of 1200 x 800 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 129 13 Using VNC for Remote Access VNC is a software for remote control With VNC you can see the HMI application remotely and control it with your local mouse and keyboard just like you would if you were in front of it VNC is useful for administration and technical support To be used it requires that a server is started on the HMI device a viewer is used for connecting from a remote location 13 1 VNC Server
264. r bResize project replaceMedia Images true USBMemory 1 true 9 2 Media Actions The Media Actions macros have been created to interact with the Media Player widget at Runtime ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 83 Macro Properties Media Actions PlayMedia Stop Media ReloadMedia Fause Media BrowseMedia Keyboard Actions SendKey SendKeyWidget ShowKeyPad Page Actions LoadPage Figure 83 9 2 1 PlayMedia The PlayMedia macro allows you to start playing the videos when the Media Player widget is paused or stopped You have to specify the Media Player Widget in the macro properties 9 2 2 StopMedia The StopMedia macro allows you to stop the video running in the Media Player widget You have to specify the Media Player Widget in the macro properties 9 2 3 ReloadMedia The ReloadMedia macro allows you to stop the video running in the Media Player widget and play it from the beginning You have to specify the Media Player Widget in the macro properties 9 2 4 PauseMedia The PauseMedia macro allows you to pause the video running in the Media Player widget You have to specify the Media Player Widget in the macro properties 9 2 5 BrowseMedia The BrowseMedia macro allows you to browse the HMI panel and select a video to be loaded in the Media Player widget You have to specify the Media Player Widget in the macro properties 9 3 Keyboard Actions The Keyboard macro actions in
265. r section Active Slide Interval 5 Sec Local USB A SD Preferred Path Project6 9 ScreenSaver Add Remove w Actions i Script Figure 215 To configure screen saver as slideshow proceed as follow 1 Right click on Screen Saver from the project tree and click Enable 2 Select Timeout value number of seconds before screensaver start when there s no user interaction 3 Select Slide Interval the number of seconds before switch slide 4 Select Storage Device used for reading images used by slide show Internal Storage USB or SD For internal storage Local it is possible to select and import images that later will be downloaded into the device at project download Images are downloaded into the folder workspace projectname screensaver ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 209 When an external storage is used images are located in the folder screensaver available in USB or SD devices The supported image formats are JPEG PNG When the screensaver starts stops it is possible to execute some actions macros or JavaScript functions In Tab onStart actions can be configured to execute when the screensaver start in Tab onStop actions will execute when the screensaver stops The Screen saver is supported by WCE amp Win32 runtime Is possible to use screensaver also in HMWIN Client amp ActiveX clients ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 210 26 Backup Restore Backup Restore of the
266. rail can record information about user login and user logout events These settings are available in the Misc tab of the Audit Trail ProjectView aX 1 Pagel Users Auditirail x oe Pages E 1 Pagel d Config oa El Protocols els B Tags gs Events Buffer Settings ey Scheduler i Sa MultiLanguage Audit Login Details Geepory TE PE event Buffer di UserGroups Audit Logout Details Pn 2 Users ta i Recipes al Wa Dictionaries F5 DialogPages a Wa Page Templates Ee Keypads Wi Alphabet i Numeric Figure 211 23 6 Viewing Audit Trails in Runtime The Audit Trail data cannot be displayed in Runtime It is only available in the exported data file ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 201 23 7Exporting Audit Trail as CSV File You can convert the audit data to a csv file For a detailed description look at the explanation provided for the DumpArchive macro action ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 202 24 Reports A report is a collection of information that will be printed when triggered by an event The HMWIN Studio programming software provides an editor to configure reports their content the printer and the trigger conditions The report comes as a special collection of pages with header footer and body including options for cover page When configuring reports HMWIN Studio provides access to a dedicated widget gallery featuring only the widgets available for
267. range mode is selected you just need to specify the input and output range and the system will automatically calculate the factors for the formula ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 52 Prelit value x Value Figure 57 XForms transformations are applied to the result of scale transformation Supported transformations are Color conversion Allows you to define a map between numeric values of the tag and colors to be assigned to the property This feature is used to change the color of a button for example based on the value of a tag If the tag is an integer you can have many different colors based on the tag value Bit and Byte index Allows extracting a single bit or byte content from a word depending on the specified bit or byte number Example of transformation scaling 100 10 value 5 bytelndex 0 bitIndex 1 equivalent to bitIndex bytelndex 100 10 value 5 0 1 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 53 field Lyvalue XForms Properties 4 Color Conversion Bytel ColorPaletteCustom 4 Math BitIndex By telndex ndex 0 Figure 58 6 2 Events In a HMWIN Studio application Events are the way to trigger Actions at the application level Main types of Events Events related to buttons touch Click Press Release Release Events related to external input devices like keyboards amp mouse Click Press Hold Release Wheel Events related to data changes OnDataUpdate Events relat
268. ration at Runtime 9 7 7 Zoom in Trend ZoomlinTrend macro allows you to reduce the page duration 9 7 8 ZoomOutTrend ZoomOutTrend macro allows you to make the page duration longer 9 7 9 Zoom Reset Trend ZoomResetTrend macro allows you to reset the zoom level back to the original zoom level 9 7 10 Pause Trend PauseTrend macro allows you to stop plotting the Trend curves in the Trend window When used with Real Time Trend the plotting stops when the curve reaches the right border of the graph The Trend logging operation is not stopped from the panel when this macro command is used 9 7 11 ResumeTrend ResumeTrend macro allows you to resume a Trend plotting you previously paused After executing the ResumeTrend macro the Trend window will start to plot the data to the Trend once again ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 94 9 7 12 Show Trend Cursor The ShowTrendCursor macro allows the user to Know the value of the curve at a given point on the X Axis Use this macro to activate the Trend Cursor At Runtime upon executing the macro a Vertical Line Cursor will display in the Trend Widget When the Graphic Cursor is enabled the scrolling of the Trend is stopped You can implement Scroll Cursor macros to move the Graphic Cursor over the curves or to move the entire Trend window Action List Action List P W W ShowTrendCursori Trend Actions Figure 92 9 7 13 ScrollTrendCursor Macro Properties Sh
269. rectly dumped to the specified location as a CSV file in the format specified below If it is set as False then the dump of the trend file will be in binary format the result of the dump operation is actually a couple of files one with extension dat and one with extension inf An external utility is then required to convert it to a CSV format These two files are both required by the utility to operate the conversion DateTimePrefixFileName When this Option is enabled the dumped File will have the Date and Time as Prefix to the name of the File For example if we are making a Dump at 10 10AM on 1 1 2012 then the file name will look like D2012 01_01_110 10 Trend1 csv DYear_Month_day_THour_Minute_Filename This helps to know the Time at which the Dump was executed and also to identify which one is the latest timeSpec This option defines the time format used when dumping the trend to file e Local the time values exported are the time of the HMI device e Global the time values exported are in the Coordinated Universal Time UTC format Example Local 2012 10 11105 13 43 724 07 00 Global 2012 10 11112 13 43 724Z NOTE The software tool required to convert the dump files to CSV are available in the HMWIN Studio folder called Utils under the directory where the software is installed The tool needed to convert trend buffers is called TrendBufferReader exe The TrendBufferReader exe tool can be invoked using a batch file with
270. remote clients 3 ex 1XxHM4Web 1xHMWIN Client 1x Activex 0 Size of project on disk 43 2 Compatibility Starting from the first official release of HMWIN Studio V1 00 00 we have applied the following policy for compatibility HMWIN Studio version MUST always be aligned with HMWIN Studio Runtime on the panel the user has the responsibility to update Runtime components on the Target device together with any Studio update a Runtime update can be done directly from Studio using the Update Target command available in the Run Manage Target dialog Any version of Studio newer than V1 00 00 is able to open and properly handle projects created on an older version but no older than V1 00 00 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 320 Projects created with older versions of Studio but not older than V1 00 00 opened with later versions and deployed to compatible Runtime are ensured to maintain the performance and functionality just as before Compatibility between newer versions of Runtime and those projects created and deployed with older versions of Studio is not ensured Do not edit projects with a version of HMWIN Studio older than the one used to create them It can result ina damage of the project and to runtime instability ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 321
271. riod of time you can exclude them from data polling using the Enable node macro action For example you can customize your page to contain a button and associate it to an action that will allow you to exclude and or include a specific device node as needed The following example explains how to create a button that when pressed will disable an associated device To do this 1 Ina page of your project add a button 2 Associate an event to the button for example OnMouseRelease L pagel protocols v Properties 1 X RAA Hlos w x DP 8 1 GF d Beat i oy Button a Oh ER Font Tahoma ws M oY B Z Pey Click Type momentary 5 ent TEST Sutorepeat disabled AutoRepeat Period ms 1 ee 7 z ut only 1 is connected Label Disable Node Fill Color 192 192 192 bout 80 90 sec the Show Frame false vice 1 must be good Events OnMouseclick Action OnMouseHald Action xl q i drate 19200 Manual Enable Disable oe CnMousePress Action OnMouseRelease Action Enable Node Figure 171 3 Click on the event row click the button and select Add action 4 Addthe Tag Action EnableNode to the event Tag Action gt EnableNode ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 166 5 Make sure that the Enable field is set to false Action List Action List A W W EnableNode prot Macro Script EnableNode Macro Properties Trend Actions E EnableNade RefreshT rend ScrollleftT rend Serall
272. roject using the browser in the same way you interact with a panel when touching the screen You can click on buttons to change pages view indicators and gauges drag slider handles to change values etc The HM4Web project will manage all communications with the web server while you are interacting with the HMI panel remotely 35 5HM4Web Connectivity Notes The following sections describe issues of HM4Web that may appear when connecting remotely to a HMI panel 35 5 1 Server Disconnect Since HM4Web runs remotely from the HMI panel it is possible for the server to disconnect from the browser for example if the server is stopped or the network cable is unplugged If HM4Web is disconnected a disconnect icon will appear in a toolbar on top of the HM4Web page as shown below Once the server is back online the red circle bar icon will be removed indicating normal communications with the panel ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 290 PLAY RELOAD SETUP N FINISH STOP Figure 306 Note that if the server is disconnected changes may still be made in HM4Web pages but changes will not result in any effect in the server For example if a button is pressed to change the tag value the tag value may appear changed on the client but it will not be updated in the server Once the server connection is restored the server based value will be updated in the HM4Web pages 35 5 2 Inactivity Timeout HM4Web will require you to re enter your
273. roll left and the update of the curve will continue until it again reaches the right side of the viewer At that moment a new scroll is automatically done and the process repeats NOTE Automatic refresh is an option available starting from version 1 80 History Trend 100 ma Current Time Ja 16 19 48 ho oS 16 19 00 16 20 40 16 22 20 16 24 00 Start Stop Time Time Figure 156 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 153 16 2 1 Trend Editor Historical trends require a proper configuration of trend data buffer Trends buffers are configured using the Trend Editor Trend buffers are stored in data files There is an option to store these files on the internal storage Local USB Memory SD card or custom folders based on target platform Trends x Total memory Space 3 Delete 3 3 Source Sampling Time s Storage Device Tagi 60 Local G USB So Preferred i ee l Trigger Number of Samples gt ai A i Hone 40000 x Path Data Sampling Filter Buffer Current Sample value Previous Sample value lt 0 00 save a copy when full Current Sample value Previous Sample value gt 0 00 gt Figure 157 In the Project View pane double click Trends to open the Trend Editor Then add the trend buffer by selecting the Add button on the editor By clicking near each trend buffer the corresponding buffer configuration is expanded The Total Memory Space
274. rom JavaScript The Widgets can only be accessed and changed If you need additional Widgets on the page you can add hidden Widgets on the page and show or position them from JavaScript ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 280 34 7 Debugging of JavaScript HMWIN Studio and Runtime include a JavaScript debugger to allow user to debug problems There re two types of debuggers e Runtime debugger a debugger running directly into target device HMI panel e Remote debugger a debugger running on a remote PC connected to target device via Ethernet usually PC with HMWIN Studio To enable the debugging mode in the Advanced Properties of a Page set JavaScript Debug to True as shown in the below figure Figure 294 For schedulers and alarms debugging enable JavaScript Debug in Project properties In Runtime when the events are called the script debugger will show the debug information as shown in the figure below In the box Locals you can inspect all available variables and elements E Qt Script Debugger E E Y Plm Tit Lh function fieldi_onDataUpdate me i 3 vies Name Location 4 var varbool project getTag varbool 0 field3_onDataU Pagel js 19 5 var vwari project getTag var 1 F i 6 var var2 project getTag varz tatahi ihi lt native gt 1 i if varbool 1 i vari var2 project setTag var 1 var 1 Condition a _proto_ null F 20 gt me CNumericWgt na if varb
275. rom the list of available units in the network Studio will recognize the need for transferring the runtime providing the information as shown in the following figure Download to Target 28 Target device does not have Runtime Do you want to install Runtime 7 Ready to download Install Runtime Cancel Figure 51 Just click on the Install runtime button to proceed ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 48 The process will automatically go through the required steps ending with the project download On an off the shelf unit the runtime can be installed also using an USB pen drive Prepare the Update Package according to the instructions provided in the chapter Iransferring the Project to Target and make sure to mark all the check boxes for the HMI Runtime as shown in the following figure Then plug the USB drive in the panel and click on the Transfer from disk button System settings Transfer from disk Figure 52 Then follow then the instructions on the screen NOTE The Runtime Loader on the panel does not support the automatic installation of the runtime with versions prior to 1 80 in case an older version of the runtime has to be used on a unit with the Runtime loader please contact technical support for additional information 5 4 Upload Projects You can retrieve a project from a target device using the command Upload Project A copy of the project is transferred from runtime to the comp
276. round colors etc Those widgets can be classified as e Static whose values or properties will not change at runtime images and shapes for instances e Dynamic whose values or properties will change at runtime for instance numeric fields and multistate images NOTE Based on security settings static parts of widgets could be not merged to background This happens when a widget is configured as hide in security settings IMPORTANT When you change the properties of widgets with JavaScript you have to set the widget Static Optimization to Dynamic otherwise changes to properties will be ignored When downloading or validating a project HMWIN Studio identifies those static components and render them as background images to PNG format files These background images are saved as a part of the project under the folder called opt We can have e full page background images containing all widgets that can be merged to page background e group background images containing all static widgets belonging to a group that can be merged together to form a group background for instance the Gauge group is normally composed by a background a scale a label and a needle where background scale and label can all be merged to a single background image The Static Optimization page attribute enables and disables static optimization of the whole page If it is set to FALSE the optimization is disabled at all A finer control can be achieved using t
277. s The easiest way to translate a project into multiple languages is to use the Export feature exporting all text to a file The translation can be done in that document then using the Import feature brings all text for all languages back into the project The Multi language strings will be exported in CSV file format then you can modify the strings with an external editor and import it back to the HMWIN Studio The CSV file exported by HMWIN Studio is coded in Unicode To edit it you need a specific tool that supports CSV files encoded in Unicode format To export the Multi language strings open the Multi language editor and switch to Text view Then click the Export button and save the CSV file You can then modify the exported CSV file and Import back to HMWIN Studio Click the Save button to save the text NOTE Itis recommended that you set all languages that will be used in the project before exporting the file This will guarantee that the exported file will contain all columns and language definitions for that project Page Widgetid TermplatePagel labell text TernplatePagel label2 text TemplatePagel labelS text Pagel jmx Pagel jmx Pagel jmx label3 text labeld text labelS text Pagel jmx labelO text Pagel jmx label text Ack Pagel jmx table tableCol Select Pagel jmx table tableCol Name table tableCol State Pagel jmx Figure 182 The strings are imported
278. s has to be executed Notify Log Actions Pent When entering the triggered status When entering the not triggered status Both when entering the triggered and not triggered status When the alarm is acknowledged When the alarm is reset L When the alarm is disabled When the alarm is enabled Figure 213 Only one report can be set as Active alarm report in a project An alarm report can be a Text Report or a Graphic Report A Graphic report printing can be started also using the dedicated action call PrintGraphicReport The Silent option true by default in action settings allows when set to false a dialog to pop up at runtime asking the user to adjust printer settings as shown in figure ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 207 Figure 214 ini 0 00 E O ooo E Left Right D owai oor Inchs width Height z 5 00 00 G Milimeters Landscape Portrait 24 5 Minimum requirements Report printing requires operating system BSP V1 54 or above for Windows CE devices ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 208 25 Screen saver Screen saver can be used to show a slideshow when the HMI is not in use Screen saver start when one of following events does not happen for a certain time range Timeout e Touch of display e Mouse move e External keyboard key pressed Screen saver configuration is available in HMWIN Studio in Config gt Screen Save
279. s to change the color property of a widget dynamically basing on Tag values in two ways 1 Using ColorPaletteCustom Xform 2 Connecting Color property to a String type Tag 42 1 1 Using ColorPaletteCustom Xform 1 Create a Tag internal Tag or PLC Tag that you want to refer to for the management of the color Basing on the decimal value of this tag the color will change accordingly The tag can be of any data type 2 Attach this Tag to the Fill Color property of an object ex a button Into the same dialog select now XForms tab and add a transformation by clicking on the button Select the ColorPaletteCustom transformation then click near the Palette property 4 Define now your custom palette by adding the colors that will be used for the object accordingly to the Tag value The Index column reports the decimal value while the Color column shows the corresponding color Tag Values Figure 323 42 1 2 Connecting Color property to a String type Tag 1 Create a Tag internal Tag or PLC Tag that you want to refer to for the management of the color Basing on the string content of this tag the color will change accordingly The tag must be of String type and the Arraysize property of the tag the string length must be big enough to contain the string formatted as explained in the next steps ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 318 2 Attach this Tag to the Fill Color property of an object ex button 3 Now
280. sabled if the same project is downloaded on the panel on the other hand if a different project is downloaded all disabled devices will be re enabled The same happens on package update ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 167 Tip to make this feature more dynamic you may decide not to indicate a specific NodelD but attach it to the value of a tag or to an internal variable created to identify different devices that might be installed in your network NOTE when using the action Enable Node described above to force a device node back online data polling will start immediately 19 4 Automatic Offline NodeDetection HMI panels can automatically disregard connected devices which are found to be offline When a device is found offline the first time it is polled twice before being disregarded When it is declared offline it is polled at different intervals that can be set by the user To set the offline polling on one node ID i 2 3 A p Av E Click the Config node and click Protocols Select the desired node ID Click on the Show Advanced Properties button more columns are added to the table In the table set the Offline Retry Time parameter the device on this node ID will be polled with this frequency when offline l pagel E Puc Configuration Tag Dictionary EnableDffine Algorit Jifline Retry
281. save at runtime the changes made in the Enable check boxes from the Enable column in the alarm widget ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 98 04 01 2012 12 05 00 04 01 2012 12 03 00 04 01 2012 12 05 00 Figure 97 9 9 Event Actions 9 9 1 ScrollEventsBackward Macro used by Alarm history widget to scroll events alarms backward in table view event buffer widget 9 9 2 ScrollEventsForward Macro used by Alarm history widget to scroll events alarms forward in table view event buffer widget 9 10System Actions The System Actions macro allows you to use the system properties in Runtime 9 10 1 Restart The Restart system macro allows you to restart Runtime After executing the macro the Runtime goes to configuration mode and restart ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 99 9 10 2 ControlUserLED This allows the switching ON OFF or blinking of the User LED In the action properties the LED action can be set to OFF ON or Blink Action List Action List P A Y W ControllserLED i SerollEventsForward a Macro Properties system Actions ControlUserLED Restart l LEDAction OFF Dump Trend Delete Trend Dump EventArchive DeleteEventArchive Reset Proto ErCount Sateh Remove Media Recipe Actions Down Load Recipe UpLoadRecipe Figure 98 NOTE Not all HMI models have User LED indicators Check the product documentation for further in
282. se List Data OnDataUpdate KeypadType Ne List Display Add Remove List items 233 State 1 State 2 State 3 State 4 LJ Figure 263 State 1 State 2 State 3 State 4 Figure 264 31 3 2 Selection Selection shows which status is currently selected and will appear as a highlight cursor moving up and down according to the use of the defined keys The Selection property can be attached as well to a Tag The small triangle on the left side of the list tells you what the current status is There are two write modes for the control list Write on Select and Write on Enter 31 3 3 Write on Select On Write on Select the value will automatically be written when one of the states is selected ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 234 31 3 4 Write on Enter On Write on Enter you need first to select the state and then press the enter key to write the status value to the Tag 31 3 5 Read Only The Read only property of the widget can be attached to a tag and will control whether the control list will be just an indicator or a combination of both For example with a machine in Manual mode the Control list will let the operator select which state should be active and while in Auto mode the list is an indication of the active step 31 4Variables Widget The Variables widget is available in the Advanced category under the Data Sources sub category as shown in the following figure
283. se of Bitmask to determine when to trigger the Alarm Actions Define the action s to be executed for the specific Alarm Actions are executed by default when the specified trigger condition becomes true Additional conditions can be specified in the Events configuration in the last column of the Alarm editor as explained in the chapter Action Enable ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 133 Action List Action List A W W ShowMessagel Macro Properties ShowMessage message Alarm Triggered ered Tag Actions Data Transfer system Actions Restart Enter FG Mode 3 Savelon ion a ControlUserLED Figure 130 Description This is the description of the alarm The Alarm description is normally text this text supports the multiple language features The text can be a combination between static and dynamic parts where the dynamic portion includes one or more tag values Please see the chapter Live Data in Alarm Description for further information about this feature Color Foreground and Background colors of alarm rows Active alarms widget can be applied based on the status of alarm ex Triggered Triggered Ack etc Background Foreground Foreground Background Triggered EG A 255 255 255 Triggered Not Acknowledge me A E amp 255 0 0 f Not Triggered Acknowledge A ee Not Triggered Not Acknowledge 0 0 0 B 255 255 259 Triggered Acknowledge 255 255 255 A M Adva
284. ser will be activated in the system If you want to log in as a different user in Runtime you can use either the Switch User macro or the Log Off macro The default user will automatically get logged in if any user other than default user logs off ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 193 22 6 Assigning Widget Permissions from Page View You can assign different levels of security to different user groups on a single widget directly from the project pages Select the widget then right click and select security settings from the context menu Next choose the group and assign the security properties to access the widget as shown in the figure Copy Paste Delete Group Ungroup Convert to group Custom Properties Order Align Space Size Rotate Select Covered slo Attach To admin quest E unauthorized UserGroupl UserGroup2 UserGroup3 Expand all Figure 202 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 194 Authorizations GroupWgt7 Action Permission mael NextPagi Use Base Setti gt EET ee PEE SE LoadPage Use Base Settings NextPage Use Base Settings AckAlarm aana Catin Use Base Settings Figure 203 22 Operation on Runtime After starting the Runtime if a default user is specified within the project the system will provide automatic login of that user without prompting for a user login If no default user is configured the
285. server is active it is operating according to the settings defined by the system files and by the application project The server operating mode is independent of the client side operating mode you may have a visualization running but server activity stopped 2 2 Basic Unit Settings The settings of the device are available from the Show system settings menu which is accessible from the Context Menu if the panel has the runtime already installed or by using the dedicated button on the unit when in loader mode see for this the chapter The Runtime Loader below in this document Press and hold your finger on an empty area of the screen for few seconds until the Context Menu appears as shown in the figure oom In zoom Out oom LOO Pan mode Settings Project Manager Update Backup Restore Logging Show Log at Boot Show system settings About ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 17 Figure 13 Select Show system settings to access the system settings tools System setings Info Mame HOS Network ame Date 18 08 10 HZ i HS O1 Mo aux module detected Calibrate Touch Display Settings Figure 14 The System settings tool is a rotating menu through which you can scroll using the Next and Back buttons It includes the following entries Calibrate Touch To calibrate the touch screen if needed Display settings Backlight and Brightness control Time Internal RTC settin
286. sets the Widget opacity Values are decimals from 0 to 1 where 1 is 100 opaque PMP On tis Eee TonMou eRe leane ile T var wot page getWidget rectl wgt opacity 0 5 rotation number rotation in degrees It gets or sets the rotation angle for the Widget The rotation is done by degree and makes a clockwise rotation starting at the East position Fn tren D aot 2 soOnMouseke lease ie te var wgt page getWidget rect1l wgt rotation 45 userValue string userValue It gets or sets a user defined value for the Widget This field can be used by JavaScript functions to store additional data with the Widget EUN CELON Iwas eO On NEUR Re Leavers le 4 var wgt page getWidget rect1 Vigil uUse rvalue l uU r Wi edmst Ore weUsrole Gata Every widget has some specific properties that you can access using dot notation For an up to date and detailed list of properties you can use the Qt Script Debugger inspecting the widget methods and properties The following methods are common among all widgets getProperty object getProperty propertyName index Returns a property Parameters propertyName A string containing the name of property to get index The index of the element to get from the array Default is 0 Almost all properties that are shown in the HMWIN Studio Property view can be retrieved from the getProperty method The index value is optional and only used for Widgets that support arrays P
287. ssible when range is weekly to assign different colors based on the time frame Consumption Meter 100 90 og 70 60 a0 40 30 20 10 01 01 70 01 01 70 01 01 70 01 01 70 01 01 70 01 01 70 01 01 70 Figure 281 Below you can find a description of the main properties of this widget Value this is the resource monitored by the system Graph Duration these properties determines the time period that will be represented in Graph Duration the trend window Units Bar Duration Bar these properties determines the time period represented by each bar Duration Units composing the graph ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 247 Time Periods this property allows to highlight with a minimum resolution of 1 hour the increment of the monitored resource in a determined time period by using a specific color Each bar composing the graph will then be represented using different colors each showing the increment of the monitored resource in the corresponding time period Example design a monitor for the consumption of energy with a weekly scale and a daily unit Follow these steps to configure the widget Add protocol Add Tag and link it to the physical variable to monitor total energy consumed ex KW h we can call this Tag KWh This tag contains an incremental number that summarize how many KW h has been consumed from when energy started Add a Trend and link it to the KWh Tag to monitor Add Consumption me
288. sswordS ccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeaaeaseeeeeeeeessaageeeeeeess 186 22 1 Configuring SECUFITY OPIONS reisai 187 22 2 Configuring Groups and Authorizations cccceccceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeas 187 22 3 Modifying the Access Permission of Groups sssssseessesssssssrnrrrrressrrrrrrrrresen 187 223 1 VWWIOGELIPCHMISSIONS eena a a a 188 22 3 2 ACn PCUMISSIONS enso a A 190 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 22 3 3 FTP Authorizations occ ccccccececcccsccescscccsccceasceeccvcccvsesccucucucucucucevsnseavecsccusecesscesecens 190 22 3 4 HTTP Authorizations ccccccccccsssecceseeeceseeceescecsaseeceeesseeessageessuseessueessaaees 190 22 3 5 Miscellaneous iiiitasiia seecavessvavacctundiertd sadecateawededaverdodaencde ed suedeiakeswadvediwadeaseawnans 191 22 316 ACCESS PHOMY cinese eaa E EAA 192 22 4 Configuring USCIS i eecccccccseeeceeecceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesseeeeceeessaaseeeeesseaeeeeessaeeeeeneas 193 22 5 Detault WSOR ieina to hadend obs Radsblogande A aeaa aia 193 22 6 Assigning Widget Permissions from Page ViICW ccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 194 2a Operaion on RUNING srci nates exer ess ranaleee oeeelat anemia cies 195 220 FOCE TACHIOLE LOOM 5 sas cee wsuccaih cane ananattoas a tsa iauceunanon stadia 197 23 Audit Bi cee eee eel ne en en A ee ae eee ee 198 23 1 Enable or Disable the Audit Trail cccccccccccccsssseceeeceeseeeeeseeeeseeesessaeseee
289. system variable can be used to check time remaining to unlock screen 9 5MultiLang Actions The Multi Language MultiLang actions are used to select and modify the languages used in the application 9 5 1 SetLanguage The SetLanguage macro allows you to set the current display language In Macro Properties enter in the Language At runtime while executing the macro the selected language will be applied to all applicable Widgets 9 6 Tag Actions The Tag Actions macros are used to interact with the application Tags 9 6 1 DataTransfer DataTransfer macros allow you to exchange data between two controllers between registers within a controller or from system variables to controllers and vice versa SrcTag refers to the source Tag and DestTag refers to Destination Tag The various Tag types include a Controller Tag a System Tag a Recipe Tag and Widget Property 9 6 2 ToggleBit Toggle Bit macros allow you to toggle meaning set or reset a bit of a tag The BitIndex allows you to select the bit to be inverted this requires a read modify write operation the read value is inverted and then written back to the controller tag 9 6 3 SetBit The SetBit macro allows you to set the selected bit When the macro is executed the value of the selected bit is set to 1 The BitIndex property allows you to select the bit position inside the Tag 9 6 4 ResetBit The ResetBit macro allows you to reset the selected bit Wh
290. system will ask for a User name and Password and based on the user the Runtime will allow only the configured permissions for that logged user There are specific actions for user logout edit user add user remove user and switch user Users can be edited added or removed on Runtime as explained in the chapter User Management Actions All the users information modified at Runtime is stored in a separate file thereby preventing loss of the users configurations in case of a new project download To remove dynamic files and changes applied to user s configuration during runtime there re two ways e Runtime side DeleteUMDynamicFile action e HMWIN Studio side Delete Dynamic Files flag available in download dialog ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 195 Action List A WW Figure 204 Action List A W Figure 205 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 196 22 8Force Remote Login Starting from v1 9 of HMWIN Studio a new flag is available to force user to LogIn when using remote access via Activex or HMWIN Client this is working when user management is enabled If Force Remote Login is not enable remote access will use same level of protection of local access Force Remote Login is useful in particular when a default user is configured in runtime to automatically login without having to enter a login and password at startup but a remote access protection is required lg Us Disable dey US Force Remote L
291. t width properties in a single display category called Position Description Allows you to define the description and comments within the property the information will be displayed in the property pane Advanced The properties are shown in either the Normal or Advanced mode The Advanced check box allows you to specify whether each property should appear in the advanced or in the simple property pane view mode Support Tags The Supports Tags checkbox must be marked if the property supports the Attach to attribute ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 253 Tags The Tags list box indicates the internal Tag name for the Widget This internal Tag name is typically the same as the attribute name however this is not always the case You can assign a different attribute name for your custom Widget The Tag list is also used to combine Tags If you want to combine two or more properties into one select the primary property in the Property List and click on the button above the Tags list box The Property Select dialog will be displayed and you can select the properties that should be combined Note that this dialog box only shows the properties that should be combined not all properties are shown in the Properties list For example to combine the min property of the scale Widget and Bar graph Widget click on the NeedleWgt min property and click on the BargraphWogt min property from the Property Select di
292. tailed widget times are visualized by a tooltip window on Win32 platform attached to mouse hover event on WCE press drag and release over the region of interest In case of out of the scene widgets some arrows allow to navigate to these areas and hovering on them the tooltip will show the area Summary 7 3 2 Watchdog One of the most important items in the Developer tools is related to the watchdog This item allows the developer to disable the watchdog to avoid a system restart in case of a runtime crash to have time to save the crash report or check system status information example memory available CPU load events queue size etc ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 63 Crash report dialog appears automatically in case of a system freeze or crash and allows users to save a log file of crash The crash report may contain information important for technical support HM Server error HMIServer has stopped working In thread Codesys at address Ox4lV1llcs6 access violation RAM free 140865536 7 1976736064 Bytes Figure 71 7 4 Buzzer on touch Buzzer duration Using this feature the runtime buzzes when a user presses one of the following widgets Buttons HotSpots Needles Fields External keys Combobox Tables items Control list items Using Project properties gt Buzzer duration defines the duration of the buzz when an event is fired Buzzer duration is a value in ms default is 200ms NOTE Buzzer on
293. ted Since the file is encrypted there is no way to edit the user configuration from this exported file This action is most useful for making a backup to be used for a later restore ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 118 Action List A W W ExportUsers i ranar locare ok Figure 117 9 12 9 ImportUsers The ImportUsers macro allows importing user details from an xml file named usermgnt_user xml The path of the folder where the usermgnt_user xml file is located must be specified in the Macro Properties If using a USB drive plugged into the USB port the path will be USBMemory followed by the specified folder in the memory or left empty for root folder NOTE The external drives plugged in the USB port of the panel must have format FAT or FAT32 NTFS format is not supported ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 119 Action List A W 3 ImportLsers Figure 118 9 13Print Actions Action List Action List A Y Macro Properties Figure 119 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 120 9 13 1 PrintGraphicReport The PrintGraphicReport macro allows you to print a graphic report You have to specify the report name in the combo box reportName The option silent default value is true if set to false allows you to open a dialog at runtime which asks the user to adjust printer properties 9 13 2 PrintText The PrintText macro allows you to print the string written in the
294. ted SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol that synchronizes the internal RTC panel whenever the predefined server is available The server addresses are hard coded and cannot be changed by the user The system searches for the following servers e time windows com e tock usno navy mil SNTP servers are checked at power up or once per week if the panel is not powered off NOTE Starting from WCE v1 76 ARM 2 79 MIPS is possible to customize up to two SNTP servers from System Mode MainOS accessible via Context Menu gt System Settings gt Time gt SNTP tab This setting is not available in Configuration Mode ConfigOS ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 21 3 My First Project This section describes the steps to create a simple HMWIN Studio project 3 1 Creating a New Project To create a new project click on the File gt New Project menu item The Project Wizard dialog will appear asking for a project name and a path where the corresponding project folder will be stored HMWIN Studio projects are stored in a folder that has the same name as the project This folder contains all the files of the project To move copy or backup a project you can simply move or copy the project folder and all its contents to the desired location NOTE DO NOT rename the HMWIN Studio Project folders manually If you need to rename a project use the File gt Save Project As function Depending on the size of the project this could take some ti
295. ter it in the empty edit box in the Activation keys section Once you enter a new activation key The Add Another Key button will be enabled so that you can add a new edit box and enter another activation key 6 Activate panel Once you have completed entering the activation key you can press the Activate Panel button to activate licenses on the HMI Panel Once you press the Activate Panel button e lt verifies the activation key e tcreates a license file and stores it in the folder LICENSEFOLDER HMI Licenses PANELID e t downloads the license file to the HMI Panel and activates it Once the activation is completed the enabled features or status of the activation keys will be displayed in the Feature status list box that can be seen on the right side of the Activation keys boxes NOTE After the activation is complete to enable the license in the panel you must restart it 37 2Save License Save License operation is done to create the license file now for activation later ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 302 Manage Target Runtime License fl License folder G WWsers Username Documents workspace Panel Info Activate Panel Panel ID o030D802710E7 Activation Keys OSC 3E 44445 47354 8B00C CODESYS q Add Another key Import License Save License Figure 311 1 Select the location used to backup license files From this point on the path selected will be called LICENSEFOLDER in the document
296. ter widget into a Page Attach Value property of Consumption Meter to the KWh Tag Set Graph Duration Units to 1 Week range of time considered by Widget This allow us to have a weekly graph of consumed energy Set Bar Duration Units to 1 day range of time where calculate consume of energy In Properties gt Consumption Meter you can change the number of labels to show in the bar graph ex X Labels 7 if we need a weekly graph 9 Open Time Periods to access a configuration dialog that allow the setting of different colors for different values of the Tag KWh monitored in each bar 10 Add as many color bands as you need in this example we ve added 3 color bands 11 Assign to each hour in the weekly table the related band In this example a red band E1 was used to indicate the range of time in the day week where the cost of energy is the highest 12 For each band if needed a scale factor can be assigned Oe PAA The result is a consumption meter as a bargraph that shows daily consumption of energy KW h in this example where the colors indicate the different energy cost that has been consumed The height of each bar represents the amount of energy in the range of time considered 1 day in this example Consumption Meter Value DataLink Trend3 IdalHistoDataWgtl Graph Duration 1 Graph Duration Units week Bar Duration 1 Bar Duration Units day Time periods Periods 3 Color 255 104 32 Bar Width 15 Show Backgr
297. that need to be transferred Consider to reduce the update rate of the source tags that need to be checked The default value of the update rate of each tag is 500 mSec and can be modified from the tag editor using the advanced view To use two different rates for data transfer amp Pages tags can be defined two times in tag editor one for pages and another for data transfers e Data Transfer configured using the OnTrigger mode is preferred over the OnUpdate mode because you have the possibility to force the Data Transfer based on your needs You can use the scheduler to calibrate the update rate based on the performance of your entire application Also using OnTrigger system is monitoring just trigger tag and not all tags to transfer e Using tags of type array allows server engine to optimize data transfer and reduce workload e Too many Data Transfers can introduce side effects on page change time and on boot time ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 164 19 Offline Node Management When one of the devices communicating with the HMI panel goes offline this may reduce the overall communication performance of the system The offline node management feature recognizes offline devices and removes them from communication until they come back online Additionally if you know that any of the devices included in the installation is going to be offline for a certain time you can manually disable it to maximize system performance NOTE This fe
298. the Activate Panel button to activate licenses on the HMI Panel or you can press Save License for offline license file generation So eee ea NOTE After the activation is complete to enable license in the panel you must restart it ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 304 38 Updating System Components in HMI Panels Most of the system software components can be easily upgraded by the end users this ensures a high degree of flexibility in providing updates and fixes to existing and running systems This upgrade can be done using USB flash drives loaded with the new software modules and by running the procedure described in detail in this chapter Each unit comes from the manufacturing with a product code label which includes all the information related to the factory settings in terms of hardware software and firmware components Product labeling is the first reference for checking the factory settings and version of the components installed at time of manufacturing The update tool on the HMI panel also provides the user with detailed information on the components actually running in the system NOTE Files required for upgrades depend on the product code Using the wrong files for upgrade may result in system malfunctions and may even render the system unusable NOTE Files for upgrades are distributed on demand as a technical support activity IMPORTANT The downgrade of components is a very dangerous operation that c
299. the data transfer process When this tag changes its value outside the High boundaries set as High limit and Low limit data transfer is started The range of tolerance is limit recalculated according to the specified limits on the tag value which triggered the previous Low limit update No action is taken if the change falls within the set limits This mechanism allows triggering data transfers only when there are significant variations of the reference values NOTE if both Low limit and High limit are set to 0 data transfer is triggered as soon as there is a change in the value of the trigger tag NOTE Low limit is less or equal to zero Below an example where High limit 1 9 Low limit 0 9 e points where the data transfer is triggered ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 162 Time Figure 168 18 4Exporting Data to csv Files Configuration information for data transfers exported to a csv file Example is shown in figure below A B c D z AG H COIL 1 2 COIL 1 A gt B On update 0 Ofdatal true 1 COIL 2 2 COIL 2 A gt B On update 0 Ofdata true 1 ANALOG 1 2 ANALOG 1 A lt gt B On update 0 Ofdata3 true 1 ANALOG 2 2 ANALOG 2 A gt B Ontrigger Enable Transferl 0O Ofdata4 true 1 ANALOG 3 2 ANALOG 3 B gt A Ontrigger Enable Transferl 0O Ofdata5 true 1 ANALOG 4 2 ANALOG 4 A gt B Ontrigger Enable Transfer 10 20 data6 true 1 Figure 169 Columns A through G contain the same data as in the Data Transfer editor Some additio
300. the following syntax TrendBufferReader r Trend1 Trend1 csv 1 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 101 where Trend1 is the name of the trend buffer without extension resulting from the dump original file name is trend1 dat and Trend1 csv is the name desired for the output file The resulting CSV file has 5 columns with the following meaning Data Type Value Timestamp UTC Sampling Time ms Quality Where Data Type Code that gives information about the data type of the sampled Tag according to the following codes o ew e f 4 5 Unsigned Byte e poes r pom D E Value Value of the sample Timestamp UTC Timestamp in UTC format SamplingTime ms Sampling interval time in milliseconds Quality Gives information on the tag value quality The information is coded according the OPC DA standard the information is stored in a byte data 8 bits currently defined in the form of three bit fields Quality Sub status and Limit status The 8 Quality bits are arranged as follows QQSSSSLL For a complete and detailed description of all the single fields please refer to the OPC DA official documentation Shown below are the most commonly used quality values returned by the HMI acquisition engine aes The value is bad but no specific reason is known There is some server specific problem with the configuration For example the tag in question has been deleted from the configuration file tags xml This quality ma
301. time The HMI Runtime is designed to support different platforms and different operating systems All the panels are running today on the base of the Windows CE operating system Version 6 R3 The operating system and all its options are built around the minimum set of requirements of the HMI Runtime there is no option to get direct access to the Operating system settings as all the needed components are managed via the runtime itself or via HMWIN Studio Later in this document you will find more information on how to install the HMI Runtime and how to manage the update of other system components firmware on the units but always with a dedicated interface which prevents a direct access to the operating system often a source of complexity 2 1 Runtime Modes The HMI Runtime is composed of two logic units the server and the client The client unit is the part which is responsible for the visualization process using the data collected at the server side to render it on the display as graphical information The server unit is responsible for handling the HMI services such as running the communication protocols performing data acquisition driving trend buffer sampling activities monitoring alarms and so on The server unit of the HMI Runtime can be in one of two operating modes e Configuration Mode the server is idle activity has not started for example no project is loaded on the panel or system files are missing e Operation Mode the
302. time up to v1 80 native OS based font engine and the font rendering based on FreeType All projects created with HMWIN Studio v1 90 b608 or newer use the FreeType font engine as default while all projects created with older versions of HMWIN Studio continue to use old font engine after the conversion to avoid potential backward compatibility issues in font rendering Moving to the Freel ype Font Rendering is recommended to all users to enable it set true in FreeType Font Rendering in Project Properties save and verify that all texts are shown correctly in all HMI project pages Example of rendering issues that could appear when switching between old and new font engine are e text require few more less pixels for rendering and this could change text layout e size to fit could result in change in size of widgets e better rendering using antialiasing feature not available in v1 80 Antialiasing can be disabled in v1 90 for texts it is a property of text widgets 7 10Software Plug in Modules The Software Plug in concept allows users to choose if certain software modules must be downloaded to the runtime together with the project Example of Software Plug in are WebKit module required by browser widget if available PDF Reader VNC Server Activex Not all Software Plug in modules are compatible with all targets New software plug in modules will be added in the future to extend optional features of the product Once enable
303. ting frames 0 Image Figure 278 1 Image 6 Customize widget using properties Default layer Name Default frame Color Fill Animate Time Interval Preview ACGMO195V1EN Default active layer shown at runtime when page is shown Active layer can be changed at runtime attaching it to a tag Name of selected layer current layer Default frame shown when current layer is active Active frame can be changed at runtime attaching it to a tag Fill color to use for images of current layer Fill color can be changed at runtime attaching it to a tag Enable Disable animation of frames When enabled images of active layer change like in a slideshow Animations can be start stop at runtime attaching it to a tag Time interval of slideshow ms Used just when animation is enabled Preview is working like a simulator for animations Can be used to verify animation in designing phase of widget without execute entire project HMWIN Studio User Manual 245 31 10 Combo Box Widget The Combo Box widget is available in the widget gallery and is already used by many widgets as a selector widget or as a way to filter rows shown in a table like alarms or trends based on values selected in the combo box T i Data valel sSelectioni E OnDataUpdate Action 1 en eee een Figure 279 Follow the list of parameters of Combo widget Index Each item listed in a combo has an index 0 n This field r
304. ton to start the process The system will switch the Target to Configuration mode and transfer the files When the download operation is completed the Target is automatically switched to Operation mode and the downloaded project is started Any time a project is changed the modified files needs to be transferred to the Target device When updating a Target HMWIN Studio provides the option Download only changes to transfer only the modified files to the device The figure below shows the Advanced options expanded ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 42 Download to Target Ready to download Download Close al Advanced Download only changes Delete Dynamic Files Recipe Security Users Schedulers Multilanguage Figure 42 The other option is Delete Dynamic Files There are files that can be modified in the HMI at runtime for example you can create new users at runtime or you can upload new values to the recipes If the option to delete the files is selected the edited configuration of the recipes or users or the schedulers will be deleted and overwritten by the project configuration NOTE Dynamic files are not deleted using Delete Dynamic Files if storage type is external example USB SD Cards IMPORTANT Please make sure to check carefully before selecting this option as some data can be lost Data cannot be restored after it has been deleted When transferring a project the Studio uses a com
305. touch requires WCE v1 76 ARM 2 79 MIPS and can be used as an alternative to the Touch buzzer feature available WCE side that buzz when user touch any point into the touchscreen Buzzer on touch is supported also by Win32 runtime 7 5 Keyboard Enable the use of keyboard Macros at runtime when using external keyboards 7 6 JavaScript Debug Enable the JavaScript debugger at runtime for current project NOTE For UN20 target WCE MIPS hmi panels local debugger has been disabled However remote debugger is available to debug JS from a PC connected to HMI panel via Ethernet NOTE Remote debugger not supported in HMWIN Client and Activex ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 64 7 7 Allow JS Remote Debugger Enable the JavaScript remote debugger for current project NOTE For UN20 target WCE MIPS hmi panels local debugger has been disabled However remote debugger is available to debug JS from a PC connected to HMI panel via Ethernet NOTE Remote debugger not supported in HMWIN Client and Activex 7 8Image DB enable Enabled by default this property activates an engine used by the runtime to optimize project performance Available in the Project Properties should be disabled just by tech support for debugging in case of a problem Disabling it can create performance problems at runtime 7 9 FreeType Font Rendering The FreeType Font Rendering property is used to switch between old font engine used by HMWIN Studio amp Run
306. ts state getTimestamp isQualityGood boolean isQualityGood It returns whether value contained within this State object is reliable Return value A Boolean true if quality is good false otherwise var state new State var value provece deulag Lagi state O if state isQualityGood j QO Ssomeraing ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 279 34 4Keywords Global objects are predefined and always available objects that can be referenced by the names listed below page object page lt references the page object for the current page Pune Girone ti Ell somMeuseheieaset me ea var wgt page getWidget rect1 var name wgt objectName project object project lt references the project Widget var group new Group projyect getGroup GroupName group var value Group getCount lagi 34 5Global Functions print void print message It prints a message to the HMI Logger window Parameters message A string containing the message to display Peine We Sic Me siscioe alert void alert message It displays a popup dialog with the given message The user must press the OK button in the dialog to continue with the execution of the script Parameters message A string containing the message to display NOTE The alert function is often used for debugging JavaScript routines alert Test message 34 6 Limitations Widgets cannot be instantiated f
307. ts by downloading them to the target device using the Ethernet communication interface The dialog is available in Run gt Manage Target gt Board a Manage Target Bootloader E Main OS E Config OS E Main FPGA E Safe FPGA El mon ont Type NA Unload Downoad Se Na Bootloader Destination Folder Version NA System firmware that handles File device boot up Type Version Target 127 0 0 1 Figure 314 The first step is to use the Target discovery function to locate the panel IP from the local network Click on the little arrow symbol and identify the HMI panel from the list of units recognized in the network In case the panel is not listed you can try a second time or type the IP directly in the box Then click out of the box to accept the inserted IP See the figure below ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 306 Target 192 168 8 24 HMI 192 168 5 154 HMI 192 168 2 53 HMI 192 168 5 253 HMI 192 168 5 233 HMI 192 168 5 211 HMI 192 168 2 188 Ee R ee Ne aali il a na Figure 315 NOTE Discovery service is a broadcast service When a remote connection is done via VPN or from external networks discovery is not working so type directly IP address of target to connect to it When the device is recognized the Info box shows the target details as shown as an example in the figure below Info Device Name UN2O Serial Oxffff03 D
308. ue The new value that is the value which will be updated to the widget attrName The attribute on which the event is generated index An integer attribute index if any default 0 mode W when user is writing to the widget R otherwise This event is triggered by the system before the value is passed to the Widget this means the code programmed here can modify or alter the value before it is actually passed to the Widget The code can terminate with a return true or return false After terminating the code with return false the control is returned to the calling Widget that may launch other actions After terminating the code with true the control is NOT returned to the Widget and this makes sure that no additional actions are executed following the calling event function buttonStdl onDataUpdate me eventInfo if eventInfo oldValue lt 0 do something return false 34 2 2 Page Events 34 2 2 1 onActivate void onActivate me eventInfo This event occurs each time the page is shown Parameters me The object that triggers the event eventInfo It is reserved for future enhancements This JavaScript will execute when the page is Active It means that when the page Is loaded the script will execute function Pagel onActivate me eventiInfo clo Soule cleave ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 261 34 2 2 2 onDeactivate void onDeactivate me eventinfo This occurs when leaving t
309. uler can be set in milliseconds To configure the HighResolution scheduler select HighResolution from the Type column and set the desired duration from the schedule column HMI Scheduler MiliSec 100 Cancel Figure 187 NOTE The HighResolution scheduler cannot be changed during Runtime If the user needs to change the schedule Runtime then the Recurrence scheduler should be used by selecting Every which is described in the following chapters The minimum time resolution when using a Recurrence scheduler in Every mode is one second ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 180 21 3Recurrence Scheduler The Recurrence Schedulers can be programmed to perform an action or sequence of actions and the schedule can be modified during Runtime Schedulel Properties Type Daily Mode Time Condition F On startup V Enable schedule e Figure 188 By default when a schedule is added the Enable schedule checkbox is marked You have the option to keep a schedule in the project but disable it by unchecking the box Each Scheduler can be configured to run once at Startup when the On Startup check box in marked Additionally you can specify the scheduler to be enabled only at the first start up run by using the Execute only at startup check box Type The Type combo allows you to select the type of Schedulers as shown in the figure below However you
310. und later in this document in the chapter titled FTP Authorizations ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 124 12 Using ActiveX Client for Internet Explorer In the standard distribution of HMWIN Studio a HMWIN Client and an ActiveX Client is provided Activex components are NOT installed by default to the Target devices in order to save space in the flash memory 12 1Installing ActiveX The ActiveX component is distributed with the HMWIN Studio installation package The related files are located in the Runtime folder of the HMWIN Studio installation directory The files HMIAX cab and HM IClientAX html should be copied into the workspace folder of the Target device where the Runtime is installed The file copy can be done using the panel FTP server Starting from v1 90 b608 of HMWIN Studio has been introduced software plug in support ref to chapter on software Plug ins chapter for more details to simplify ActiveX installation Just enable ActiveX plug in from project properties and install update runtime to add ActiveX files to the runtime and transfer it into the target without the need of manual copy of it via FTP NOTE This ActiveX requires Microsoft Visual C 2008 Redistributable Package x86 installed on your system You may need to download the Microsoft Visual C 2008 Redistributable Package x86 from the Microsoft web site NOTE The ActiveX plug in require about 10MB of space Enable it only if required by t
311. useClick me eventiInfo do Something 34 2 1 2 onMouseHold void onMouseHold me eventinfo This event is available only for buttons and it occurs when the button is pressed and released after n seconds where n Hold Time seconds specify in widget properties Parameters me The object that triggers the event eventiInfo Details of the event triggered function buttonStdl onMouseHold me eventiInfo do something 34 2 1 3 onMousePress void onMousePress me eventinfo This event is available only for buttons and it occurs when the button is pressed Parameters me The object that triggers the event eventInfo Details of the event triggered function buttonStdl onMousePress me eventinfo Geo a naling 34 2 1 4 onMouseRelease void onMouseRelease me eventiInfo This event is available only for buttons and it occurs when the button is released ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 260 Parameters me The object that triggers the event eventiInfo Details of the event triggered function buttonStdl onMouseRelease me eventiInfo i Goesome ehalace 34 2 1 5 onDataUpdate boolean onDataUpdate me eventInfo This occurs when the data attached to the Widget changes Parameters me The object that triggers the event eventInfo An object with these fields you can refer fields using dot notation oldValue The old value that is the widget value before the change newVal
312. uter running HMWIN Studio To upload a project proceed as follows 1 Run gt Manage Target 2 Intab Runtime Select IP of the device from Target menu Target Note 192 158 40 28 L Bp winxp clientl 192 168 42 30 Status HMI 192 168 40 28 HMI 192 168 41 1 HMI 192 168 42 20 HMI 192 168 41 171 HMI 192 168 6 7 Advanced Settings Figure 53 3 Click on Retrieve Projects to list all projects available in the target device 4 Select project to upload 5 Click on Upload Project 6 Enter password ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 49 7 Upload process starts Once upload has completed a copy of project is available in C Users username Documents HMWIN Studio workspace Uploaded RuntimelPAddress workspace ProjectName Starting from HMWIN Studio v1 90 build 608 upload is no longer based on User Management for access protection but is protected by a dedicated password scheme Please refer to Remote access protection to HMI Panels for more information related to access protection NOTE If upload operation failed please verify firewall settings of PC where HMWIN Studio is installed ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 50 6 Programming Concepts The programming guidelines for HMWIN Studio are based on a few basic concepts which are common in many parts of the system 6 1 Attach to In HMWIN Studio the basic programming techniques are used to configure the properties of an object placed
313. ven as Use Base Settings This means that it takes the permission given to the page Read Only The widget permission takes the priority as follows e Low priority Basic settings widget settings in general for the project e Medium priority Page settings settings for all the widgets on a particular page e High priority Widget settings individual widgets or its group parent widget permission of any page For example suppose a widget is set at Read Only permission at project Level and it is given Full Access at page Level then the page Level Settings will be taken ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 189 Later in the chapter we explain how to modify permissions for a specific widget directly from the page view rather than locating the widget from the tree view shown in the authorization dialog 22 3 2 Action Permissions admin authonzations Action Base settings Action Permission Pagel E a Page Right Trend Allowed Refresh Widget Allowed i UpLoad Recipe lower F Data Transfer Not Allowed Write Tag X Step Tag Allowed Launch Application Allowed Figure 198 With this dialog it is possible to assign the authorizations for the actions with respect to a project The access is either Allowed or Not Allowed As for the widgets the authorizations can be assigned globally but also for each single page and the widget programmed into the project Later in the chapter we will explain how to modify p
314. very handy in re using the same graphics to visualize a set of data coming from different homogenous sources just by letting the user pick the machine to monitor from a list Graphic re usage is also very important in achieving better overall performances 30 1 Creating an Indexed Addressing Set The following example introduces the common usage scenario of Indexed Addressing The sample system consists of a building with 4 rooms and each room is equipped with Temperature Pressure and Humidity sensors All data can be laid out in a table form ee enen ee moonen Taking advantage of the Indexed Addressing feature you can use the same table form to easily arrange your data in the HMI All the three different sensors can now be visualized in a single page like the following in which Room number is used as a selector combo box to pick up the right set of tags Temperature C 21 Pressure 1 Umidity Figure 240 In order to create the Indexed Tag Set of the previous example in HMWIN Studio ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 226 1 Define protocols and tags in Tag Editor For each room and each sensor to visualize an appropriate tag is required Room3 Lmidity Room4 Lmidity Figure 241 2 Create a tag RoomNumber to use as Index Tag for selecting rooms In this example could be of type Room4 Temperature Room4 Pressure Driver Address Modbus TCP prot Modbus TCP prot1 Mo
315. which the standard time starts range of the variable is 0 11 so w r t the picture it is November 10 Standard Day day of week in which the standard time starts w r t the picture it is Sunday 0 ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 71 Standard hour Standard minute Dst offset Dst week Dst Month Dst Day Dst hour Dst minute Figure 75 8 4 Device hour in which the standard time starts w r t the picture in Time field it is 02 2 minute in which the standard time starts w r t the picture in Time field it is 00 0 Represents the offset in minutes when DLS time is set with respect to GMT w r t the picture it is 7 60 420 minutes Week in which the DLS time starts w r t the picture it is Second 2 month in which the DLS time starts range of the variable is 0 11 so w r t the picture it is March 2 day of week in which the DLS time starts w r t the picture it is Sunday 0 hour in which the DLS time starts w r t the picture in Time field it is 02 2 minute in which the DLS time starts w r t the picture in Time field it is 00 0 Parameters for Day Light Saving Settings STANDARD TIME START JIN UTC STANDARD TIME START JIN UTC 02002 RRENTLY SET ard Time Variables can be used to adjust specific device settings and obtain operational information Available System Memory Backlight Time ACGMO195V1EN Returns the free available RAM memory in
316. will be displayed as shown in the figure below ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 26 ProjectView 1 x Soy E E Projecti eooo Driver gt EA Project 5 Pages vn Events Buffer 2 Scheduler Sine y gt MultiLanguage E ia Security a ol UserGroups B Dictionaries jp DialogPages je Page Templates Figure 24 To add a new Tag click on the icon and select the Address from the Communication protocol address dialog When Tags are initially added these Tags are named Tag1 Tag2 etc by default The user can rename the Tag with the appropriate name by clicking once on the Tag name The Tag Editor provides a Tag Import feature which is available based on the protocol selected Not all protocols support Tag Import If the protocol does support this feature See specific Protocol documentation first select the Protocol from the filter button and then click on the Import button as shown in the figure below Figure 25 You will see the dialog that corresponds to the protocol selected which prompts you to browse for the symbol file The symbol file is exported from the controller programming software ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 2 3 4 1 Tag Editor The tool in HMWIN Studio used to create and manage tags is called the Tag Editor For each tag the Tag Editor allows you to specify several properties Name This is the unique name at the project level of the tag T
317. y reflect that no value is available at this time BAD for reasons such as the value may have not been provided by the data source ACGMO195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 102 A device failure has been detected Timeout occurred before device responded Communications have failed There are no data found to provide upper or lower bound value trend interface specific flag No data have been collected i e archiving not active Trend interface specific flag When the HMI return online after a reboot or from a condition where sampling stopped a sample with quality value 32 is added to indicate this temporary offline status UNCERTAIN There is no specific reason why the value is uncertain 65 UNCERTAIN There is no specific reason why the value is uncertain The value has pegged at some lower limit UNCERTAIN There is no specific reason why the value is uncertain The value has pegged at some high limit UNCERTAIN There is no specific reason why the value is uncertain The value is a constant and cannot move The returned value is outside the limits defined for it Note that UNCERTAIN in this case the Limits field indicates which limit has been exceeded but the value can move farther out of this range The returned value is outside the limits defined for it Note that in this case the Limits field indicates which limit has been PE R exceeded but the value can move farther out of this range The value
318. zed SVG is not simple Only Tiny 1 2 ACGMO0195V1EN HMWIN Studio User Manual 314 http www ws org TR SVGTiny12 supported 9 Try to avoid using too many widgets in a page Often widgets are placed outside of the visible area or their transparency is controlled by a tag Since widgets are loaded even if they are not visible having too many widgets in a page can slow down significantly the page change time 10 If possible split a page with too many widgets in multiple pages with less widget 11 For popping up new graphic elements in a page prefer dialog pages with controlled positioning to transparent widgets 12 Have a check in opt folder to see if static optimization is working as expected the widgets z order might need to be changed to fix it 13 Numeric fields are often used to run JavaScript code on OnDataUpdate event even if the widget doesn t need to be visible on the page In this case place the widget outside the page visible area instead of making it invisible altering font color or visibility property In fact in the latter case it is likely to end up with many left over wedges 14 Use HotSpot button if you need a touch area to react to user inputs 15 If you reuse a widget from the gallery or you create your own remember to set the right optimization properties either static dynamic auto or check if that kind of widget has the desired optimization properties For example button widgets are dynamic widgets For instance

HMWIN Studio User Manual, ACGM0195V1EN

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents